Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisProvides an in-depth coverage of TV White Space Technology (TVWS) and the various challenges of its new innovations This book covers the full spectrum of TVWS technology including regulations, technology, standardizations, and worldwide deployments. It begins with an introduction to cognitive radio and TVWS. The regulation activities in TVWS throughout North America, Europe, and Asia Pacific are covered in depth. After a discussion of regulations, the authors examine the standardizations developed to specify the enabling technologies of TVWS systems. The following chapter focuses on the key technologies that differentiate TVWS from a conventional wireless communication system. Describes various worldwide use cases and deployments based on the needs of the consumers Covers IEEE 802.19.1, IEEE 802.22, IEEE 802.11af, IEEE 802.15.4m, and IETF protocol for Accessing White Spaces Studies the market and commercial potential of TVWS and other speTable of ContentsPreface xi Abbreviations xiii 1. Introduction to Cognitive Radio and Television White Space 1 1.1 Spectrum Survey 3 1.2 Spectrum Harmonization 3 1.3 National Broadband Plan 7 1.3.1 The United States 8 1.3.2 Canada 8 1.3.3 The European Union 9 1.3.4 The United Kingdom 9 1.3.5 Japan 9 1.3.6 South Korea 10 1.3.7 Singapore 10 1.3.8 Australia 11 1.4 Cognitive Radio 11 1.5 Television White Space 13 1.5.1 TVWS Regulation 15 1.5.2 Standardization 16 1.5.3 Potential Applications 17 1.5.4 Technologies 18 1.5.5 Moving Forward 19 1.5.6 Features of TVWS 20 1.6 Summary 20 References 21 2. Regulations 23 2.1 North America 24 2.1.1 The United States of America: FCC 24 2.1.2 Canada: Industry Canada 36 2.2 Europe 42 2.2.1 The United Kingdom: Ofcom 42 2.2.2 Europe: CEPT 49 2.3 Asia Pacific 52 2.3.1 Singapore, IDA 52 2.3.2 New Zealand, Radio Spectrum Management 53 2.4 Regulation Comparison 53 2.4.1 TVWS Frequency Range 53 2.4.2 Number of Channels 55 2.4.3 Channel Bandwidth 56 2.4.4 Types of Devices 56 2.4.5 In-Channel and OOB Power Limits 56 2.4.6 WSDB Requirements 58 References 58 3. Standardizations 61 3.1 IEEE 802.19.1 62 3.1.1 Introduction 62 3.1.2 System Architecture 62 3.1.3 Entities Operations 64 3.1.4 Coexistence Mechanisms and Algorithms 66 3.2 IEEE 802.22 70 3.2.1 Introduction 70 3.2.2 Cognitive Radio Capability 72 3.2.3 MAC Sublayer 76 3.2.4 Physical Layer 78 3.3 IEEE 802.11AF 78 3.3.1 Introduction 78 3.3.2 Operating Mechanisms for TVWS 80 3.3.3 MAC Sublayer 82 3.3.4 Physical Layer 83 3.4 IEEE 802.15.4M 85 3.4.1 Introduction 85 3.4.2 MAC Sublayer 88 3.4.3 Physical Layer 92 3.5 IETF Protocol to Access White Spaces 96 References 97 4. TVWS Technology 99 4.1 Physical Layer 100 4.1.1 TVWS Antenna 101 4.1.2 Spectrum Identification 107 4.1.3 Channel Aggregation 112 4.1.4 Out-Of-Band Leakage Control 113 4.1.5 Positioning 115 4.2 Medium Access Control Layer 117 4.2.1 Secondary User Networks Coexistence Based on IPM 119 4.2.2 Dynamic Spectrum Assignment 123 4.3 Network Layer 128 4.4 Application Layer 133 4.4.1 Enhanced WSDB 134 4.4.2 REM Through WSD Networks 146 4.5 White Space Devices 152 4.5.1 KTS Wireless AWR 154 4.5.2 6Harmonics Core Adaptive Radio 155 4.5.3 Carlson’s RuralConnect WSD 155 4.5.4 WSD From Singapore Power Automation and I2R 157 4.5.5 Adaptrum ACRS 158 4.5.6 Redline RTG Connect-IWS 159 4.5.7 MELD F-Class 160 4.5.8 Others 161 4.6 Summary 161 References 162 5. Worldwide Deployment 165 5.1 North America 167 5.1.1 The United States 168 5.1.2 Canada 173 5.2 Europe 174 5.2.1 The United Kingdom 174 5.3 Asia 180 5.3.1 Bhutan 180 5.3.2 The Philippines 181 5.3.3 Japan 184 5.3.4 Taiwan 185 5.3.5 Singapore 186 5.3.6 Indonesia 189 5.3.7 Hong Kong 190 5.4 Africa 192 5.4.1 Botswana 193 5.4.2 Namibia 193 5.4.3 Ghana 193 5.4.4 South Africa 194 5.4.5 Malawi 195 5.4.6 Tanzania 195 5.4.7 Kenya 196 5.5 The Rest of the World 196 5.5.1 Uruguay 196 5.5.2 New Zealand 196 References 197 6. Commercial and Market Potential 199 6.1 Introduction 199 6.2 Spectrum Trading and Management 207 6.2.1 Primary Users’ Incentives to Share the Spectrum 209 6.2.2 Secondary Users’ Incentives to Buy the Spectrum 209 6.2.3 Case Study: High Priority Channel in Singapore’s TV White Space Regulation 210 6.3 Potential Application Scenarios 210 6.3.1 Wi-Fi with Cognitive Access to TV White Space 210 6.3.2 UMTS and LTE Extension over TV White Space 212 6.3.3 Digital Video Broadcasting for Handhelds (DVB-H) with Cognitive Access to TVWS 214 6.3.4 M2M Communications 215 6.3.5 Smart City Deployments and Applications 216 6.3.6 Agricultural Automation 217 6.3.7 Public Safety with Cognitive Access to TVWS 218 6.3.8 PMSE with Cognitive Access to TVWS 219 6.4 Summary 219 References 219 7. Future Development 221 7.1 Regulation 221 7.1.1 Citizens Broadband Radio Service (3.5 GHz) 223 7.1.2 Spectrum Refarming and Trading 223 7.1.3 Sharing in Licensed Bands 224 7.1.4 Spectrum Sharing for IoT 225 7.2 Technologies 225 7.2.1 Spectrum Sensing 226 7.2.2 WSDB 227 7.2.3 Antenna 229 7.2.4 Related Technologies 229 7.2.5 Privacy and Enforcement 232 7.3 Applications and Business Model 233 7.4 Summary 233 References 234 Appendix A. Dynamic Spectrum Alliance Model White Spaces Rules 235 A.1 Generalized Description of Propagation Model 246 A.1.1 Introduction 246 A.1.2 The Longley–Rice Algorithm 247 A.2 Longley–Rice Parameters for TV Broadcast Field Strength Calculations 261 A.2.1 Introduction 261 A.2.2 Model Parameters 262 A.2.3 Path Calculations 265 A.2.4 Summary 266 A.3 Calculation of Available TV White Space Frequencies and Power Limits 266 A.3.1 Introduction 266 A.3.2 Definitions 266 A.3.3 Calculations 273 A.4 Information Regarding ITU-R P-1812 278 A.4.1 Introduction 278 Appendix B. Performance of SEA 281 Appendix C. Self-Positioning Based on DVB-T2 Signals 285 C.1 DVB-T2-Based Positioning 285 C.1.1 Threshold-Based Timing Estimation Approach 287 C.1.2 Iterative Timing Estimation Approach 289 Appendix D. Algorithm for Dynamic Spectrum Assignment 297 D.1 System Model 297 D.2 Problem Formulation and Optimal Spectrum Assignment Policy 298 Appendix E. Calculation for Area-Based WSDB 301 E.1 Method 1: Channel Availability for an Area Based on Center Location and Radius 301 E.1.1 M1-Scheme 1-Step 1: Checking the Center Location and Radius 301 E.1.2 M1-Scheme 1-Step 2 (Optional): Finding a Subset of PU Keep-Out Contour Coordinates 302 E.1.3 M1-Scheme 1-Step 3: Determine the Area of Circle Is Outside of PU Keep-Out Area 303 E.1.4 M1-Scheme 2-Step 1: Checking the Center Location and Radius 306 E.1.5 M1-Scheme 2-Step 2: Determine a Set of Location Check Points 307 E.1.6 M1-Scheme 2-Step 3: Determine If All the LCPs Are Outside of the PU Keep-Out Contour 307 E.2 Method 2: Channel Availability for an Arbitrary Area Bounded by a Series of Location Information 308 E.2.1 M2-Scheme 1 309 E.2.2 M2-Scheme 2 310 Appendix F. Embedded Broadcast WSDB 313 F.1 Teletext-Based Broadcast WSDB 313 F.2 DVB- or HBB-Based Broadcast WSDB 313 F.3 DAB- or HD Radio-Based Broadcast WSDB 315 Appendix G. Revenue Maximization of WSDB-Q 317 G.1 Maximizing Revenue of WSDB Provider 317 Index 321

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn Innovative Approach to Multidimensional Signals and Systems Theory for Image and Video Processing In this volume, Eric Dubois further develops the theory of multi-D signal processing wherein input and output are vector-value signals. With this framework, he introduces the reader to crucial concepts in signal processing such as continuous- and discrete-domain signals and systems, discrete-domain periodic signals, sampling and reconstruction, light and color, random field models, image representation and more. While most treatments use normalized representations for non-rectangular sampling, this approach obscures much of the geometrical and scale information of the signal. In contrast, Dr. Dubois uses actual units of space-time and frequency. Basis-independent representations appear as much as possible, and the basis is introduced where needed to perform calculations or implementations. Thus, lattice theory is developed from the beginning and rectangular samplTable of ContentsAbout the Companion Website xiii 1 Introduction 1 2 Continuous-Domain Signals and Systems 5 2.1 Introduction 5 2.2 Multidimensional Signals 7 2.2.1 Zero–One Functions 7 2.2.2 Sinusoidal Signals 7 2.2.3 Real Exponential Functions 10 2.2.4 Zone Plate 10 2.2.5 Singularities 12 2.2.6 Separable and Isotropic Functions 13 2.3 Visualization of Two-Dimensional Signals 13 2.4 Signal Spaces and Systems 14 2.5 Continuous-Domain Linear Systems 15 2.5.1 Linear Systems 15 2.5.2 Linear Shift-Invariant Systems 19 2.5.3 Response of a Linear System 20 2.5.4 Response of a Linear Shift-Invariant System 20 2.5.5 Frequency Response of an LSI System 22 2.6 The Multidimensional Fourier Transform 22 2.6.1 Fourier Transform Properties 23 2.6.2 Evaluation of Multidimensional Fourier Transforms 27 2.6.3 Two-Dimensional Fourier Transform of Polygonal Zero–One Functions 30 2.6.4 Fourier Transform of a Translating Still Image 33 2.7 Further Properties of Differentiation and Related Systems 33 2.7.1 Directional Derivative 34 2.7.2 Laplacian 34 2.7.3 Filtered Derivative Systems 35 Problems 37 3 Discrete-Domain Signals and Systems 41 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Lattices 42 3.2.1 Basic Definitions 42 3.2.2 Properties of Lattices 44 3.2.3 Examples of 2D and 3D Lattices 44 3.3 Sampling Structures 46 3.4 Signals Defined on Lattices 47 3.5 Special Multidimensional Signals on a Lattice 48 3.5.1 Unit Sample 48 3.5.2 Sinusoidal Signals 49 3.6 Linear Systems Over Lattices 51 3.6.1 Response of a Linear System 51 3.6.2 Frequency Response 52 3.7 Discrete-Domain Fourier Transforms Over a Lattice 52 3.7.1 Definition of the Discrete-Domain Fourier Transform 52 3.7.2 Properties of the Multidimensional Fourier Transform Over a Lattice Λ 53 3.7.3 Evaluation of Forward and Inverse Discrete-Domain Fourier Transforms 57 3.8 Finite Impulse Response (FIR) Filters 59 3.8.1 Separable Filters 66 Problems 67 4 Discrete-Domain Periodic Signals 69 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Periodic Signals 69 4.3 Linear Shift-Invariant Systems 72 4.4 Discrete-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 73 4.5 Properties of the Discrete-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 77 4.6 Computation of the Discrete-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 81 4.6.1 Direct Computation 81 4.6.2 Selection of Coset Representatives 82 4.7 Vector Space Representation of Images Based on the Discrete-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 87 4.7.1 Vector Space Representation of Signals with Finite Extent 87 4.7.2 Block-Based Vector-Space Representation 88 Problems 90 5 Continuous-Domain Periodic Signals 93 5.1 Introduction 93 5.2 Continuous-Domain Periodic Signals 93 5.3 Linear Shift-Invariant Systems 94 5.4 Continuous-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 96 5.5 Properties of the Continuous-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 96 5.6 Evaluation of the Continuous-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 100 Problems 105 6 Sampling, Reconstruction and Sampling Theorems for Multidimensional Signals 107 6.1 Introduction 107 6.2 Ideal Sampling and Reconstruction of Continuous-Domain Signals 107 6.3 Practical Sampling 110 6.4 Practical Reconstruction 112 6.5 Sampling and Periodization of Multidimensional Signals and Transforms 113 6.6 Inverse Fourier Transforms 116 6.6.1 Inverse Discrete-Domain Aperiodic Fourier Transform 117 6.6.2 Inverse Continuous-Domain Periodic Fourier Transform 118 6.6.3 Inverse Continuous-Domain Fourier Transform 119 6.7 Signals and Transforms with Finite Support 119 6.7.1 Continuous-Domain Signals with Finite Support 119 6.7.2 Discrete-Domain Aperiodic Signals with Finite Support 120 6.7.3 Band-Limited Continuous-Domain Γ-Periodic Signals 121 Problems 121 7 Light and Color Representation in Imaging Systems 125 7.1 Introduction 125 7.2 Light 125 7.3 The Space of Light Stimuli 128 7.4 The Color Vector Space 129 7.4.1 Properties of Metamerism 130 7.4.2 Algebraic Condition for Metameric Equivalence 132 7.4.3 Extension of Metameric Equivalence to A 135 7.4.4 Definition of the Color Vector Space 135 7.4.5 Bases for the Vector Space C 137 7.4.6 Transformation of Primaries 138 7.4.7 The CIE Standard Observer 140 7.4.8 Specification of Primaries 142 7.4.9 Physically Realizable Colors 144 7.5 Color Coordinate Systems 147 7.5.1 Introduction 147 7.5.2 Luminance and Chromaticity 147 7.5.3 Linear Color Representations 153 7.5.4 Perceptually Uniform Color Coordinates 155 7.5.5 Display Referred Coordinates 157 7.5.6 Luma-Color-Difference Representation 158 Problems 158 8 Processing of Color Signals 163 8.1 Introduction 163 8.2 Continuous-Domain Systems for Color Images 163 8.2.1 Continuous-Domain Color Signals 163 8.2.2 Continuous-Domain Systems for Color Signals 166 8.2.3 Frequency Response and Fourier Transform 168 8.3 Discrete-Domain Color Images 173 8.3.1 Color Signals With All Components on a Single Lattice 173 8.3.1.1 Sampling a Continuous-Domain Color Signal Using a Single Lattice 175 8.3.1.2 S-CIELAB Error Criterion 175 8.3.2 Color Signals With Different Components on Different Sampling Structures 180 8.4 Color Mosaic Displays 188 9 Random Field Models 193 9.1 Introduction 193 9.2 What is a Random Field? 194 9.3 Image Moments 195 9.3.1 Mean, Autocorrelation, Autocovariance 195 9.3.2 Properties of the Autocorrelation Function 198 9.3.3 Cross-Correlation 199 9.4 Power Density Spectrum 199 9.4.1 Properties of the Power Density Spectrum 200 9.4.2 Cross Spectrum 201 9.4.3 Spectral Density Matrix 201 9.5 Filtering and Sampling of WSS Random Fields 202 9.5.1 LSI Filtering of a Scalar WSS Random Field 202 9.5.2 Why is Sf(u) Called a Power Density Spectrum? 204 9.5.3 LSI Filtering of a WSS Color Random Field 205 9.5.4 Sampling of a WSS Continuous-Domain Random Field 206 9.6 Estimation of the Spectral Density Matrix 207 Problems 214 10 Analysis and Design of Multidimensional FIR Filters 215 10.1 Introduction 215 10.2 Moving Average Filters 215 10.3 Gaussian Filters 217 10.4 Band-pass and Band-stop Filters 220 10.5 Frequency-Domain Design of Multidimensional FIR Filters 225 10.5.1 FIR Filter Design Using Windows 226 10.5.2 FIR Filter Design Using Least-pth Optimization 229 Problems 236 11 Changing the Sampling Structure of an Image 237 11.1 Introduction 237 11.2 Sublattices 237 11.3 Upsampling 239 11.4 Downsampling 245 11.5 Arbitrary Sampling Structure Conversion 248 11.5.1 Sampling Structure Conversion Using a Common Superlattice 248 11.5.2 Polynomial Interpolation 251 Problems 254 12 Symmetry Invariant Signals and Systems 255 12.1 LSI Systems Invariant to a Group of Symmetries 255 12.1.1 Symmetries of a Lattice 255 12.1.2 Symmetry-Group Invariant Systems 258 12.1.3 Spaces of Symmetric Signals 261 12.2 Symmetry-Invariant Discrete-Domain Periodic Signals and Systems 269 12.2.1 Symmetric Discrete-Domain Periodic Signals 270 12.2.2 Discrete-Domain Periodic Symmetry-Invariant Systems 271 12.2.3 Discrete-Domain Symmetry-Invariant Periodic Fourier Transform 273 12.3 Vector-Space Representation of Images Based on the Symmetry-Invariant Periodic Fourier Transform 282 13 Lattices 289 13.1 Introduction 289 13.2 Basic Definitions 289 13.3 Properties of Lattices 293 13.4 Reciprocal Lattice 294 13.5 Sublattices 295 13.6 Cosets and the Quotient Group 296 13.7 Basis Transformations 298 13.7.1 Elementary Column Operations 299 13.7.2 Hermite Normal Form 300 13.8 Smith Normal Form 302 13.9 Intersection and Sum of Lattices 304 Appendix A: Equivalence Relations 311 Appendix B: Groups 313 Appendix C: Vector Spaces 315 Appendix D: Multidimensional Fourier Transform Properties 319 References 323 Index 329

Read more less

Book SynopsisAircraft Systems: A Design and Development Guide is a textbook whichcomprehensively covers the design and development of electrical and mechanical systems for fixed wing aircraft. It takes a practical approach and includes examples throughout based on commercial and military aircraft. Academic design studies and methods are presented and technical and mathematical methods of design are also included. Aircraft Systems: A Design and Development Guide provides broad coverage of aircraft systems, covering electrical power systems, hydraulics, pneumatics, flight control actuation and landing gear, to name a few. It includes design guides for each system and also covers environmental concerns for aircraft control systems.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe best-practices solution guide for rescuing broken software systems Incremental Software Architecture is a solutions manual for companies with underperforming software systems. With complete guidance and plenty of hands-on instruction, this practical guide shows you how to identify and analyze the root cause of software malfunction, then identify and implement the most powerful remedies to save the system. You''ll learn how to avoid developing software systems that are destined to fail, and the methods and practices that help you avoid business losses caused by poorly designed software. Designed to answer the most common questions that arise when software systems negatively impact business performance, this guide details architecture and design best practices for enterprise architecture efforts, and helps you foster the reuse and consolidation of software assets. Relying on the wrong software system puts your company at risk of failing. It''s a question of when, Table of ContentsACKNOWLEDGMENTS ix ABOUT THE AUTHOR xi CHAPTER 1 The Need for Incremental Software Architecture 1 PART ONE—Why Do Enterprise Systems Fail? 11 CHAPTER 2 What Is a Failing Enterprise System? Is It Management’s Fault? 13 CHAPTER 3 Technological System-Level Failures 23 PART TWO—End-State Architecture Discovery and Analysis 35 CHAPTER 4 System Fabric Discovery and Analysis 39 CHAPTER 5 Application Discovery 55 CHAPTER 6 Application Mapping 67 PART THREE—End-State Architecture Decomposition 83 CHAPTER 7 End-State Architecture Structural Decomposition through Classification 85 CHAPTER 8 Business Analysis Drives End-State Architecture Structural Decomposition 103 CHAPTER 9 Technical Analysis Drives End-State Architecture Structural Decomposition 119 CHAPTER 10 Business Views Drive End-State Architecture Decomposition 145 CHAPTER 11 Environment Behavior Drives End-State Architecture Decomposition 161 PART FOUR—End-State Architecture Verification 179 CHAPTER 12 Design Substantiation 181 CHAPTER 13 Introduction to End-State Architecture Stress Testing 197 CHAPTER 14 End-State Architecture Stress Testing Driven by Pressure Points 223 CHAPTER 15 Enterprise Capacity Planning for End-State Architecture 235 INDEX 253

Read more less

Book SynopsisModeling of PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS Using MATLAB Provides simplified MATLAB codes for analysis of photovoltaic systems, describes the model of the whole photovoltaic power system, and shows readers how to build these models line by line. This book presents simplified coded models for photovoltaic (PV)-based systems using MATLAB to help readers understand the dynamic behavior of these systems. Through the use of MATLAB, the reader has the ability to modify system configuration, parameters, and optimization criteria. Topics covered include energy sources, storage, and power electronic devices. The book contains six chapters that cover systems' components from the solar source to the end user. Chapter 1 discusses modeling of the solar source, and Chapter 2 discusses modeling of the PV source. Chapter 3 focuses on modeling of PV systems' power electronic features and auxiliary power sources. Modeling of PV systemsTable of ContentsAbout the Authors vii Foreword ix Acknowledgment xi 1 Modeling of the Solar Source 1 1.1 Introduction, 1 1.2 Modeling of the Sun Position, 2 1.3 Modeling of Extraterrestrial Solar Radiation, 8 1.4 Modeling of Global Solar Radiation on a Horizontal Surface, 13 1.5 Modeling of Global Solar Radiation on a Tilt Surface, 17 1.6 Modeling of Solar Radiation Based on Ground Measurements, 21 1.7 AI Techniques for Modeling of Solar Radiation, 26 1.8 Modeling of Sun Trackers, 32 Further Reading, 37 2 Modeling of Photovoltaic Source 39 2.1 Introduction, 39 2.2 Modeling of Solar Cell Based on Standard Testing Conditions, 39 2.3 Modeling of Solar Cell Temperature, 48 2.4 Empirical Modeling of PV Panels Based on Actual Performance, 48 2.5 Statistical Models for PV Panels Based on Actual Performance, 49 2.6 Characterization of PV Panels Based on Actual Performance, 51 2.7 AI Application for Modeling of PV Panels, 52 Further Reading, 84 3 Modeling of PV System Power Electronic Features and Auxiliary Power Sources 87 3.1 Introduction, 87 3.2 Maximum Power Point Trackers, 87 3.3 DC–AC Inverters, 96 3.4 Storage Battery, 102 3.5 Modeling of Wind Turbines, 107 3.6 Modeling of Diesel Generator, 107 3.7 PV Array Tilt Angle, 108 3.8 Motor Pump Model in PV Pumping System, 113 Further Reading, 123 4 Modeling of Photovoltaic System Energy Flow 125 4.1 Introduction, 125 4.2 Energy Flow Modeling for Stand‐Alone PV Power Systems, 125 4.3 Energy Flow Modeling for Hybrid PV/Wind Power Systems, 129 4.4 Energy Flow Modeling for Hybrid PV/Diesel Power Systems, 129 4.5 Current‐Based Modeling of PV/Diesel Generator/Battery System Considering Typical Control Strategies, 136 Further Reading, 157 5 PV Systems in the Electrical Power System 159 5.1 Overview of Smart Grids, 159 5.2 Optimal Sizing of Grid‐Connected Photovoltaic System’s Inverter, 161 5.3 Integrating Photovoltaic Systems in Power System, 164 5.4 RAPSim, 168 Further Reading, 174 6 PV System Size Optimization 175 6.1 Introduction, 175 6.2 Stand‐Alone PV System Size Optimization, 176 6.3 Hybrid PV System Size Optimization, 190 6.4 PV Pumping System Size Optimization, 196 Further Reading, 211 Index 213

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a comprehensive study in digital image interpolation with theoretical, analytical and Matlab implementation. It includes all historically and practically important interpolation algorithms, accompanied with Matlab source code on a website, which will assist readers to learn and understand the implementation details of each presented interpolation algorithm. Furthermore, sections in fundamental signal processing theories and image quality models are also included. The authors intend for the book to help readers develop a thorough consideration of the design of image interpolation algorithms and applications for their future research in the field of digital image processing. Introduces a wide range of traditional and advanced image interpolation methods concisely and provides thorough treatment of theoretical foundations Discusses in detail the assumptions and limitations of presented algorithms Investigates a varTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xix Nomenclature xxi Abbreviations xxiii About the CompanionWebsite xxv 1 Signal Sampling 1 1.1 Sampling and Bandlimited Signal 1 1.2 Unitary Transform 4 1.2.1 Discrete Fourier Transform 4 1.3 Quantization 5 1.3.1 Quantization and Sampling Interaction 7 1.4 Sampled Function Approximation: Fitting and Interpolation 8 1.4.1 Zero-Order Hold (ZOH) 10 1.4.2 First-Order Hold (FOH) 10 1.4.3 Digital Interpolation 12 1.5 Book Organization 12 1.6 Exercises 15 2 Digital Image 17 2.1 Digital Imaging in MATLAB 21 2.2 Current Pixel and Neighboring Pixels 23 2.3 Frequency Domain 24 2.3.1 Transform Kernel 28 2.4 2D Filtering 28 2.4.1 Boundary Extension and Cropping 30 2.4.1.1 Constant Extension 31 2.4.1.2 Periodic Extension 31 2.4.1.3 Symmetric Extension 32 2.4.1.4 Infinite Extension 32 2.4.1.5 Cropping 33 2.5 Edge Extraction 34 2.5.1 First-Order Derivative Edge Detection Operators 36 2.5.1.1 Sobel Operator 37 2.5.2 Second-Order Derivative and Zero-Crossing Edge Detector 40 2.5.2.1 Laplacian Operator 41 2.5.2.2 Gaussian Smoothing 42 2.6 Geometric Transformation 45 2.6.1 Translation 46 2.6.2 Reflection 47 2.6.3 Scaling 47 2.6.4 Rotation 49 2.6.5 Affine Transformation 50 2.7 Resize an Image 51 2.7.1 Interpolation 51 2.7.2 Decimation 54 2.7.2.1 Direct Subsampling 55 2.7.2.2 Sinc Filter 55 2.7.2.3 Block Averaging 56 2.7.3 Built-in Image Resizing Function in MATLAB 57 2.8 Color Image 58 2.8.1 Color Filter Array and Demosaicing 60 2.8.2 Perceptual Color Space 60 2.9 Noise 62 2.9.1 Rank Order Filtering 65 2.9.2 Smoothing Filtering 65 2.10 Summary 67 2.11 Exercises 67 3 Image Quality 71 3.1 Image Features and Artifacts 72 3.1.1 Aliasing (Jaggy) 73 3.1.2 Smoothing (Blurring) 74 3.1.3 Edge Halo 74 3.1.4 Ringing 75 3.1.5 Blocking 75 3.2 Objective Quality Measure 75 3.2.1 Mean Squares Error 77 3.2.2 Peak Signal-to-Noise Ratio 78 3.2.3 Edge PSNR 79 3.3 Structural Similarity 81 3.3.1 Luminance 83 3.3.2 Contrast 84 3.3.3 Structural 84 3.3.4 Sensitivity of SSIM 85 3.3.4.1 K1 Sensitivity 85 3.3.4.2 K2 Sensitivity 86 3.4 Summary 88 3.5 Exercises 88 4 Nonadaptive Interpolation 91 4.1 Image Interpolation: Overture 92 4.1.1 Interpolation Kernel Characteristics 94 4.1.2 Nearest Neighbor 94 4.1.3 Bilinear 98 4.1.4 Bicubic 103 4.2 Frequency Domain Analysis 110 4.3 Mystery of Order 111 4.4 Application: Affine Transformation 113 4.4.1 Structural Integrity 116 4.5 Summary 118 4.6 Exercises 120 5 Transform Domain 123 5.1 DFT Zero Padding Interpolation 125 5.1.1 Implementation 127 5.2 Discrete Cosine Transform 132 5.2.1 DCT Zero Padding Interpolation 134 5.3 DCT Zero Padding Image Interpolation 138 5.3.1 Blocked Transform 138 5.3.2 Block-Based DCT Zero Padding Interpolation 140 5.3.2.1 Does Kernel Size Matter 142 5.4 Overlapping 144 5.5 Multi-Kernels 149 5.5.1 Extendible Inverse DCT 149 5.6 Iterative Error Correction 152 5.7 Summary 156 5.8 Exercises 157 6 Wavelet 161 6.1 Wavelet Analysis 162 6.1.1 Perfect Reconstruction 163 6.1.2 Multi-resolution Analysis 164 6.1.3 2DWavelet Transform 166 6.2 Wavelet Image Interpolation 168 6.2.1 Zero Padding 168 6.2.2 Multi-resolution Subband Image Estimation 170 6.2.3 Hölder Regularity 176 6.2.3.1 Local Regularity-Preserving Problems 177 6.3 Cycle Spinning 179 6.3.1 Zero Padding (WZP-CS) 179 6.3.2 High Frequency Subband Estimation (WLR-CS) 181 6.4 Error Correction 184 6.5 WhichWavelets to Use 186 6.6 Summary 187 6.7 Exercises 188 7 Edge-Directed Interpolation 191 7.1 Explicit Edge-Directed Interpolation 193 7.2 Implicit Edge-Directed Interpolation 196 7.2.1 Canny Edge Interpolation (CEI) 197 7.2.2 Edge-Based Line Averaging (ELA) 198 7.2.3 Directional-Orientation Interpolation (DOI) 199 7.2.4 Error-Amended Sharp Edge (EASE) 201 7.3 Summary 208 7.4 Exercises 209 8 Covariance-Based Interpolation 211 8.1 Modeling of Image Features 212 8.2 Interpolation by Autoregression 213 8.3 New Edge-Directed Interpolation (NEDI) 215 8.3.1 Type 0 Estimation 220 8.3.2 Type 1 Estimation 222 8.3.3 Type 2 Estimation 223 8.3.4 Pixel Intensity Correction 225 8.3.5 MATLAB Implementation 226 8.4 Boundary Extension 228 8.5 Threshold Selection 231 8.6 Error PropagationMitigation 233 8.7 CovarianceWindow Adaptation 238 8.7.1 PredictionWindow Adaptation 239 8.7.2 Mean CovarianceWindow Adaptation 241 8.7.3 Enhanced Modified Edge-Directed Interpolation (EMEDI) 242 8.8 Iterative Covariance Correction 249 8.8.1 iMEDI Implementation 255 8.9 Summary 260 8.10 Exercises 261 9 Partitioned Fractal Interpolation 263 9.1 Iterated Function System 264 9.1.1 Banach Fixed-Point Theorem 264 9.2 Partitioned Iterative Function System 266 9.3 Encoding 269 9.3.1 Range Block Partition 269 9.3.2 Domain Block Partition 270 9.3.3 Codebook Generation 271 9.3.4 Grayscale Scaling 274 9.3.5 Fractal Encoding Implementation 276 9.4 Decoding 277 9.4.1 Does Size Matter 281 9.5 Decoding with Interpolation 283 9.5.1 From Fitting to Interpolation 285 9.6 Overlapping 287 9.7 Summary 289 9.8 Exercises 290 Appendix MATLAB Functions List 291 Bibliography 295 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisThere is currently no single book that covers the mathematics, circuits, and electromagnetics backgrounds needed for the study of electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). This book aims to redress the balance by focusing on EMC and providing the background in all three disciplines. This background is necessary for many EMC practitioners who have been out of study for some time and who are attempting to follow and confidently utilize more advanced EMC texts. The book is split into three parts: Part 1 is the refresher course in the underlying mathematics; Part 2 is the foundational chapters in electrical circuit theory; Part 3 is the heart of the book: electric and magnetic fields, waves, transmission lines and antennas. Each part of the book provides an independent area of study, yet each is the logical step to the next area, providing a comprehensive course through each topic. Practical EMC applications at the end of each chapter illustrate the applicability of the chapter topicsTable of ContentsPreface xiii Part I Math Foundations of EMC 1 1 Matrix and Vector Algebra 3 1.1 Basic Concepts and Operations 3 1.2 Matrix Multiplication 5 1.3 Special Matrices 6 1.4 Matrices and Determinants 7 1.5 Inverse of a Matrix 9 1.6 Matrices and Systems of Equations 10 1.7 Solution of Systems of Equations 11 1.8 Cramer’s Rule 12 1.9 Vector Operations 13 1.10 EMC Applications 14 References 21 2 Coordinate Systems 23 2.1 Cartesian Coordinate System 23 2.2 Cylindrical Coordinate System 25 2.3 Spherical Coordinate System 27 2.4 Transformations between Coordinate Systems 29 2.5 EMC Applications 33 References 35 3 Vector Differential Calculus 37 3.1 Derivatives 37 3.2 Differential Elements 40 3.3 Constant]Coordinate Surfaces 45 3.4 Differential Operators 50 3.5 EMC Applications 55 References 57 4 Vector Integral Calculus 59 4.1 Line Integrals 59 4.2 Surface Integrals 66 4.3 Volume Integrals 71 4.4 Divergence Theorem of Gauss 71 4.5 Stokes’s Theorem 71 4.6 EMC Applications 72 References 79 5 Differential Equations 81 5.1 First Order Differential Equations – RC and RL Circuits 81 5.2 Second]Order Differential Equations – Series and Parallel RLC Circuits 85 5.3 Helmholtz Wave Equations 95 5.4 EMC Applications 99 References 108 6 Complex Numbers and Phasors 109 6.1 Definitions and Forms 109 6.2 Complex Conjugate 111 6.3 Operations on Complex Numbers 113 6.4 Properties of Complex Numbers 118 6.5 Complex Exponential Function 118 6.6 Sinusoids and Phasors 119 6.7 EMC Applications 123 References 140 Part II Circuits Foundations of EMC 141 7 Basic Laws and Methods of Circuit Analysis 143 7.1 Fundamental Concepts 143 7.2 Laplace Transform Basics 147 7.3 Fundamental Laws 152 7.4 EMC Applications 183 References 187 8 Systematic Methods of Circuit Analysis 189 8.1 Node Voltage Analysis 189 8.2 Mesh Current Analysis 192 8.3 EMC Applications 195 References 202 9 Circuit Theorems and Techniques 203 9.1 Superposition 203 9.2 Source Transformation 207 9.3 Thévenin Equivalent Circuit 211 9.4 Norton Equivalent Circuit 217 9.5 Maximum Power Transfer 220 9.6 Two]Port Networks 224 9.7 EMC Applications 236 References 241 10 Magnetically Coupled Circuits 243 10.1 Self and Mutual Inductance 243 10.2 Energy in a Coupled Circuit 248 10.3 Linear (Air]Core) Transformers 250 10.4 Ideal (Iron]Core) Transformers 251 10.5 EMC Applications 255 References 258 11 Frequency]Domain Analysis 259 11.1 Transfer Function 259 11.2 Frequency]Transfer Function 267 11.3 Bode Plots 272 11.4 Passive Filters 277 11.5 Resonance in RLC Circuits 294 11.6 EMC Applications 308 References 327 12 Frequency Content of Digital Signals 329 12.1 Fourier Series and Frequency Content of Signals 329 12.2 EMC Applications 347 References 351 Part III Electromagnetics Foundations of EMC 353 13 Static and Quasi]Static Electric Fields 355 13.1 Charge Distributions 355 13.2 Coulomb’s Law 356 13.3 Electric Field Intensity 357 13.4 Electric Field Due to Charge Distributions 358 13.5 Electric Flux Density 359 13.6 Gauss’s Law for the Electric Field 360 13.7 Applications of Gauss’s Law 360 13.8 Electric Scalar Potential and Voltage 367 13.9 Voltage Calculations due to Charge Distributions 369 13.10 Electric Flux Lines and Equipotential Surfaces 373 13.11 Maxwell’s Equations for Static Electric Field 374 13.12 Capacitance Calculations of Structures 374 13.13 Electric Boundary Conditions 380 13.14 EMC Applications 385 References 402 14 Static and Quasi]Static Magnetic Fields 403 14.1 Magnetic Flux Density 403 14.2 Magnetic Field Intensity 404 14.3 Biot–Savart Law 404 14.4 Current Distributions 405 14.5 Ampere’s Law 406 14.6 Applications of Ampere’s Law 407 14.7 Magnetic Flux 409 14.8 Gauss’s Law for Magnetic Field 410 14.9 Maxwell’s Equations for Static Fields 410 14.10 Vector Magnetic Potential 411 14.11 Faraday’s Law 412 14.12 Inductance Calculations of Structures 416 14.13 Magnetic Boundary Conditions 418 References 437 15 Rapidly Varying Electromagnetic Fields 439 15.1 Eddy Currents 439 15.2 Charge]Current Continuity Equation 440 15.3 Displacement Current 441 15.4 EMC Applications 444 References 452 16 Electromagnetic Waves 453 16.1 Uniform Waves – Time Domain Analysis 453 16.2 Uniform Waves – Sinusoidal Steady]State Analysis 460 16.3 Reflection and Transmission of Uniform Waves at Boundaries 464 16.4 EMC Applications 467 References 474 17 Transmission Lines 475 17.1 Transient Analysis 475 17.2 Steady]State Analysis 509 17.3 s Parameters 520 17.4 EMC Applications 527 References 542 18 Antennas and Radiation 543 18.1 Bridge between the Transmission Line and Antenna Theory 543 18.2 Hertzian Dipole Antenna 544 18.3 Far Field Criteria 548 18.4 Half]Wave Dipole Antenna 551 18.5 Quarter]Wave Monopole Antenna 554 18.6 Image Theory 554 18.7 Differential] and Common]Mode Currents and Radiation 557 18.8 Common Mode Current Creation 565 18.9 Antenna Circuit Model 571 18.10 EMC Applications 575 References 582 Appendix A EMC Tests and Measurements 583 A.1 Introduction – FCC Part 15 and CISPR 22 Standards 583 A.2 Conducted Emissions 588 A.3 Radiated Emissions 600 A.4 Conducted Immunity – ISO 11452]4 608 A.5 Radiated Immunity 615 A.6 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) 620 References 627 Index 629

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides readers with up-to-date coverage of fault location algorithms in transmission and distribution networks. The algorithms will help readers track down the exact location of a fault in the shortest possible time. Furthermore, voltage and current waveforms recorded by digital relays, digital fault recorders, and other intelligent electronic devices contain a wealth of information. Knowledge gained from analysing the fault data can help system operators understand what happened, why it happened and how it can be prevented from happening again. The book will help readers convert such raw data into useful information and improve power system performance and reliability.Table of ContentsPreface ix About the Companion Website xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Power System Faults 1 1.2 What Causes Shunt Faults? 4 1.3 Aim and Importance of Fault Location 16 1.4 Types of Fault-Locating Algorithms 19 1.5 How are Fault-Locating Algorithms Implemented? 21 1.6 Evaluation of Fault-Locating Algorithms 25 1.7 The Best Fault-Locating Algorithm 26 1.8 Summary 26 2 Symmetrical Components 27 2.1 Phasors 28 2.2 Theory of Symmetrical Components 29 2.3 Interconnecting Sequence Networks 31 2.4 Sequence Impedances of Three-Phase Lines 36 2.5 Exercise Problems 41 2.6 Summary 46 3 Fault Location on Transmission Lines 49 3.1 One-Ended Impedance-Based Fault Location Algorithms 49 3.1.1 Simple Reactance Method 52 3.1.2 Takagi Method 54 3.1.3 Modified Takagi Method 56 3.1.4 Current Distribution Factor Method 57 3.2 Two-Ended Impedance-Based Fault Location Algorithms 58 3.2.1 Synchronized Method 59 3.2.2 Unsynchronized Method 60 3.2.3 Unsynchronized Negative-Sequence Method 61 3.2.4 Synchronized Line Current Differential Method 62 3.3 Three-Ended Impedance-Based Fault Location Algorithms 62 3.3.1 Synchronized Method 63 3.3.2 Unsynchronized Method 65 3.3.3 Unsynchronized Negative-Sequence Method 66 3.3.4 Synchronized Line Current Differential Method 67 3.4 Traveling-Wave Fault Location Algorithms 68 3.4.1 Single-Ended TravelingWave Method 69 3.4.2 Double-Ended Traveling-Wave Method 71 3.4.3 Error Sources 71 3.5 Exercise Problems 77 3.6 Summary 93 4 Error Sources in Impedance-Based Fault Location 95 4.1 Power System Model 95 4.2 Input Data Errors 96 4.2.1 DC Offset 97 4.2.2 CT Saturation 99 4.2.3 Aging CCVTs 101 4.2.4 Open-Delta VTs 101 4.2.5 Inaccurate Line Length 104 4.2.6 Untransposed Lines 104 4.2.7 Variation in Earth Resistivity 106 4.2.8 Non-Homogeneous Lines 107 4.2.9 Incorrect Fault Type Selection 109 4.3 Application Errors 109 4.3.1 Load 109 4.3.2 Non-Homogeneous System 111 4.3.3 Zero-Sequence Mutual Coupling 111 4.3.4 Series Compensation 118 4.3.5 Three-Terminal Lines 119 4.3.6 Radial Tap 120 4.3.7 Evolving Faults 121 4.4 Exercise Problems 122 4.5 Summary 126 5 Fault Location on Overhead Distribution Feeders 129 5.1 Impedance-Based Methods 134 5.1.1 Loop Reactance Method 135 5.1.2 Simple Reactance Method 140 5.1.3 Takagi Method 140 5.1.4 Modified Takagi Method 141 5.1.5 Girgis et al. Method 141 5.1.6 Santoso et al. Method 143 5.1.7 Novosel et al. Method 144 5.2 Challenges with Distribution Fault Location 146 5.2.1 Load 146 5.2.2 Non-Homogeneous Lines 146 5.2.3 Inaccurate Earth Resistivity 149 5.2.4 Multiple Laterals 150 5.2.5 Best Data for Fault Location: Feeder or Substation Relays 151 5.2.6 Distributed Generation 152 5.2.7 High Impedance Faults 156 5.2.8 CT Saturation 156 5.2.9 Grounding 156 5.2.10 Short Duration Faults 157 5.2.11 Missing Voltage 157 5.3 Exercise Problems 158 5.4 Summary 177 6 Distribution Fault Location With Current Only 179 6.1 Current Phasors Only Method 179 6.2 Current Magnitude Only Method 184 6.3 Short-Circuit Fault Current Profile Method 191 6.4 Exercise Problems 193 6.5 Summary 208 7 System and Operational Benefits of Fault Location 209 7.1 Verify Relay Operation 210 7.2 Discover Erroneous Relay Settings 211 7.3 Detect Instrument Transformer Installation Errors 217 7.4 Validate Zero-Sequence Line Impedance 222 7.5 Calculate Fault Resistance 225 7.6 Prove Short-Circuit Model 226 7.7 Adapt Autoreclosing in Hybrid Lines 227 7.8 Detect the Occurrence of Multiple Faults 228 7.9 Identify Impending Failures and Take Corrective Action 232 7.10 Exercise Problems 232 7.11 Summary 239 A Fault Location Suite in MATLAB 241 A.1 Understanding the Fault Location Script 241 References 261 Index 269

Read more less

Book SynopsisGreen communications is a very hot topic. As mobile networks evolve in terms of higher rates/throughput, a consequent impact on operating costs is due to (aggregate) network energy consumption. As such, design on 4G networks and beyond have increasingly started to focus on `energy efficiency' or so-called green' networks. Many techniques and solutions have been proposed to enhance the energy efficiency of mobile networks, yet no book has provided an in-depth analysis of the energy consumption issues in mobile networks nor has detailed theories, tools and solutions for solving the energy efficiency problems. This book presents the techniques and solutions for enhancing energy efficiency of future mobile networks, and consists of three major parts. The first part presents a general description of mobile network evolution in terms of both capacity and energy efficiency. The second part discusses the advanced techniques to green mobile networks. The third part discusses the solutTable of ContentsPreface ix List of Abbreviations xi Part I Green Mobile Networking Technologies 1 1. Fundamental Green Networking Technologies 3 1.1 Energy Efficient Multi-cell Cooperation 3 1.2 Heterogeneous Networking 4 1.3 Mobile Traffic Offloading 6 1.3.1 Infrastructure Based Mobile Traffic Offloading 7 1.3.2 Ad-hoc Based Mobile Traffic Offloading 7 1.3.3 User–BS Associations in Heterogeneous Mobile Networks 7 1.4 Device-to-Device Communications and Proximity Services 8 1.5 Powering Mobile Networks With Renewable Energy 9 1.6 Green Communications via Cognitive Radio Communications 9 1.7 Green Communications via Optimizing Mobile Content Delivery 11 2. Multi-cell Cooperation Communications 15 2.1 Traffic Intensity Aware Multi-cell Cooperation 15 2.1.1 Cooperation to Estimate Traffic Demands 17 2.1.2 Cooperation to Optimize Switching Off Strategy 18 2.2 Energy Aware Multi-cell Cooperation 19 2.3 Energy Efficient CoMP Transmission 19 2.3.1 Increasing Energy Efficiency for Cell Edge Communications 19 2.3.2 Enabling More BSs Into Sleep Mode 22 2.4 Summary and Future Research 22 2.4.1 Coalition Formation 23 2.4.2 Green Energy Utilization 24 2.4.3 Incentive Mechanism 24 2.5 Questions 24 3. Powering Mobile Networks with Green Energy 25 3.1 Green Energy Models: Generation and Consumption 25 3.1.1 Green Power Generation 25 3.1.2 Mobile Network Energy Consumption 25 3.2 Green Energy Powered Mobile Base Stations 26 3.2.1 Green Energy Provisioning 26 3.2.2 Base Station Resource Management 27 3.3 Green Energy Powered Mobile Networks 28 3.3.1 Off-Grid Green Mobile Networks 29 3.3.2 On-Grid Green Mobile Networks 30 3.3.3 Mixture of Green Base Stations and Grid Powered Base Stations 31 3.4 Summary 32 3.5 Questions 32 4. Spectrum and Energy Harvesting Wireless Networks 33 4.1 Spectrum Harvesting Techniques 33 4.1.1 Energy Efficiency in Spectrum Harvesting Networks 34 4.1.2 Enhancing Energy Efficiency Through Spectrum Harvesting 39 4.2 Energy Harvesting Techniques 44 4.2.1 Green Energy Harvesting Models 44 4.2.2 Green Energy Utilization and Optimization 46 4.2.3 Cognitive Functionalities in Energy Harvesting 47 4.3 FreeNet: Spectrum and Energy Harvesting Wireless Networks 50 4.3.1 FreeNet Application Scenarios 51 4.3.2 Dynamic Network Architecture Optimization 53 4.3.3 Communication Protocol Suite Design 57 4.4 Summary 58 4.5 Questions 58 Part II Green Mobile Networking Solutions 59 5. Energy and Spectrum Efficient Mobile Traffic Offloading 61 5.1 Centralized Energy Spectrum Trading Algorithm 63 5.1.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 64 5.1.2 A Heuristic Power Consumption Minimization Algorithm 67 5.2 Auction-Based Decentralized Algorithm 70 5.2.1 An Auction-Based EST Scheme 72 5.3 Performance Evaluation 81 5.3.1 Centralized Energy Spectrum Trading Algorithm 81 5.3.2 Auction-Based Decentralized Algorithm 87 5.4 Summary 90 5.5 Questions 90 6. Optimizing Green Energy Utilization for Mobile Networks with Hybrid Energy Supplies 91 6.1 Green Energy Optimization Scheme for Mobile Networks With Hybrid Energy Supplies 91 6.1.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 93 6.1.2 Problem Formulation 95 6.1.3 The GEO Algorithm 99 6.1.4 Performance Evaluation 106 6.2 Optimal Renewable Energy Provisioning for BSs 110 6.2.1 Related Work on Provisioning the Green Power System 111 6.2.2 System Model and Problem Formulation 112 6.2.3 The Green Energy Provisioning Solution 116 6.2.4 Performance Evaluation 123 6.3 Summary 128 6.4 Questions 128 7. Energy Aware Traffic Load Balancing in Mobile Networks 129 7.1 Traffic Load Balancing in Mobile Networks 129 7.2 ICE: Intelligent Cell brEathing to Optimize the Utilization of Green Energy 131 7.2.1 Problem Formulation 132 7.2.2 The ICE Algorithm 133 7.2.3 ICE Algorithm Performance 135 7.3 Energy- and QoS-Aware Traffic Load Balancing 138 7.3.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 139 7.3.2 vGALA: A Green Energy and Latency Aware Load Balancing Scheme 144 7.3.3 Properties of vGALA 147 7.3.4 The Practicality of the vGALA Scheme 152 7.3.5 The Admission Control Mechanism 154 7.3.6 Performance Evaluation 155 7.4 Energy Efficient Traffic Load Balancing in Backhaul Constrained Small Cell Networks 165 7.4.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 166 7.4.2 Network Utility Aware Traffic Load Balancing 171 7.4.3 Performance Evaluation 176 7.5 Traffic Load Balancing in Smart Grid Enabled Mobile Networks 185 7.5.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 189 7.5.2 An Approximation Solution 191 7.5.3 Performance Evaluation 197 7.6 Summary 200 7.7 Questions 201 8. Enhancing Energy Efficiency via Device-to-Device Proximity Services 203 8.1 Energy Efficient Cooperative Wireless Multicasting 205 8.1.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 205 8.1.2 Gradient Guided Algorithm 206 8.1.3 Performance Evaluation 207 8.2 Green Relay Assisted D2D Communications 212 8.2.1 System Model and Problem Formulation 212 8.2.2 A Heuristic Green Relay Assignment Algorithm 214 8.3 Green Content Brokerage 221 8.3.1 Problem Formulation and Analysis 224 8.3.2 The Heuristic Traffic Offloading Algorithm 226 8.3.3 Performance Evaluation 232 8.4 Summary 236 8.5 Questions 237 9. Greening Mobile Networks via Optimizing the Efficiency of Content Delivery 239 9.1 Mobile Network Measurements 240 9.1.1 Packet Retransmission 240 9.1.2 Queuing in Mobile Core Networks 240 9.1.3 Network Asymmetry 241 9.1.4 Queue Management 241 9.1.5 First Packet Delay 242 9.1.6 TCP Flaws 242 9.1.7 Application Misbehavior 243 9.1.8 Mobile Devices 243 9.1.9 User Mobility 244 9.2 Mobile System Evolution 244 9.2.1 EUTRAN 245 9.2.2 Integrating Mobile Networks and CDN 247 9.3 Content and Network Optimization 247 9.3.1 Content Domain Techniques 247 9.3.2 Network Domain Techniques 249 9.3.3 Cross Domain Techniques 262 9.4 Mobile Data Offloading 264 9.4.1 Direct Data Offloading 264 9.4.2 Network Aggregation 265 9.5 Web Content Delivery Acceleration System 266 9.5.1 Web Acceleration System 267 9.6 Multimedia Content Delivery Acceleration 272 9.6.1 Adaptive Streaming 273 9.6.2 Other Methods 275 9.7 Summary 277 9.8 Questions 277 References 279 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisInvention and patents continues to be an important issue in technology and our global economy. Invention and Patenting provides a clear picture of how to be a prolific inventor, to understand patents, and the patent process. It provides an illuminating insight into the writing of invention disclosures to patents from the submission process to final drafts. The book shows how to communicate effectively with patent lawyers and patent examiners, teaching the language of legalese.This book is unique in covering both the early invention process to final patent drafting to provide high quality patents in technologies. Key features include: How to become an inventor, how to invent, to what is invention;How to write an invention disclosure to writing a patent;Examples of utility, design, and plant patents;How to prepare the background section, brief listing of figures, detailed description of the invention, claims, abstract to artwork; Using patent search engines;Writing independent and dependent claims;Analyzing office actions of the US and European patent offices;How to write an office action response and amending claims; and,Examples of Office Action responses, preliminary amendments, to notice of allowance response; Invention and Patenting is the first book by an engineer and inventor from a technologist's point of view. It is an essential reference for engineers and inventors. It is also useful for graduate and undergraduate students in technology and the sciences.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Intellectual Property 1 1.2 Patent 2 1.2.1 What Is a Patent? 2 1.2.2 Patents and the US Constitution 2 1.2.3 Why Patent? 3 1.2.4 What Is Patentable? 3 1.3 Copyrights 4 1.4 Trademarks 4 1.5 Invention 4 1.5.1 What Is Invention? 4 1.5.1.1 Are You an Inventor? 4 1.5.1.2 Did You Know They Were Inventors? 5 1.5.1.3 Who Are Young Inventors? 5 1.6 Defining the Processes of Invention 6 1.6.1 Invention – Addition 6 1.6.2 Invention – Deletion 6 1.6.3 Invention – Rearrangement 6 1.6.4 Invention – when 1 + 1 = 3 6 1.7 Finding Invention in Your Work 7 1.8 Invention Time 7 1.8.1 When Is the Best Time to Invent? 8 1.9 From Invention to Productization 8 1.10 Value of Patenting 8 1.10.1 What will you Gain as an Inventor? 8 1.10.2 What has Invention Done for Me? 9 1.10.3 What will Your Company Gain from Invention? 9 1.10.4 What Will Your Company Gain from Patents? 9 1.11 Example Patents 10 1.12 Closing Comments and Summary 10 Problems 11 Case Studies 12 References 12 1.A Appendix 14 2 Invention 37 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 How to Become an Inventor 37 2.2.1 What Do You Do That Is Creative? 37 2.2.2 How Do You Think? 38 2.2.3 Where Do You Think? 38 2.2.4 When Do You Think? 39 2.2.5 Capturing Your Ideas and Inventions 39 2.2.6 Timing 40 2.3 Studying Inventors 40 2.3.1 Studying Prolific Inventors 40 2.3.2 Studying Inventors’ Habits 41 2.3.3 Studying Inventors’ Goals and Objectives 41 2.4 The Creative Cycle 42 2.4.1 What is the Creative Cycle? 42 2.4.2 Stimulating the Creative Cycle 42 2.5 Left Brain and Right Brain 43 2.6 Thinking Out of the Box 43 2.7 Lateral Thinking Versus Critical Thinking 44 2.8 Finding Invention Between the Boundaries of Disciplines 44 2.9 Structured Invention – TRIZ 44 2.10 Example Patents 45 2.11 Closing Comments and Summary 45 Problems 46 Case Studies 46 References 47 2.A Appendix 49 3 Patents and Patent Languages 73 3.1 Introduction 73 3.2 Patent Search Engines 73 3.2.1 US Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO) 73 3.2.2 Pat2PDF 73 3.2.3 Google Patents 74 3.3 Patent Language 74 3.3.1 Specification 74 3.3.2 Claims 75 3.3.2.1 Independent Claims 75 3.3.2.2 Dependent Claims 75 3.3.3 Inventor 76 3.3.4 Joint Inventor 76 3.3.5 Provisional Applications 76 3.3.6 Nonprovisional Application 76 3.3.7 Divisional Applications 77 3.3.8 Continuing Patent Applications 77 3.4 Patent Language – Status and Operation 77 3.4.1 Office Actions 77 3.4.1.1 First Office Action 78 3.4.1.2 Final Office Action 78 3.4.2 Manual of Patent Examining Procedure 78 3.4.2.1 Prior Art 78 3.4.3 Allowance 78 3.4.4 Rejection 78 3.4.4.1 Final Rejection 78 3.4.5 Withdrawal 79 3.4.6 Notice of Allowance 79 3.4.7 Patent Pending 79 3.5 Patent Draft 79 3.5.1 Patent Draft – Structure 79 3.5.2 Patent Draft – Title 80 3.5.3 Patent Draft – Background Section 80 3.5.4 Patent Draft – Field of the Invention 80 3.5.5 Patent Draft – Summary 80 3.5.6 Patent Draft – Brief Description of the Figures 81 3.5.7 Patent Draft – Detailed Description of the Invention 81 3.5.8 Patent Draft – Claims 81 3.5.9 Patent Draft – Abstract 81 3.6 Closing Comments and Summary 82 Problems 82 Case Studies 83 References 83 4 Patents 85 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Patent Types 85 4.2.1 Utility Patents 85 4.2.2 Design Patents 85 4.2.3 Plant Patents 86 4.3 Patent Structure for Utility Patents 86 4.3.1 Utility Patent – Title 87 4.3.2 Utility Patent – Background Section 87 4.3.3 Utility Patent – Field of the Invention 87 4.3.4 Utility Patent – Summary Section 87 4.3.5 Utility Patent – Brief Description of Figures 88 4.3.6 Utility Patent – Detailed Description of the Invention 88 4.3.7 Utility Patent – Figures 88 4.3.7.1 Figures – Prior Art 88 4.3.7.2 Figures – Invention 88 4.3.8 Utility Patent – Claims 89 4.3.9 Utility Patent – Abstract 89 4.4 Design Patents 89 4.4.1 Design Patents – Patent Name Designation 89 4.4.2 Design Patents – Title 89 4.4.3 Design Patents – Inventors 90 4.4.4 Design Patents – Applicant and Assignee 90 4.4.5 Design Patents – References Cited 90 4.4.6 Design Patents – Foreign Patent Documents 90 4.4.7 Design Patents – Other References 91 4.4.8 Design Patents – Description 91 4.4.9 Design Patents – Figures 91 4.4.10 Design Patents – Claim 92 4.5 Plant Patents 92 4.5.1 Plant Patents – Patent Name Designation 93 4.5.2 Plant Patents – Title 93 4.5.3 Plant Patents – Cross]reference to Related Applications 94 4.5.4 Plant Patents – Latin Name of the Genus 94 4.5.5 Plant Patents – Variety Denomination 94 4.5.6 Plant Patents – Background Section of the Invention 94 4.5.7 Plant Patents – Summary Section 94 4.5.8 Plant Patents – Brief Description of Drawings 95 4.5.9 Plant Patents – Detailed Botanical Description of the Plant 95 4.5.10 Plant Patents – Claims 97 4.5.11 Plant Patents – Abstract 98 4.6 Example Patents 99 4.7 Closing Comments and Summary 99 Problems 99 Case Studies 100 References 100 4.A Appendix 102 5 Patent Drawings 139 5.1 Introduction 139 5.1.1 Drawing Techniques – Drawing by Hand 140 5.1.2 Drawing Techniques – Drawing by Computer 140 5.1.3 Drawing Techniques – Drawing by Camera 140 5.2 Patent Drawings – Utility Patents 140 5.3 Patent Drawings – Structures 141 5.3.1 Rules for Structure Drawings 141 5.4 Patent Drawings – Apparatus 143 5.4.1 Rules for Apparatus Drawings 143 5.5 Patent Drawings – Circuit 144 5.5.1 Rules for Circuit Drawings 145 5.6 Patent Drawings – Systems 146 5.6.1 Rules for System Drawings 146 5.7 Patent Drawings – Method 147 5.7.1 Rules of Method Drawings 147 5.7.2 Correspondence Between Method Drawings and Claims 148 5.8 Patent Drawings – Design 148 5.8.1 Rules for Design Drawings 151 5.9 Patent Drawings – Plant Drawings 151 5.9.1 Rules for Plant Drawings 152 5.10 Unique Patent Drawings – Beauregard Claims 152 5.11 Patent Drawings and Office Actions 152 5.11.1 Draftperson’s Patent Drawing Review 154 5.11.1.1 Drawings 37 CFR 1.84(a) Acceptable categories of drawings 155 5.11.1.2 Photographs 37 CFR 1.84(b) 156 5.11.1.3 Type of Paper 37 CFR 1.84(e): 156 5.11.1.4 Size of Paper. 37 CFR 1.84(f) 156 5.11.1.5 Margins 37 CFR 1.84(g) 156 5.11.1.6 Views 37 CFR 1.84(h) 156 5.11.1.7 Sectional Views 37 CFR 1.84(h)(3) 156 5.11.1.8 Arrangement of Views 37 CFR 1.84(j) 157 5.11.1.9 Scale 37 CFR 1.84(k) 157 5.11.1.10 Character of Lines, Numbers, and Letters 37 CFR 1.84(l) 157 5.11.1.11 Shading 37 CFR 1.84(m) 157 5.11.1.12 Numbers, Letters, and Reference Characters 37 CFR 1.48(p) 157 5.11.1.13 Lead Lines 37 CFR 1.84(q) 157 5.11.1.14 Numbering of Sheets of Drawing 37 CFR 1.84(t) 157 5.11.1.15 Numbering of Views 37 CFR 1.84(u) 157 5.11.1.16 Corrections 37 CFR 1.84(w) 157 5.11.1.17 Design Drawings 37 CFR 1.152 157 5.11.2 Objections or Rejections 158 5.12 Example Patents 158 5.13 Closing Comments and Summary 158 Problems 158 Case Studies 159 References 160 5.A Appendix 162 6 Claims 181 6.1 Introduction 181 6.2 Independent and Dependent Claims 181 6.2.1 Independent Claims 181 6.2.2 Dependent Claims 181 6.3 Structure Claims 183 6.4 Apparatus Claims 183 6.5 Method Claims 184 6.6 Hybrid Claims 185 6.7 Means Plus Function Claims 185 6.8 Beauregard Claims 185 6.9 Exhaustive Combination Claims 186 6.10 Alternative Claims 186 6.10.1 Markush Claims 186 6.10.2 Jepson Claims 187 6.10.3 Product-by-Process Claim 187 6.10.4 Programmed Computer Claims 187 6.10.5 Omnibus Claims 187 6.10.6 Signal Claims 187 6.10.7 Swiss-Type Claims 187 6.10.8 Reach-Through Claims 187 6.11 Closing Comments and Summary 188 Problems 188 Case Studies 189 References 190 7 Office Actions 193 7.1 Introduction 193 7.2 Office Actions – USPTO 193 7.2.1 Reading the Office Action 193 7.2.1.1 Application Number 193 7.2.1.2 Attorney Docket Number 194 7.2.1.3 First Named Inventor 194 7.2.1.4 Law Firm 195 7.2.1.5 Examiner 195 7.2.1.6 Art Unit 195 7.2.1.7 AIA (First Inventor to File) 195 7.2.1.8 Filing Date 195 7.2.1.9 Mail Date 195 7.2.1.10 Status 195 7.3 Disposition of Claims 196 7.3.1 Claims Pending 196 7.3.2 Allowed Claims 196 7.3.3 Rejected Claims 197 7.3.4 Objected Claims 197 7.3.5 Claims Subject to Restriction or Election 197 7.4 Application Papers 197 7.4.1 Objection of Specification 197 7.4.2 Drawing Status – Accepted or Objected To 197 7.5 Detailed Action 198 7.5.1 Claim Objections 198 7.5.2 Claim Rejections 198 7.5.2.1 35 USC 101 198 7.5.2.2 35 USC 112 198 7.5.2.3 35 USC 102 Novelty Rejection 199 7.5.2.4 35 USC 103 Obviousness Rejection 200 7.5.2.5 Drawing Objections 200 7.5.3 Allowable Subject Matter 201 7.5.4 Conclusion Section 201 7.6 Writing the Office Action Response 202 7.6.1 Introduction of the Office Action Response 202 7.6.2 Amending Claims 204 7.6.3 Amending Rejected Claims 204 7.6.3.1 35 USC 112 Rejection 205 7.6.3.2 35 USC 102 Rejection 206 7.6.3.3 35 USC 103 Rejection 206 7.6.4 Withdrawing a Claim 206 7.6.5 Addressing Objected Claims 206 7.6.6 Closing Statements of the Office Action Response 207 7.7 Preliminary Amendment 207 7.8 Final Office Action 207 7.9 European Office Action 208 7.9.1 Reading the European Office Action 208 7.9.2 EU Office Action Opening Comments 208 7.9.3 EU Patent Examiner Rulings 208 7.9.3.1 Article 78 EPC – Requirements of a European Patent Application 209 7.9.3.2 Article 83 EPC Disclosure of the Invention 209 7.9.3.3 Article 84 EPC – Claims 209 7.9.3.4 Article 52 (1) EPC – Patentable Inventions 209 7.9.3.5 Article 54 EPC – Novelty 210 7.9.3.6 Article 56 EPC – Inventive Step 210 7.9.3.7 Article 42 (1) EPC – Content of the Description 210 7.9.3.8 Article 43 (1) EPC – Form and Content of Claims 210 7.9.4 Writing the European Office Action Response 212 7.10 German Patent and Trademark Office (DPMA) Office Action 213 7.10.1 Underlying Documents 214 7.10.2 Subject of the Application 214 7.10.3 Person of Ordinary Skill in the Art 214 7.10.4 Interpretation 214 7.10.4.1 The Claim 214 7.10.4.2 Novelty 215 7.10.4.3 Inventive Step 215 7.10.5 Formal Defects 215 7.10.6 Conclusion Section 216 7.11 Supporting European Law Firms and EU Response 216 7.12 Closing Comments and Summary 216 Problems 216 Case Studies 217 References 218 8 Invention Generation Methodologies 219 8.1 Introduction 219 8.2 Creative Problem-Solving (CPS) Sessions 219 8.2.1 Building a CPS Session Moderator Team 219 8.2.2 Constructing CPS Session Attendee Team 219 8.2.3 CPS Session Rules 221 8.2.4 CPS Session Topic 221 8.2.5 CPS Session Invention Generation Process 221 8.2.6 CPS Session Invention Voting Procedure 222 8.2.7 Breakout Groups and Invention Development 222 8.2.8 CPS Session Closure 222 8.3 Systematic Thinking 222 8.3.1 TRIZ 222 8.3.2 TRIZ – Altshuller’s Philosophy 223 8.3.3 TRIZ – Removal of Contradictions 223 8.4 Systematic Inventive Thinking (SIT) 224 8.5 Unified Systematic Inventive Thinking (USIT) 225 8.6 Data Mining 225 8.7 Anticipating the Next Invention 225 8.8 Closing Comments and Summary 226 Problems 226 Case Studies 227 References 227 9 Corporate Patent Strategy 229 9.1 Introduction 229 9.2 Review Committee System 229 9.3 Database Patent Tracking System – World Patent Tracking System (WPTS) 229 9.4 Documenting the Invention Ideas and Disclosures 232 9.5 Submission of the Invention Disclosure 232 9.6 Invention Review and Evaluation 234 9.6.1 Title 234 9.6.2 Disclosure Number 234 9.6.3 Inventors Name 235 9.6.4 Reviewer Name 235 9.6.5 Invention – Clarity 235 9.6.6 Invention – Scope 235 9.6.7 Prior Art Known to the Reviewer 235 9.6.8 Alternatives to the Invention 235 9.6.9 Advancement of the State of the Art 235 9.6.10 Detectability 235 9.6.11 Essential Features of the Invention 235 9.6.12 Avoidance – Alternative Circuits or Methods 235 9.7 Review Committee 236 9.8 Working with the Patent Attorney 236 9.9 Corporate Intellectual Property (IP) Strategy 236 9.9.1 Corporate IP Goals 237 9.9.1.1 Organizational Goals 237 9.9.1.2 Individual Goals 237 9.9.1.3 Integration of Individual Goals into Performance Plans 237 9.9.2 Corporate IP Targets 237 9.9.3 Short]term Goals 238 9.9.4 Annual]term IP Goals 238 9.9.5 Long]term Goals 238 9.10 Incentives 238 9.10.1 Invention Disclosure Submission Award 239 9.10.2 Invention Patent Issue Award 239 9.10.3 Invention Achievement Plateau Award 239 9.10.4 Supplemental 20% Awards 240 9.10.5 Top 5% Invention Awards 240 9.10.6 Division Awards 240 9.10.7 Corporate Awards 240 9.10.8 Invitation to Annual Inventor Dinners 240 9.10.9 Invitation to Corporate Technical Recognition Award for Top Inventors 240 9.10.10 Master Inventor Award 240 9.11 Closing Comments and Summary 240 Problems 241 Case Studies 242 References 242 10 Expert Witness 243 10.1 Introduction 243 10.2 Expert Witness 243 10.2.1 Definition of Expert Witness 243 10.2.2 Role of Expert Witnesses 243 10.2.3 Duties of Expert Witnesses 244 10.3 Types of Expert Witnesses 244 10.3.1 Nontestifying Witnesses 245 10.3.2 Consulting Witnesses 245 10.3.3 Educating Witnesses 245 10.3.4 Reporting Witnesses 245 10.3.5 Testifying Witnesses 245 10.4 Working with Patent Attorney on Litigation 246 10.5 Expert Witness Report 246 10.6 Tactics 246 10.6.1 Invalidating the Patent 246 10.6.2 Invalidity Contention Document 247 10.7 Access to Materials in the Public Domain 248 10.7.1 Prior Art Searches 249 10.7.2 Released Press Literature 249 10.7.3 Customer Information 249 10.7.4 Product Documentations 249 10.8 Access to Materials Not in the Public Domain 250 10.8.1 Technical Disclosure Notebooks 250 10.8.2 Design Manuals 250 10.8.3 Design Physical Layout 250 10.8.4 Process Flow 251 10.9 Scientific Evidence 251 10.9.1 Frye Test 251 10.9.2 Daubert Test 251 10.10 Closing Comments and Summary 252 Problems 252 Case Studies 253 References 253 A Text for Invention Disclosure 255 B Text for Invention Disclosure Reviewer Form 257 C Text for Novelty Search Report 259 D USPTO Office Action Details of Contents 261 E USPTO Office Action Sections 263 F European Union (EU) Office Action 265 G European Union (EU) Office Action Response 267 H US to EU Attorney Letter – Office Action Response 271 I Petition for Submitting Color Photographs or Drawings 273 J Patent Cooperation Treaty 281 K Certificate of Correction 291 L Corrected Notice of Allowance 293 M Notice of Allowance 295 N Preliminary Amendment 301 O Submission of Corrected Drawings 305 Glossary of Terms 307 Index 309

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is an all-in-one resource on the development and application of variable frequency transformers to power systems and smart grids. It introduces the main technical issues of variable frequency transformers (VFT) systematically, including its basic construction, theory equations, and simulation models. Readers will then gain an in-depth discussion of its control system, operation performance, low frequency power oscillation, and technical economics, before proceeding to practical implementation and future developments. The related concepts of energy revolution, third generation grids, and power system interconnection are discussed as well. The first, comprehensive introduction to variable frequency transformers (VFT) An in-depth look at the construction of VFT, with simulations and applications Demonstrates how to assess the control system and overall system performance Analyses future developments, energy revolution and power system iTable of ContentsABOUT THE AUTHOR 1 PREFACE TO ENGLISH VERSION 2 PREFACE 4 1 POWER GRID DEVELOPMENT AND INTERCONNECTION 7 1.1 OVERVIEW 7 1.2 ENERGY REFORM AND THIRD GENERATION OF POWER GRIDS 8 1.3 LARGE-SCALE POWER ALLOCATION AND LARGE POWER GRID INTERCONNECTION 21 1.4 MAIN CONTENT OF THE BOOK 42 1.5 SUMMARY 44 REFERENCES 45 2 PROPOSAL AND APPLICATION OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY TRANSFORMER 47 2.1 OVERVIEW 47 2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY TRANSFORMER SYSTEM CONSTITUTION 47 2.3 BASIC FUNCTIONS OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY TRANSFORMER 55 2.4 START-UP AND CONTROL OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY TRANSFORMER 56 2.5 MECHANISM OF VFT IMPROVING THE SYSTEM STABILITY 58 2.6 EXISTING VARIABLE FREQUENCY TRANSFORMER APPLICATION IN POWER SYSTEM 61 2.7 VFT APPLICATION WITHIN GLOBAL ENERGY INTERCONNECTION 62 2.8 STUDYING PROMINENT PROBLEMS OF VFT TO BE SOLVED 92 2.9 SUMMARY 93 REFERENCES 94 3 BASIC EQUATION AND SIMULATION MODEL OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY TRANSFORMER 97 3.1 OVERVIEW 97 3.2 STEADY STATE EQUATION AND POWER FLOW CALCULATION MODEL OF VFT 101 3.3 ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSIENT EQUATION AND SIMULATION MODEL OF VFT 108 3.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC TRANSIENT EQUATION AND SIMULATION MODEL OF VFT 115 3.5SHORT-CIRCUIT IMPEDANCE AND CALCULATION MODEL OF VFT 118 3.6 VFT SIMULATION MODEL AVAILABILITY VERIFICATION 120 3.7 SUMMARY 125 REFERENCE 125 4 VFT CONTROL SYSTEM RESEARCH AND MODELING 127 4.1 OVERVIEW 127 4.2 VFT CONTROL STRATEGY AND SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM 128 4.3 VFT ELEMENT LEVEL CONTROL AND DC DRIVE SYSTEM DESIGN 132 4.4 VFT DEVICE LEVEL CONTROL DESIGN 137 4.5 VFT SYSTEM LEVEL CONTROL DESIGN 142 4.6 SUMMARY 144 REFERENCE 144 5 ANALYSIS OF OPERATION CHARACTERISTICS AND APPLICATION OF VFT IN THE ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM 146 5.1 OVERVIEW 146 5.2 VFT PARAMETERS AND RESEARCH SYSTEM DESIGN 146 5.3 STARTUP AND POWER REGULATION OF VFT 151 5.4 USING VFT TO REGULATE SYSTEM POWER FLOW 157 5.5 CHARACTERISTICS OF VFT DURING FAULT PERIOD 160 5.6 USING VFT TO REGULATE SYSTEM FREQUENCY 163 5.7 USING VFT TO SUPPLY POWER TO WEAK POWER GRIDS AND PASSIVE SYSTEMS 165 5.8 APPLICATION OF VFT IN LARGE COMPLEX ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM 167 5.9 USING VFT TO SUPPRESS LOW FREQUENCY POWER OSCILLATION IN THE ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM 171 5.10 SUMMARY 172 REFERENCE 173 6 DESIGN OF ADAPTIVE LOW-FREQUENCY OSCILLATION DAMPING CONTROLLER BASED ON VFT 175 6.1 OVERVIEW 175 6.2 IMPACTS OF THE VARIABLE-FREQUENCY OSCILLATIONS OF POWER SYSTEMS AND CORRESPONDING CONTROL ACTIONS 175 6.3 PRONY METHOD BASED TRANSFER FUNCTION IDENTIFICATION 177 6.4 LOW-FREQUENCY OSCILLATION DAMPING CONTROLLER DESIGN WITH VFTS AND A PRONY METHOD 179 6.5 APPLICATION OF VFTS BASED ADAPTIVE DAMPING CONTROLLER IN A FOUR-GENERATOR POWER SYSTEM 181 6.6 APPLICATION OF VFT BASED ADAPTIVE DAMPING CONTROLLERS IN COMPLICATED POWER SYSTEMS 192 6.7 SUMMARY 196 7 TECHNICAL AND ECONOMICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VFTS 199 7.1 OVERVIEW 199 7.2 COMPARISON OF TECHNICAL AND ECONOMICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VFTS AND PHASE SHIFTING TRANSFORMERS 199 7.3 COMPARISON OF TECHNICAL AND ECONOMICAL CHARACTERISTICS BETWEEN VFTS AND DC TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 210 7.4. SUMMARY 224 REFERENCES 224 8 SUMMARY AND PROSPECT 227 8.1 OVERVIEW 227 8.2 MAIN CONCLUSIONS 227 8.3 IN-DEPTH STUDIES OF VFTS 230 APPENDIX A 232 APPLICATION OF VFTS IN PROJECTS 232 A.1 OVERVIEW 232 A.2 MAIN STRUCTURE AND SYSTEMATIC CONTROL OF A VFT 232 A.3 THE WORLD FIRST VFT STATION ——LANGLOIS SUBSTATION 239 A.4 THE WORLD SECOND VFT STATION——LAREDO SUBSTATION 244 A.5 THE WORLD THIRD VFT STATION——LINDEN SUBSTATION 245 REFERENCES 248 INDEX 249

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a practical and comprehensive introduction to the key aspects of model-based testing as taught in the ISTQB Model-Based TesterFoundation Level Certification Syllabus This book covers the essentials of Model-Based Testing (MBT) needed to pass the ISTQB Foundation Level Model-Based Tester Certification. The text begins with an introduction to MBT, covering both the benefits and the limitations of MBT. The authors review the various approaches to model-based testing, explaining the fundamental processes in MBT, the different modeling languages used, common good modeling practices, and the typical mistakes and pitfalls. The book explains the specifics of MBT test implementation, the dependencies on modeling and test generation activities, and the steps required to automate the generated test cases. The text discusses the introduction of MBT in a company, presenting metrics to measure success and good practices to apply. Provides case studies illustratTable of ContentsForeword by Gualtiero Bazzana xi Foreword by Robert V. Binder xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction to model-based testing 1 1.1 Why do we need new approaches to testing?, 1 1.2 What is model-based testing?, 2 1.3 Benefits of MBT, 5 1.4 Pitfalls of MBT, 13 1.5 What can you realistically expect?, 19 2 What you should know about MBT before starting 21 2.1 ISTQB MBT glossary terms used in this book, 21 2.2 Other terms to know, 23 2.3 The modeling languages used in this book, 28 3 Process aspects of MBT 35 3.1 MBT and the fundamental test process, 35 3.2 The typical MBT process, 38 3.3 MBT and software development lifecycles, 49 3.4 How MBT supports requirement engineering, 55 4 Aspects to consider before you start writing an MBT model 59 4.1 Preliminary considerations on MBT modeling, 59 4.2 Subject and focus of your MBT model, 65 4.3 The influence of test objectives on MBT models, 70 5 Modeling languages – the agony of choice 75 5.1 Main categories of modeling languages, 76 5.2 UML and BPMN, 82 5.3 Other graphical modeling languages used for MBT, 85 5.4 Textual modeling languages used for MBT, 90 5.5 How to select the appropriate modeling language, 91 6 Good MBT modeling practices 97 6.1 Quality characteristics for MBT models, 97 6.2 Typical mistakes and pitfalls in MBT model design, 101 6.3 Linking requirements and process-related information to the MBT model, 103 6.4 The significance of modeling guidelines for MBT, 107 6.5 The question of reusing models from other development activities, 108 6.6 Tool support for MBT modeling activities, 112 6.7 Iterative MBT model development, 114 6.8 Other recommendations, 115 7 How MBT relates to test design techniques? 119 7.1 Equivalence partitioning and boundary value analysis, 119 7.2 Decision tables, 122 7.3 State transition testing, 123 7.4 Use case testing, 124 8 Deriving tests from an MBT model 127 8.1 Taxonomy of selection criteria, 127 8.2 Test case selection in practice, 138 8.3 Examples of coverage criteria, 140 8.4 Pros and cons of specific test selection criteria, 149 8.5 Some recommendations regarding test case selection, 152 8.6 Degree of automation in test generation, 154 9 Executing model-based tests 155 9.1 Understanding the concepts, 155 9.2 Adapting test cases for automated execution, 168 9.3 Adapting MBT artifacts due to changes, 173 10 Introducing MBT in your company 179 10.1 Five steps to MBT adoption, 179 10.2 Return-on-invest considerations, 182 10.3 Prioritize your organizational objectives, 186 10.4 How to measure progress and success?, 189 10.5 Deploying MBT, 191 10.6 Initial and running costs of MBT, 193 10.7 Integrating the tools, 196 11 Case studies 201 11.1 Enterprise IT model-based testing – OrangeHRM case study, 201 11.2 MBT for process-supporting SW – Tool validation case study, 212 11.3 MBT for security components – PKCS#11 case study, 226 12 Conclusions 241 Appendix A Solutions of exercises 245 Appendix B Test yourself 253 Appendix C Taxonomy of MBT approaches 261 Abbreviations 263 Terms and definitions 265 ISTQB terms, 265 Other terms, 267 References 269 Index 273

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn essential guide through the rapid evolution of PV technology Photovoltaics from Milliwatts to Gigawatts: Understanding Market and Technology Drivers toward Terawatts covers the history of silicon based PV, from the earliest discoveries to present and future practice. Divided into 9 chapters, the book includes the following topics: Early History; The 1973 Oil crisis and the drive for alternative energies; The emergence in the 1980''s of the off grid PV market, the significant small scale PV consumer market and the establishment of a manufacturing industry; Advantages of silicon for solar cells; The evolution of PV installations; The history of the incentive programme for PV; Difficulties of alternative technologies in challenging silicon dominance; Current status of the silicon manufacturing technology and The future. Key features: An authoritative first-hand account of an emerging technology from laboratory to global significance foTable of ContentsPreface Chapter 1 The Photovoltaics -the birth of a technology and its first application 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Sunlight and electricity 1.2.1 The early Years 1.2.2 The breakthrough to commercial photovoltaic cells. 1.2.3 The hiatus 1.2.4 The first successful market- Satellites 1.3 Photovoltaics demonstrates success. 1.3.1 First Commercial Operation 1.3.2 Solar Cell Manufacturing 1.4 Gallium Arsenide and III-V alloys for space. 1.4.1. Single Junction GaAs solar cells 1.4.2 Multi-junction Solar Cells for space. 1.5 Summary 1.6 References Chapter 2 The Beginnings of a Terrestrial Photovoltaic Industry 2.1 Introduction 2.2 The 1973 Oil Crisis 2.3 The Way Ahead for Terrestrial PV Technology. 2.3.1 Basic Silicon PV manufacturing Process 2.3.2 The Low Cost Silicon Solar Array Project (FPSA). 2.3.2.1 Solar Grade Silicon 2.3.2.2 Silicon Sheet Wafers and Ribbons 2.3.2.3 High Efficiency Solar Cells 2.3.2.4 Process development 2.3.2.5 Engineering Sciences and Reliability. 2.3.2.6 Module Encapsulation 2.3.2.7 Cost Goals 2.4 Rise of the USA PV Manufacturing Industry 2.5 Developments in Europe 2.5 Developments in Europe 2.6 The transition in cell technology from space to terrestrial applications 2.7 Alternatives to Silicon for Solar cells 2.8 Summary 2.9 References Chapter 3 The Early PV global market and manufacturers 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Off Grid Professional Market 3.2.1 Navigation aids. 3.2.2 Microwave Repeater Stations 3.2.3 Cathodic Protection 3.2.4 Other Applications. 3.2.5 Early Grid Connected application 3.3. Off Grid social applications 3.3.1 Solar Home systems 3.3.2 Water Pumping 3.2.3 Consumer Electronics 3.4 Summary 3.5 References Chapter 4 Silicon Technology Development to 2010 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Technologies supplying the global market. 4.3 Advantages of silicon as a solar cell material. 4.3.1 Availability 4.3.2 Elemental semiconductor 4.3.3. Non-toxic 4.3.4 Self passivating oxide 4.3.5 Synergy with global semiconductor industry. 4.4 Silicon Solar Cell Design Features 4.5 Silicon Solar cell manufacturing from 1980 to 1990. 4.6 Developments in Manufacturing Technology 4.6.1 Silicon Feedstock 4.6.2 Crystallisation 4.6.3 Wafering 4.6.4 Anti-Reflection Coating (ARC) 4.6.5 Solar Cell Development to 2000 4.6.5.1 Cz-Cell Development 4.6.5.2 Multicrystalline Silicon Processing 4.6.5.3 Integration of mono and multicrystalline silicon processes. 4.6.5.4 Other process technology changes 4.7 Module Technology 4. 8 Summary 4.9 References Chapter 5 The Current Status of PV Systems 5.1 Introduction 5.2 The off-grid market 5.3 The decentralised grid connected market. 5.3.1 Research Phase 1974-1989 5.3.2 The Demonstration Phase 1989-2000 5.3.3 Decentralised Grid connected market 2000- 2019: The Commercial phase 5.3.2.1 The achievement of grid parity 5.3.2.2 Resolution of the silicon feedstock supply. 5.4 Utility Scale Grid connected PV systems 5.5 Novel applications 5.6 Summary 5.7 References Chapter 6 History of incentives for PV 6.1 The Chicken and egg problem 6.2 Capital Subsidies on system purchase 6.3 Feed-in-Tariffs. 6.4 Power Purchase Agreements and other Incentives for large scale systems. 6.5 Summary 6.6 References Chapter 7 Difficulties of Alternative Technologies to Silicon 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Sheet Silicon Processes. 7.2.1 Direct crystallisation of silicon sheet. 7.2.1.1 Westinghouse Dendritic Web 7.2.1.2 Edge Defined Foil Growth (EFG) 7.2.1.3 String Ribbon Technology 7.2.2 Cast Silicon sheet 7.2.2.1 Hoxan Casting process. 7.2.2.2 Ribbon Growth on Substrate(RGS) 7.2.2.3 Direct Wafer ™ 7.2.2.4 Lift Off wafer technology 7.3 Thin film Solar Cell Technologies 7.3.1 Copper Sulphide Solar Cells 7.3.2 Amorphous Silicon 7.3.3 Amorphous Silicon Manufacturing 7.3.4 Manufacturing the amorphous silicon microcrystalline silicon tandem cell 7.3.5 Thin film crystalline silicon 7.3.6 Copper Indium Gallium Diselenide (CIGS). 7.3.6.1 CIGS Manufacturing 7.3.7 Cadmium Telluride Technology 7.3.7.1 Cadmium Telluride Commercial production. 7.4 Dye sensitised Solar Cells (DSSC) 7.5 Polymer (Organic) Solar Cells (OPV) 7.6 Perovskite (PVK)Solar Cells 7.7 Concentrator technology 7.8 Summery 7.9 References Chapter 8 Current status of crystalline silicon manufacturing and future trends 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Approaches to high efficiency silicon solar cells on p type silicon wafers. 8.2.1 Laser Grooved Buried Contact (LGBC) Solar Cells 8.2.2 Selective Emitters 8.2.3 PERL and PERC Solar Cells 8.2.4 Industrial Manufacture of PERC Cells. 8.2.5 Bifacial Module Technology 8.2.6 Light Induced Degradation 8.3 Solar cells with n type silicon 8.3.1 Silicon Heterojunction (SHJ) solar cells 8.3.2 Rear Junction Silicon Heterojunction solar cells (IBC-SHJ) 8.3.3 N type IBC cells without amorphous silicon passivation 8.4 The future of PV technology towards Terrawatts 8.4.1 III-V Tandems on Silicon 8.4.2 Silicon Tandems using perovskites 8.5 Silicon Module Reliability 8.6 Summary 8.7 References Chapter 9 The Lessons Learnt 9.1 introduction 9.2 Role of governments 9.3 Role of the Research Community 9.4 The role of manufacturing Industry in Europe and the USA 9.5 Role of China as a PV manufacturing base. 9.6 Potential for continues market growth 9.7 Future Technology Development 9.8 Final analysis 9.9 References Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn intuitive and insightful overview of the technical and business aspects of the telecoms industry In The Technology and Business of Mobile Telecommunications: An Introduction, a team of expert telecommunications researchers and consultants delivers a rigorous exploration of the technical and business aspects of mobile telecommunications. The book offers a complete overview of an industry that has seen rapid technical and economic changes while retaining the ability to provide end users with communications coverage and capacity. The authors demonstrate the technical foundations of the mobile industry and show how a communications network is deployed. They detail many of the main innovations introduced over the last few years and some of the most salient challenges facing the industry today. The business models of major mobile operators are examined as well, from the purchasing spectrum to network deployment and customer attraction and retention. TTable of ContentsForeword xv Preface xvii About the Authors xix Acknowledgements xxi List of Abbreviations xxiii 1 A Technology that Changed the World 1 1.1 Social and Economic Impact of Mobile Communications 2 1.1.1 Social Impact 3 1.1.2 Economic Impact 5 1.2 A Brief History of Mobile (Cellular) Communications 8 1.3 The Journey of Mobile Communications as Seen from User and Operator Perspectives 18 References 20 2 The Mobile Telecoms Ecosystem 23 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Telecommunications Ecosystem 24 2.3 Regulation and Spectrum 26 2.3 Standardisation 27 2.4 Research 28 2.5 End Users 30 2.6 The Role of Operators (Carriers) 30 2.7 The Role of Vendors/Manufacturers 31 2.8 The Role of Standard Bodies and Regulators 31 2.9 Telecoms Ecosystem Dynamics and Behaviour 32 2.10 5G Ecosystem 35 2.10.1 Datacentres 36 2.10.2 RF Chip and Component Manufacturers 36 2.10.3 Telecom Operators (Carriers) 36 2.10.4 Infrastructure Service Providers 36 2.10.5 Gaming 37 2.10.6 Over The Top (OTT) 37 2.10.7 Low-Cost Processing Unit Manufacturer 37 2.10.8 Investors 38 2.10.9 Potential Disruptions in the 5G EcoSystem 38 2.11 Summary 41 References 41 3 The Business of a Mobile Operator 43 3.1 Business Challenges Faced by Operators 43 3.1.1 Third-Party Costs 43 3.1.2 Radio Access Network Costs 45 3.1.3 Transmission Costs 49 3.1.4 Physical Locations 53 3.1.5 Power Costs for Multiple Technologies 54 3.2 MVNOs – Mobile Virtual Network Operators 56 3.2.1 Economics of an MVNO 57 3.2.2 Modelling MVNOs and SPs 59 3.3 Operator Business around International Roaming 63 3.3.1 The EU Roaming Regulation ‘Roam like at Home’ 64 3.3.2 Covid-19 Impact on Roaming Revenues 66 3.4 The Likely Operator Business Models in 5G 66 3.5 Conclusion 69 References 69 4 Why Standards Matter 73 4.1 The Creation of a New ‘G’ 74 4.1.1 Research 74 4.1.2 Standardisation 75 4.1.3 Commercialisation 77 4.1.4 Continued Innovation 79 4.1.5 Intellectual Property as a Metric and Political Currency 81 4.2 Shifting Political Power and the Making of an Ecosystem 81 4.2.1 2G GSM – Europe Leads 82 4.2.2 3G UMTS – Universal (Except Not Quite) 85 4.2.3 4G EPS – Avoiding Old Mistakes (and Making New Ones?) 89 4.2.4 5G NR – New World Order? 94 4.3 Future Standards 97 References 99 5 The Mobile Network 101 5.1 Mobile Network Architecture 101 5.2 The Radio Access Network (RAN) 103 5.2.1 Synchronisation 104 5.2.2 Broadcast Messages 104 5.2.3 Paging 104 5.2.4 Random Access 105 5.2.5 Scheduling 105 5.2.6 Power Control 106 5.2.7 Handover 106 5.2.8 Link Adaptation 108 5.2.9 HARQ, Error Correction 108 5.2.10 MIMO Techniques 109 5.2.11 The Control/data Channels and Reference Signals 109 5.3 The Core Network (CN) 110 5.3.1 Circuit Switching and Packet Switching Networks 110 5.3.2 Tunnelling and Encapsulation 111 5.4 The Protocol Stack 112 5.4.1 The OSI Model of 7 Layer Protocol Stack 113 5.4.2 Protocol Stacks for Mobile Communications 115 5.5 The 2G Network 118 5.5.1 The Network Architecture of 2G 118 5.5.2 The GSM Frame Structure 120 5.5.3 GSM (And GPRS) RAN Features 122 5.5.4 2G Evolutions 124 5.6 The 3G Network 124 5.6.1 The UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) 125 5.6.2 UTRAN Features 129 5.6.3 The IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) 130 5.6.4 Issues with the UMTS Air Interface 131 5.6.5 3G Evolution to HSPA 132 5.7 The 4G Network 133 5.7.1 LTE System Architecture 134 5.7.2 LTE Protocol Layers 136 5.7.3 LTE Multiple Access Schemes 139 5.7.4 LTE Frame Structures 142 5.7.5 LTE Reference Signals 144 5.7.6 LTE main RAN procedures 144 5.7.7 Main Features of Subsequent LTE Releases 148 5.8 The 5G Network 150 5.8.1 5G-NR Deployment Options 152 5.8.2 5G-NR System Architecture 153 5.8.3 Spectrum Options for 5G-NR 154 5.8.4 5G-NR Protocol Layers 155 5.8.5 The 5G-NR Air Interface 158 5.8.6 5G-NR RAN procedures 160 5.8.7 5G-NR Reference Signals 161 5.8.8 5G Core – Concepts and Functionalities 162 5.9 The Centralisation and Virtualisation of the Mobile Network 163 5.9.1 The Centralised RAN (C-RAN) 164 5.9.2 NFV (Virtualised Network Functions) and SDN (Software Defined Networking) Concepts 166 5.10 Conclusions 169 References 170 6 Basics of Network Dimensioning and Planning 173 6.1 Properties of Signal Strength, Noise and Interference 174 6.2 The Link Budget and Coverage Dimensioning 178 6.2.1 The Transmit Power 178 6.2.2 The Antenna Gains 178 6.2.3 Transmit and Receive Diversity Gains 179 6.2.4 The EIRP 179 6.2.5 Modelling the Path Loss 180 6.2.6 Modelling the Log Normal Fade Margin 183 6.2.7 The FFM 184 6.2.8 Building Penetration Loss 185 6.2.9 Building the Link Budget 185 6.3 Capacity Dimensioning 187 6.3.1 The Capacity Demand Estimation Process 188 6.3.2 Capacity Demand Estimation – Worked Example 189 6.3.3 Resource Provision – Worked Example 194 6.4 The Dimensioning of Backhaul Links 199 6.4.1 LTE Backhaul Provision – General Aspects 200 6.4.2 LTE Backhaul Provision – Capacity Aspects 201 6.4.3 New Developments in Backhaul/fronthaul Provision 207 6.5 The Network Planning Process 208 6.5.1 The Network Area Maps 208 6.5.2 Site Placement and Antenna Radiation Patterns 209 6.5.3 Traffic Modelling and Capacity Provision Information 210 6.5.4 Fine Tuning and Optimisation 212 6.6 A Look at 5G Networks 213 References 216 7 Spectrum – The Life Blood of Radio Communications 219 7.1 Introduction 219 7.2 Spectrum Management and Its Objectives 219 7.2.1 The Role of the ITU 220 7.2.2 Regional Bodies 221 7.2.3 National Regulators and Their Roles 222 7.2.4 The Spectrum Management Process 223 7.3 Spectrum Allocations 225 7.4 Spectrum Assignment 225 7.4.1 Administrative Assignments 226 7.4.2 Market Based Mechanisms 226 7.4.3 Beauty Contests 227 7.5 Spectrum Licensing 228 7.5.1 Spectrum for Mobile Services 228 7.5.2 Dimensions of Spectrum Sharing 233 7.6 Spectrum Bands Considered for 5G 235 7.6.1 Example Illustration of Spectrum Deployment Strategy for MNOs 236 7.6.2 Local Access Spectrum 237 References 238 8 Fundamentals of Digital Communication 241 8.1 Basic Digital Communication System Overview 241 8.2 Encoding Information 243 8.2.1 Sampling 243 8.2.2 Source Coding 245 8.2.3 Channel Coding 246 8.3 Signal Representation and Modulation 251 8.3.1 Mapping Bits to Signals 253 8.3.2 Signal Spectrum 256 8.4 Signal Demodulation and Detection 257 8.4.1 System Model and Sources of Noise 257 8.4.2 Demodulation 258 8.4.3 Detection 260 8.5 Performance Analysis 260 8.5.1 Capacity 260 8.5.2 Bit-error Rate and Symbol-error Rate 262 8.6 Communication Through Dispersive Channels 264 8.6.1 Time-domain Equalization and Detection 264 8.6.2 Frequency-domain Equalisation 267 8.7 Multiple Access: A Second Look 272 8.7.1 CDMA and 3G 272 8.7.2 OFDMA/SC-FDMA and 4G 275 8.7.3 NOMA and 5G 277 8.8 System Impairments 278 8.8.1 Carrier Phase Estimation 279 8.8.2 Timing Recovery 280 8.8.3 Channel Estimation 280 8.9 Further Reading 282 Notes 282 References 283 9 Early Technical Challenges and Innovative Solutions 285 9.1 Wireless Channels: The Challenge 285 9.1.1 Propagation 285 9.1.2 Fading and Multipath 287 9.1.3 Signal-to-Noise Ratio in Fading Channels 293 9.2 Multicarrier Modulation: A Second Look 295 9.2.1 Coded OFDM 295 9.2.2 Capacity and Adaptive Modulation 295 9.3 Diversity 297 9.3.1 Macro Diversity 297 9.3.2 Time Diversity 298 9.3.3 Frequency Diversity 300 9.3.4 Spatial Diversity 300 9.4 Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) 307 9.4.1 Capacity 308 9.4.2 MIMO Transmission Techniques 309 9.4.3 MIMO Reception Techniques 311 9.4.4 MIMO vs Multicarrier 312 9.4.5 Multi-User and Massive MIMO 313 References 315 10 Small Cells – an Evolution or a Revolution? 317 10.1 Introduction 317 10.2 Small Cells Concept Formation 319 10.3 Multi-tier Cellular Networks/HetNets Architecture 320 10.3.1 Interference Management 320 10.3.2 Mobility Management 321 10.3.3 Backhaul 322 10.4 Interference Management and Modelling in Small cell/HetNets 322 10.4.1 Interference Management 322 10.4.2 Interference Modelling 325 10.5 Mobility Management 329 10.6 Backhaul 332 10.7 Small-Cell Deployment 335 10.8 Future Evolution of Small Cells 339 10.9 Conclusion 342 References 342 11 Today’s and Tomorrow’s Challenges 345 11.1 The Capacity Crunch 345 11.1.1 A Historical Perspective 345 11.1.2 Methods for Capacity Enhancement 346 11.1.3 Impact on Transport and Core Networks 349 11.1.4 Complementary Technologies 352 11.2 Increasing Network Complexity 354 11.2.1 The Self-Organising Networks 355 11.2.2 Network Automation in 5G 359 11.2.3 The Business Rationale for Network Automation 361 11.3 The Need for Greener and Lower EMF Networks 362 11.3.1 Greener Mobile Networks 362 11.3.3 Green Manufacturing and Recycling 364 11.3.4 Applications of Mobile Networks for Energy Reduction 364 11.3.5 Electromagnetic Field Exposure and Mobile Networks 365 11.4 Covering the Unserved and Under-served Regions 368 11.4.1 New Access Technologies 368 11.4.2 Initiatives Driven by Government Funding and Policy 371 Reference 373 12 The Changing Face of Mobile Communications 377 12.1 Changes with Centralisation and Virtualisation of the Mobile Network 377 12.2 Supporting Multiple Vertical Industries through 5G 380 12.2.1 Automotive Sector 380 12.2.2 Smart City 383 12.2.3 Industry 4.0 386 12.2.4 Critical Communications Sector 388 12.2.5 Other Vertical Areas under Development 391 12.3 The Continuous Evolution of the Mobile Device 393 12.4 What Will 6G Look Like? 395 12.4.1 Machine Learning and Artificial Intelligence 395 12.4.2 Blockchain and the Internet of Things 396 12.4.3 Evolutions in Cloud and Edge Computing 397 12.4.4 Advanced Hybrid Beamforming 398 12.4.5 New Modulation Schemes 399 12.4.6 Tera-Hertz (Thz) Communications 399 12.4.7 Orbital Angular Momentum 401 12.4.8 Unmanned Aerial Vehicles 401 12.4.9 Quantum Technology 401 References 402 Index 407

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book presents a comprehensive discussion on software quality issues and software quality assurance (SQA) principles and practices, and lays special emphasis on implementing and managing SQA. Primarily designed to serve three audiences; universities and college students, vocational training participants, and software engineers and software development managers, the book may be applicable to all personnel engaged in a software projects Features: A broad view of SQA. The book delves into SQA issues, going beyond the classic boundaries of custom-made software development to also cover in-house software development, subcontractors, and readymade software. An up-to-date wide-range coverage of SQA and SQA related topics. Providing comprehensive coverage on multifarious SQA subjects, including topics, hardly explored till in SQA texts. A systematic presentation of the SQA function and its tasks: establishing the SQA proceTable of ContentsPreface xvii Acknowledgments xxi About the Author xxiii Guides for Special Groups of Readers xxv PART I INTRODUCTION 1 1. SQA – DEFINITIONS AND CONCEPTS 3 1.1 Software quality and software quality assurance – definitions 3 1.2 What is a software product? 5 1.3 The principles of SQA 7 1.4 Software errors, faults, and failures 7 1.5 The causes of software errors 11 1.6 Software quality assurance versus software quality control 16 1.7 Software quality engineering and software engineering 17 Summary 18 Selected bibliography 20 Review questions 20 Topics for discussion 21 2. SOFTWARE QUALITY FACTORS (ATTRIBUTES) 23 2.1 Complaints from the City Computer Club members – an introductory mini case 23 2.2 The need for comprehensive software quality requirements 24 2.3 McCall’s classic model for software quality factors 25 2.4 The ISO/IEC 25010 model and other alternative models of software quality factors 33 2.5 Software compliance with quality factors 38 Summary 41 Selected bibliography 42 Review questions 43 Topics for discussion 44 3. THE SOFTWARE QUALITY CHALLENGES 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 The uniqueness of software quality assurance 45 3.3 Software development, maintenance, and SQA environment 49 Summary 55 Review questions 56 Topics for discussion 56 4. ORGANIZATION FOR ASSURING SOFTWARE QUALITY 58 4.1 Introduction 58 4.2 Top management’s quality assurance activities 59 4.3 Department managers with direct responsibilities for quality 63 4.4 Project management responsibilities for quality 65 4.5 The SQA unit and its associated players in the SQA system 66 4.6 The associated players in the SQA system 71 Summary 74 Selected bibliography 77 Review questions 77 Topics for discussion 79 5. THE SQA WORLD – AN OVERVIEW 81 5.1 First area: introductory topics (Part I of the book) 81 5.2 Second area: SQA process implementation activities (Part II of the book) 83 5.3 Third area: product assurance activities for conformance (Part III of the book) 87 5.4 Fourth area: process assurance activities for conformance (Part IV of the book) 91 5.5 Fifth area: additional tools and methods supporting software quality (Part V of the book) 96 5.6 Sixth area: Appendices (Part VI of the book) 99 5.7 The SQA Hall of Fame 103 PART II SQA PROCESS IMPLEMENTATION ACTIVITIES 105 6. ESTABLISHING SQA PROCESSES AND THEIR COORDINATION WITH RELEVANT SOFTWARE PROCESSES 107 6.1 Establishing SQA processes 107 6.2 Coordinating SQA processes with related software processes 108 Summary 109 Selected bibliography 110 Review questions 110 Topics for discussion 110 7. SQA PLAN AND PROJECT PLAN 111 7.1 Introduction 111 7.2 The process of preparing an SQA plan 112 7.3 The SQAP elements 112 7.4 The process of preparing a project plan 116 7.5 Jack thanks his department manager – a mini case 117 7.6 The elements of the project plan 119 7.7 Project plans for small projects and for internal projects 130 Summary 134 Selected bibliography 136 Review questions 136 Topics for discussion 138 Appendix 7.A: Risk management activities and measures 139 8. PREPROJECT PROCESS – CONTRACT REVIEW 141 8.1 The CFV project completion celebration – an introductory mini case 141 8.2 Introduction 142 8.3 The contract review process and its stages 143 8.4 Contract review evaluation subjects 146 8.5 Implementation of a contract review 149 8.6 Contract reviews for internal projects 151 Summary 153 Selected bibliography 154 Review questions 154 Topics for discussion 155 Appendix 8.A: Proposal draft review 157 Appendix 8.B: Contract draft review 161 9. COST OF SOFTWARE QUALITY 162 9.1 This time the budget was approved – an introductory mini case 162 9.2 Objectives of cost of software quality measurement 164 9.3 The classic model of cost of software quality 166 9.4 The scope of the cost of software quality – industry figures 170 9.5 An extended model for cost of software quality 171 9.6 Application of a cost of software quality system 175 9.7 Problems in application of CoSQ measurements 179 Summary 181 Selected bibliography 183 Review questions 184 Topics for discussion 186 10. THE EFFECTIVENESS AND COST OF A V&V PLAN – THE SQA MODEL 189 10.1 The data required for the SQA model 189 10.2 The SQA model 191 10.3 Application of the SQA model for comparing V&V plans 195 Summary 198 Selected bibliography 199 Review questions 199 Topics for discussion 199 11. SQA RECORDS AND DOCUMENTATION CONTROL 200 11.1 Jeff’s troubles – an introductory mini-case 200 11.2 Introduction 201 11.3 Objectives of documentation control processes 203 11.4 The implementation of documentation control 203 Summary 207 Selected bibliography 208 Review questions 208 Topics for discussion 209 PART III PRODUCT ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES FOR CONFORMANCE 211 12. EVALUATION OF PRODUCTS FOR CONFORMANCE 213 12.1 Introduction 213 12.2 The evaluation of project plans for conformance 214 12.3 The evaluation of project’s software products for conformance 215 12.4 Evaluation of project products for acceptability by the customer 216 12.5 The evaluation of project’s operation phase products for conformance 216 12.6 The evaluation of software product by measurements 217 Summary 218 Selected bibliography 219 Review questions 219 Topics for discussion 220 13. REVIEWS 222 13.1 Introduction 222 13.2 The happy design review – an introductory mini case 224 13.3 Formal design reviews (DRS) 225 13.4 Peer reviews 231 13.5 Expert opinions 244 Summary 247 Selected bibliography 248 Review questions 248 Topics for discussion 250 Appendix 13.A: DR report form 252 Appendix 13.B: Inspection session findings report form 253 Appendix 13.C: Inspection session summary report 254 14. SOFTWARE TESTING 255 14.1 Introduction 255 14.2 Joe decided to skip in-process testing – an introductory mini-case 259 14.3 Software testing strategies 260 14.4 Requirement-driven software testing 272 14.5 Planning of the testing process 280 14.6 Designing the testing process 286 14.7 Implementation of the testing process 287 14.8 Automated testing 289 14.9 Alpha and beta site testing programs 301 14.10 Code review activities for the programming and testing phases 303 Summary 304 Selected bibliography 310 Review questions 312 Topics for discussion 314 15. ASSURING SOFTWARE QUALITY CONFORMANCE FOR OPERATION SERVICES 318 15.1 Introduction 318 15.2 HR Software’s success – an introductory mini case 321 15.3 The foundations of high-quality operation services 324 15.4 Software maintenance maturity model – a model for the operation phase 329 15.5 Managerial processes of software operation quality assurance 329 Summary 341 Selected bibliography 342 Review questions 343 Topics for discussion 344 16. SOFTWARE PRODUCT QUALITY METRICS 346 16.1 What are software quality metrics? – an introduction 346 16.2 Implementation of software quality metrics 349 16.3 Product metrics and their classification 352 16.4 Software product size metrics 353 16.5 Software product attribute metrics 356 Summary 362 Selected bibliography 364 Review questions 366 Topics for discussion 367 Appendix 16.A: FSM method implementation 370 17. PROCEDURES AND WORK INSTRUCTIONS 375 17.1 Introduction – the need for procedures and work instructions 375 17.2 Superbox pays $9000 in damages due to failing support center – a mini case 376 17.3 Procedures and work instructions and their conceptual hierarchy 378 17.4 Procedures and procedure manuals 378 17.5 Work instructions 382 17.6 Procedures and work instructions: preparation, implementation, and updating 382 Summary 385 Selected bibliography 386 Review questions 386 Topics for discussion 387 Appendix 17.A: Design review procedure 389 PART IV PROCESS ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES FOR CONFORMANCE 393 18. EVALUATION OF PROCESSES AND DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT FOR CONFORMANCE 395 18.1 Introduction 395 18.2 The evaluation of life cycle processes and plans for conformance 396 18.3 The evaluation of the required environment for conformance 397 18.4 The evaluation of subcontractor processes for conformance 398 18.5 The evaluation of software process by measurements 399 18.6 The assessment of staff skills and knowledge 400 Summary 401 Selected bibliography 401 Review questions 402 Topics for discussion 402 19. IMPROVEMENT PROCESSES – CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE ACTIONS 404 19.1 The “3S” development team – revisited – an introductory mini case 404 19.2 Introduction 406 19.3 The corrective and preventive actions process 407 19.4 Organization for preventive and corrective actions 416 Summary 417 Selected bibliography 418 Review questions 418 Topics for discussion 419 20. SOFTWARE PROCESS ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES FOR EXTERNAL PARTICIPANTS 421 20.1 Introduction 421 20.2 The Pharmax tender – a mini case 424 20.3 Benefits and risks of introducing external performers 427 20.4 Benefits and risks of using readymade software 430 20.5 QA activities for assuring external performers’ process quality 432 20.6 QA activities for assuring quality of readymade software 438 Summary 441 Selected bibliography 444 Review questions 445 Topics for discussion 446 21. SOFTWARE PROCESS QUALITY METRICS 448 21.1 Software process metrics – an introduction 448 21.2 North against South – who’ll win this time round? – a mini case 450 21.3 Software development process metrics 452 21.4 Software operation process metrics 460 21.5 Software maintenance process metrics 462 21.6 Management process metrics 466 21.7 Limitations of software metrics 467 Summary 470 Selected bibliography 471 Review questions 472 Topics for discussion 473 22. SOFTWARE CHANGE CONTROL PROCESSES 476 22.1 Introduction 476 22.2 How a well-planned project lost over half a million dollars – a mini case 477 22.3 The process of handling an SCR 479 22.4 The SCC function in the organization 481 22.5 Software quality assurance activities related to software change control 482 Summary 482 Selected bibliography 483 Review questions 483 Topics for discussion 484 23. STAFF SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE – TRAINING AND CERTIFICATION 486 23.1 Introduction 486 23.2 Surprises for the “3S” development team – an introductory mini case 487 23.3 The objectives of training 488 23.4 The staff training process for software development 489 23.5 The training process for the SQA function team 493 23.6 The objectives of certification 495 23.7 The certification process 495 Summary 501 Selected bibliography 503 Review questions 503 Topics for discussion 504 PART V ADDITIONAL TOOLS AND METHODS SUPPORTING SOFTWARE QUALITY 507 24. TEMPLATES AND CHECKLISTS 509 24.1 Introduction 509 24.2 Templates 509 24.3 The organizational framework for implementing templates 511 24.4 Checklists 514 24.5 The organizational framework for implementing checklists 516 Summary 518 Selected bibliography 519 Review questions 519 Topics for discussion 520 25. CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT 522 25.1 Introduction 522 25.2 Software configuration items 523 25.3 Release of software configuration versions 526 25.4 Documentation of software configuration versions 531 25.5 Configuration management planning 532 25.6 Provision of SCM information services 534 25.7 Computerized tools for performing configuration management tasks 535 25.8 The software configuration management function in the organization 536 25.9 Software quality assurance activities related to SCM 537 Summary 539 Selected bibliography 541 Review questions 542 Topics for discussion 542 26. CASE TOOLS AND IDEs – IMPACT ON SOFTWARE QUALITY 544 26.1 What is a CASE tool? 544 26.2 The classic CASE tool 546 26.3 IDE CASE tools 548 26.4 Real CASE tools 550 26.5 The contribution of CASE tools to software quality 554 Summary 556 Selected bibliography 557 Review questions 559 Topics for discussion 559 PART VI APPENDICES 561 APPENDIX A: SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT AND QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCESS STANDARDS 563 A.1 Introduction – standards and their use 563 A.2 IEEE Std. 730-2014 Standard for software quality assurance 566 A.3 ISO/IEC Std. 12207-2008: system and software engineering – software life cycle processes 570 A.4 IEEE Std. 1012-2012 systems and software verification and validation 574 Summary 579 Selected bibliography 581 Review questions 582 Topics for discussion 583 APPENDIX B: SOFTWARE QUALITY MANAGEMENT STANDARDS AND MODELS 585 B.1 ABC Software Ltd – an unnecessary loss – a mini-case 585 B.2 The scope of quality management standards 587 B.3 Software quality management standards as SPI standards 589 B.4 ISO/IEC 90003 590 B.5 Capability maturity CMMI models – assessment methodology 597 B.6 The SPICE project and the ISO/IEC 15504 software process assessment standard 602 B.7 Additional software quality management standards 609 Summary 611 Selected bibliography 613 Review questions 615 Topics for discussion 616 APPENDIX C: PROJECT PROGRESS CONTROL 617 C.1 Introduction 617 C.2 Finally, a successful project – a mini case 619 C.3 The components of project progress control 621 C.4 Progress control of distributed and globally distributed software development projects 623 C.5 Progress control of internal projects and external participants 624 C.6 Implementation of project progress control 625 C.7 Computerized tools for software progress control 626 Summary 631 Selected bibliography 632 Review questions 633 Topics for discussion 634 APPENDIX D: FROM SDLC TO AGILE – PROCESSES AND QUALITY ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES 635 D.1 The classical software development models 636 D.2 The object-oriented model 645 D.3 The incremental delivery model 649 D.4 The staged model 652 D.5 The Agile methodology models 652 Summary 660 Selected bibliography 662 Review questions 663 Topics for discussion 664 Author Index 667 Subject Index 673

Read more less

Book SynopsisSource Separation in Physical-Chemical Sensing Master advanced signal processing for enhanced physical and chemical sensors with this essential guide In many domains (medicine, satellite imaging and remote sensing, food industry, materials science), data is obtained from large sets of physical/chemical sensors or sensor arrays. Such sophisticated measurement techniques require advanced and smart processing for extracting useful information from raw sensing data. Usually, sensors are not very selective and record a mixture of the useful latent variables. An innovative technique called Blind Source Separation (BSS) can isolate and retrieve the individual latent variables from a mixed-source data array, allowing for refined analysis that fully exploits these cutting-edged imaging and signal-sensing technologies. Source Separation in Physical-Chemical Sensing, supplies a thorough introduction to the principles of BSS, main methods and algorithms and its potentTable of ContentsAbout the Editors xiii List of Contributors xv Foreword xvii Preface xxi Notation xxiii 1 Overview of Source Separation 1Christian Jutten, Leonardo Tomazeli Duarte, and Saïd Moussaoui 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Problem of Source Separation 3 1.3 Statistical Methods for Source Separation 15 1.4 Source Separation Problems in Physical--Chemical Sensing 24 1.5 Source Separation Methods for Chemical--Physical Sensing 30 1.6 Organization of the Book 35 2 Optimization 43Emilie Chouzenoux and Jean-Christophe Pesquet 2.1 Introduction to Optimization Problems 43 2.2 Majorization--Minimization Approaches 50 2.3 Primal-Dual Methods 72 2.4 Application to NMR Signal Restoration 83 2.5 Conclusion 91 3 Non-negative Matrix Factorization 103David Brie, Nicolas Gillis, and Saïd Moussaoui 3.1 Introduction 103 3.2 Geometrical Interpretation of NMF and the Non-negative Rank 105 3.3 Uniqueness and Admissible Solutions of NMF 112 3.4 Non-negative Matrix Factorization Algorithms 118 3.5 Applications of NMF in Chemical Sensing. Two Examples of Reducing Admissible Solutions 129 3.6 Conclusions 141 4 Bayesian Source Separation 151Saïd Moussaoui, Leonardo Tomazeli Duarte, Nicolas Dobigeon, and Christian Jutten 4.1 Introduction 151 4.2 Overview of Bayesian Source Separation 152 4.3 Statistical Models for the Separation in the Linear Mixing 159 4.4 Statistical Models and Separation Algorithms for Nonlinear Mixtures 173 4.5 Some Practical Issues on Algorithm Implementation 177 4.6 Applications to Case Studies in Chemical Sensing 182 4.7 Conclusion 191 5 Geometrical Methods -- Illustration with Hyperspectral Unmixing 201José M. Bioucas-Dias and Wing-Kin Ma 5.1 Introduction 201 5.2 Hyperspectral Sensing 202 5.3 Hyperspectral Mixing Models 206 5.4 Linear HU Problem Formulation 208 5.5 Dictionary-Based Semiblind HU 222 5.6 Minimum Volume Simplex Estimation 227 5.7 Applications 239 5.8 Conclusions 244 6 Tensor Decompositions: Principles and Application to Food Sciences 255Jérémy Cohen, Rasmus Bro, and Pierre Comon 6.1 Introduction 255 6.2 Tensor Decompositions 261 6.3 Constraints in Decompositions 273 6.4 Coupled Decompositions 279 6.5 Algorithms 286 6.6 Applications 297 References 307 Index 325

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe latest tools and techniques for addressing the challenges of 21st century power generation, renewable sources and distribution systems Renewable energy technologies and systems are advancing by leaps and bounds, and it's only a matter of time before renewables replace fossil fuel and nuclear energy sources. Written for practicing engineers, researchers and students alike, this book discusses state-of-the art mathematical and engineering tools for the modeling, simulation and control of renewable and mixed energy systems and related power electronics. Computational methods for multi-domain modeling of integrated energy systems and the solution of power electronics engineering problems are described in detail. Chapters follow a consistent format, featuring a brief introduction to the theoretical background, a description of problems to be solved, as well as objectives to be achieved. Multiple block diagrams, electrical circuits, and mathematical anaTable of ContentsForeword for the First Edition xix Foreword for the Second Edition xxi Preface for the First Edition xxiii Preface for the Second Edition xxvii Acknowledgements xxxi 1 Alternative Sources of Energy 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Renewable Sources of Energy 2 1.3 Renewable Energy versus Alternative Energy 4 1.4 Planning and Development of Integrated Energy 10 1.4.1 Grid]Supplied Electricity 10 1.4.2 Load 11 1.4.3 Distributed Generation 12 1.5 Renewable Energy Economics 13 1.5.1 Calculation of Electricity Generation Costs 14 1.5.1.1 Existing Plants 14 1.5.1.2 New Plants 15 1.5.1.3 Investment Costs 15 1.5.1.4 Capital Recovery Factor 16 1.6 European Targets for Renewable Powers 16 1.6.1 Demand]Side Management Options 17 1.6.2 Supply]Side Management Options 19 1.7 Integrating Renewable Energy Sources 21 1.7.1 Integration of Renewable Energy in the United States 23 1.7.2 Energy Recovery Time 24 1.7.3 Sustainability 26 1.8 Modern Electronic Controls for Power Systems 29 1.9 Issues Related to Alternative Sources of Energy 31 References 35 2 Principles of Thermodynamics 37 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 State of a Thermodynamic System 38 2.2.1 Heating Value 46 2.2.2 First and Second Laws of Thermodynamics and Thermal Efficiency 48 2.3 Fundamental Laws and Principles 49 2.3.1 Example of Efficiency in a Power Plant 51 2.3.2 Practical Problems Associated with Carnot Cycle Plant 54 2.3.3 Rankine Cycle for Power Plants 55 2.3.4 Brayton Cycle for Power Plants 58 2.3.5 Geothermal Energy 60 2.3.6 Kalina Cycle 61 2.3.7 Energy, Power, and System Balance 62 2.4 Examples of Energy Balance 66 2.4.1 Simple Residential Energy Balance 66 2.4.2 Refrigerator Energy Balance 67 2.4.3 Energy Balance for a Water Heater 68 2.4.4 Rock Bed Energy Balance 70 2.4.5 Array of Solar Collectors 70 2.4.6 Heat Pump 71 2.4.7 Heat Transfer Analysis 72 2.4.8 Simple Steam Power Turbine Analysis 73 2.5 Planet Earth: A Closed But Not Isolated System 77 References 79 3 Hydroelectric Power Plants 81 3.1 Introduction 81 3.2 Determination of the Available Power 82 3.3 Expedient Topographical and Hydrological Measurements 84 3.3.1 Simple Measurement of Elevation 84 3.3.2 Global Positioning Systems for Elevation Measurement 85 3.3.3 Pipe Losses 86 3.3.4 Expedient Measurements of Stream Water Flow 87 3.3.4.1 Measurement Using a Float 87 3.3.4.2 Measurement Using a Rectangular Spillway 88 3.3.4.3 Measurement Using a Triangular Spillway 89 3.3.4.4 Measurement Based on the Dilution of Salt in the Water 89 3.3.5 Civil Works 92 3.4 Hydropower Generator Set 93 3.4.1 Regulation Systems 93 3.4.2 Butterfly Valves 93 3.5 Waterwheels 93 3.6 Turbines 96 3.6.1 Pelton Turbine 97 3.6.2 Francis Turbine 99 3.6.3 Michell–Banki Turbine 102 3.6.4 Kaplan or Hydraulic Propeller Turbine 103 3.6.5 Deriaz Turbines 105 3.6.6 Water Pumps Working as Turbines 106 3.6.7 Specification of Hydro Turbines 107 References 109 4 Wind Power Plants 111 4.1 Introduction 111 4.2 Appropriate Location 112 4.2.1 Evaluation of Wind Intensity 112 4.2.1.1 Meteorological Mapping 116 4.2.1.2 Weibull Probability Distribution 118 4.2.1.3 Analysis of Wind Speed by Visualization 121 4.2.1.4 Technique of the Balloon 123 4.2.2 Topography 124 4.2.3 Purpose of the Energy Generated 124 4.2.4 Accessibility 124 4.3 Wind Power 125 4.3.1 Wind Power Corrections 126 4.3.2 Wind Distribution 128 4.4 General Classification of Wind Turbines 129 4.4.1 Rotor Turbines 131 4.4.2 Multiple]Blade Turbines 131 4.4.3 Drag Turbines (Savonius) 132 4.4.4 Lifting Turbines 133 4.4.4.1 Starting System 134 4.4.4.2 Rotor 134 4.4.4.3 Lifting 134 4.4.4.4 Speed Multipliers 134 4.4.4.5 Braking System 135 4.4.4.6 Generation System 135 4.4.4.7 Horizontal] and Vertical]Axis Turbines 135 4.4.5 Magnus Turbines 136 4.4.6 System TARP–WARP 136 4.4.7 Accessories 139 4.5 Generators and Speed Control Used in Wind Power Energy 140 4.6 Analysis of Small Generating Systems 143 4.6.1 Maximization of Cp 145 References 148 5 Thermosolar Power Plants 151 5.1 Introduction 151 5.2 Water Heating by Solar Energy 152 5.3 Heat Transfer Calculation of Thermally Isolated Reservoirs 155 5.3.1 Steady]State Thermal Calculations 155 5.3.2 Transient]State Thermal Calculations 156 5.3.3 Practical Approximate Measurements of the Thermal Constants R and C in Water Reservoirs 158 5.4 Heating Domestic Water 159 5.5 Thermosolar Energy 160 5.5.1 Parabolic Trough 161 5.5.2 Parabolic Dish 163 5.5.3 Solar Power Tower 164 5.5.4 Production of Hydrogen 166 5.6 Economics Analysis of Thermosolar Energy 168 References 170 6 Photovoltaic Power Plants 173 6.1 Introduction 173 6.2 Solar Energy 174 6.3 Conversion of Electricity by Photovoltaic Effect 176 6.3.1 Photovoltaic Cells 177 6.4 Equivalent Models for Photovoltaic Panels 178 6.4.1 Dark]Current Electric Parameters of a Photovoltaic Panel 179 6.4.1.1 Measurement of Iλ 180 6.4.1.2 Measurement of Rp 180 6.4.1.3 Measurement of Id 181 6.4.1.4 Measurement of η 182 6.4.1.5 Measurement of Is 183 6.4.1.6 Measurement of Rs 183 6.4.2 Power, Utilization, and Efficiency of a PV Cell 183 6.5 Solar Cell Output Characteristics 188 6.5.1 Dependence of a PV Cell Characteristic on Temperature and PV Cells 190 6.5.2 Model of a PV Panel Consisting of n Cells in Series 193 6.5.3 Model of a PV Panel Consisting of n Cells in Parallel 195 6.6 Photovoltaic Systems 196 6.6.1 Irradiance Area 197 6.6.2 Solar Modules and Panels 198 6.6.3 Aluminum Structures 198 6.6.4 Load Controller 200 6.6.5 Battery Bank 200 6.6.6 Array Orientation 200 6.7 Applications of Photovoltaic Solar Energy 201 6.7.1 Residential and Public Illumination 201 6.7.2 Stroboscopic Signaling 202 6.7.3 Electric Fence 203 6.7.4 Telecommunications 203 6.7.5 Water Supply and Micro]irrigation Systems 203 6.7.6 Control of Plagues and Conservation of Food and Medicine 205 6.7.7 Hydrogen and Oxygen Generation by Electrolysis 206 6.7.8 Electric Power Supply 208 6.7.9 Security Video Cameras and Alarm Systems 209 6.8 Economics and Analysis of Solar Energy 209 References 214 7 Power Plants with Fuel Cells 217 7.1 Introduction 217 7.2 The Fuel Cell 218 7.3 Commercial Technologies for the Generation of Electricity 220 7.4 Practical Issues Related to Fuel Cell Stacking 231 7.4.1 Low] and High]Temperature Fuel Cells 231 7.4.2 Commercial and Manufacturing Issues 232 7.5 Constructional Features of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells 233 7.6 Constructional Features of Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 236 7.7 Reformers, Electrolyzer Systems, and Related Precautions 237 7.8 Advantages and Disadvantages of Fuel Cells 238 7.9 Fuel Cell Equivalent Circuit 239 7.10 Water, Air, and Heat Management 246 7.10.1 Fuel Cells and Their Thermal Energy Evaluation 247 7.11 Experimental Evaluation of the Fuel Cell Equivalent Model Parameters 250 7.11.1 Determination of FC Parameters 253 7.12 Aspects of Hydrogen as Fuel 256 7.13 Load Curve Peak Shaving with Fuel Cells 258 7.13.1 Maximal Load Curve Flatness at Constant Output Power 258 7.14 Future Trends 260 References 263 8 Biomass]Powered Microplants 267 8.1 Introduction 267 8.2 Fuel from Biomass 272 8.3 Biogas 274 8.4 Biomass for Biogas 275 8.5 Biological Formation of Biogas 277 8.6 Factors Affecting Biodigestion 277 8.7 Characteristics of Biodigesters 279 8.8 Construction of a Biodigester 281 8.8.1 Typical Size for a Biodigester 282 8.9 Generation of Electricity Using Biogas 282 References 286 9 Microturbines 289 9.1 Introduction 289 9.2 Principles of Operation 291 9.3 Microturbine Fuel 293 9.4 Control of Microturbine 294 9.4.1 Mechanical]Side Structure 295 9.4.2 Electrical]Side Structure 297 9.4.3 Control]Side Structure 298 9.5 Efficiency and Power of Microturbines 303 9.6 Site Assessment for Installation of Microturbines 305 References 307 10 Earth Core and Solar Heated Geothermal Energy Plants 311 10.1 Introduction 311 10.2 Earth Core Geothermal as a Source of Energy 313 10.2.1 Earth Core Geothermal Economics 314 10.2.2 Examples of Earth Core Geothermal Electricity 316 10.3 Solar Heat Stored Underground as a Source of Energy 317 10.3.1 Heat Exchange with Nature 319 10.3.2 Heat Exchange with Surface Water 322 10.3.3 Heat Exchange with Circulating Fluid 322 10.4 Solar Geothermal Heat Exchangers 323 10.4.1 Horizontal Serpentines 324 10.4.2 Vertical Serpentines 326 10.4.3 Mixed Serpentines 326 10.4.4 Pressurized Serpentines Heat Pump 326 10.5 Heat Exchange with a Room 328 References 329 11 Thermocouple, Sea Waves, Tide, MHD, and Piezoelectric Power Plants 331 11.1 Introduction 331 11.2 Thermocouple Electric Power Generation 331 11.2.1 Thermocouples 332 11.2.2 Power Conversion Using Thermocouples 334 11.2.3 Principle of Semiconductor Thermocouples 336 11.2.4 A Stack of Semiconductor Thermocouples 338 11.2.5 A Plate of Semiconductor Thermocouples 338 11.2.6 Advantages and Disadvantages of the Semiconductor Thermocouples 339 11.3 Power Plants with Ocean Waves 339 11.3.1 Sea Wave Energy Extraction Technology 341 11.3.2 Energy Content in Sea Waves 344 11.4 Tide] Based Small Power Plants 345 11.5 Small Central Magnetohydrodynamic 347 11.6 Small Piezoelectric Power Plant 349 11.6.1 Piezoelectric Energy Conversion 350 11.6.2 Piezoelectric]Based Energy Applications 352 References 352 12 Induction Generators 357 12.1 Introduction 357 12.2 Principles of Operation 358 12.3 Representation of Steady]State Operation 360 12.4 Power and Losses Generated 362 12.5 Self] Excited Induction Generator 364 12.6 Magnetizing Curves and Self]Excitation 368 12.7 Mathematical Description of the Self]Excitation Process 369 12.8 Grid] Connected and Stand]Alone Operations 372 12.9 Speed and Voltage Control 374 12.9.1 Frequency, Speed, and Voltage Controls 376 12.9.2 The Danish Concept: Two Generators on the Same Shaft 383 12.9.3 Variable]Speed Grid Connection 384 12.9.4 Control by the Load versus Control by the Source 385 12.10 Economics Considerations 387 References 389 13 Permanent Magnet Generators 393 13.1 Introduction 393 13.1.1 PMSG Radial Flux Machines 394 13.1.2 Axial Flux Machines 394 13.1.3 Operating Principle of the PMSG 395 13.2 Permanent Magnets Used for PMSGs 397 13.3 Modeling a Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine 398 13.3.1 Simplified Model of a PMSG 402 13.4 Core Types of a PMSG 407 13.5 PSIM Simulation of the PMSG 408 13.6 Advantages and Disadvantages of the PMSG 408 References 411 14 Storage Systems 413 14.1 Introduction 413 14.2 Energy Storage Parameters 416 14.3 Lead–Acid Batteries 419 14.3.1 Constructional Features 421 14.3.2 Battery Charge–Discharge Cycles 422 14.3.3 Operating Limits and Parameters 424 14.3.4 Maintenance of Lead–Acid Batteries 426 14.3.5 Sizing Lead–Acid Batteries for DG Applications 427 14.4 Ultracapacitors (Supercapacitors) 429 14.4.1 Double]Layer Effect 430 14.4.2 High]Energy Ultracapacitors 432 14.4.3 Applications of Ultracapacitors 433 14.5 Flywheels 435 14.5.1 Advanced Performance of Flywheels 436 14.5.2 Applications of Flywheels 437 14.5.3 Design Strategies 439 14.6 Superconducting Magnetic Storage System 441 14.6.1 SMES System Capabilities 443 14.6.2 Developments in SMES Systems 444 14.7 Pumped Hydroelectric Storage 446 14.7.1 Storage Capabilities of Pumped Systems 447 14.8 Compressed Air Energy Storage 449 14.9 Heat Storage 451 14.10 Hydrogen Storage 452 14.11 Energy Storage as an Economic Resource 453 References 457 15 Integration of Alternative Sources of Energy 461 15.1 Introduction 461 15.2 Principles of Power Interconnection 462 15.2.1 Converting Technologies 462 15.2.2 Power Converters for Power Injection into the Grid 464 15.2.3 Power Flow 466 15.3 Instantaneous Active and Reactive Power Control Approach 470 15.4 Integration of Multiple Renewable Energy Sources 473 15.4.1 DC]Link Integration 475 15.4.2 AC]Link Integration 477 15.4.3 HFAC]Link Integration 478 15.5 Islanding and Interconnection Control 481 15.6 DG PLL with Clarke and Park Transformations 490 15.6.1 Clarke Transformation for AC]Link Integration 490 15.6.2 Blondel or Park Transformation for AC]Link Integration 492 15.7 DG Control and Power Injection 494 References 500 16 Distributed Generation 503 16.1 Introduction 503 16.2 The Purpose of Distributed Generation 506 16.2.1 Modularity 507 16.2.2 Efficiency 507 16.2.3 Low or No Emissions 507 16.2.4 Security 507 16.2.5 Load Management 508 16.3 Sizing and Siting of Distributed Generation 510 16.4 Demand]Side Management 511 16.5 Optimal Location of Distributed Energy Sources 512 16.5.1 DG Influence on Power and Energy Losses 514 16.5.2 Estimation of DG Influence on Power Losses of Sub]transmission Systems 518 16.5.3 Equivalent of Sub]transmission Systems Using Experimental Design 521 16.6 Algorithm of Multicriterial Analysis 523 16.6.1 Voltage Quality in DG Systems 525 References 530 17 Interconnection of Alternative Energy Sources with the Grid 533Benjamin Kroposki, Thomas Basso, Richard Deblasio, and N. Richard Friedman 17.1 Introduction 533 17.2 Interconnection Technologies 536 17.2.1 Synchronous Interconnection 536 17.2.2 Induction Interconnection 537 17.2.3 Inverter Interconnection 538 17.3 Standards and Codes for Interconnection 539 17.3.1 IEEE 1547 539 17.3.2 National Electrical Code 540 17.3.2.1 NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 540 17.3.2.2 NFPA 853: Standard for the Installation of Stationary Fuel Cell Power Plants 541 17.3.3 UL Standards 541 17.3.3.1 UL 1741: Inverters, Converters, and Controllers for Use in Independent Power Systems 541 17.3.3.2 UL 1008: Transfer Switch Equipment 541 17.3.3.3 UL 2200: Standard for Safety for Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies 543 17.4 Interconnection Considerations 543 17.4.1 Voltage Regulation 543 17.4.2 Integration with Area EPS Grounding 544 17.4.3 Synchronization 544 17.4.4 Isolation 545 17.4.5 Response to Voltage Disturbance 545 17.4.6 Response to Frequency Disturbance 546 17.4.7 Disconnection for Faults 548 17.4.8 Loss of Synchronism 549 17.4.9 Feeder Reclosing Coordination 549 17.4.10 Dc Injection 550 17.4.11 Voltage Flicker 550 17.4.12 Harmonics 551 17.4.13 Unintentional Islanding Protection 553 17.5 Interconnection Examples for Alternative Energy Sources 553 17.5.1 Synchronous Generator for Peak Demand Reduction 555 17.5.2 Small Grid]Connected PV System 555 References 557 18 Micropower System Modeling with HOMER 559Tom Lambert, Paul Gilman, and Peter Lilienthal 18.1 Introduction 559 18.2 Simulation 561 18.3 Optimization 566 18.4 Sensitivity Analysis 569 18.4.1 Dealing with Uncertainty 570 18.4.2 Sensitivity Analyses on Hourly Data Sets 573 18.5 Physical Modeling 574 18.5.1 Loads 574 18.5.1.1 Primary Load 575 18.5.1.2 Deferrable Load 575 18.5.1.3 Thermal Load 576 18.5.2 Resources 577 18.5.2.1 Solar Resource 577 18.5.2.2 Wind Resource 577 18.5.2.3 Hydro Resource 578 18.5.2.4 Biomass Resource 578 18.5.3 Components 579 18.5.3.1 PV Array 580 18.5.3.2 Wind Turbine 581 18.5.3.3 Hydro Turbine 582 18.5.3.4 Generators 583 18.5.3.5 Battery Bank 585 18.5.3.6 Grid 589 18.5.3.7 Boiler 591 18.5.3.8 Converter 591 18.5.3.9 Electrolyzer 592 18.5.3.10 Hydrogen Tank 592 18.5.4 System Dispatch 592 18.5.4.1 Operating Reserve 593 18.5.4.2 Control of Dispatchable System Components 594 18.5.4.3 Dispatch Strategy 597 18.5.4.4 Load Priority 598 18.6 Economic Modeling 598 References 601 Appendix A Diesel Power Plants 603 A.1 Introduction 603 A.2 The Diesel Engine 604 A.3 Main Components of a Diesel Engine 604 A.3.1 Fixed Parts 605 A.3.2 Moving Parts 605 A.3.3 Auxiliary Systems 605 A.4 Terminology of Diesel Engines 606 A.4.1 The Diesel Cycle 606 A.4.2 Combustion Process 608 A.4.2.1 Four]Stroke Diesel Engine 609 A.5 Cycle of the Diesel Engine 609 A.5.1 Relative Diesel Engine Cycle Losses 610 A.5.2 Classification of the Diesel Engine 610 A.6 Types of Fuel Injection Pumps 611 A.7 Electrical Conditions of Generators Driven by Diesel Engines 612 References 614 Appendix B The Stirling Engine 615 B.1 Introduction 615 B.2 The Stirling Cycle 616 B.3 Displacer]Type Stirling Engine 619 B.4 Two]Piston Stirling Engine 621 References 623 Index 625

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn updated and expanded new edition of this comprehensive guide to innovation in wind turbine design Innovation in Wind Turbine Design, Second Edition comprehensively covers the fundamentals of design, explains the reasons behind design choices, and describes the methodology for evaluating innovative systems and components. This second edition has been substantially expanded and generally updated. New content includes elementary actuator disc theory of the low induction rotor concept, much expanded discussion of offshore issues and of airborne wind energy systems, updated drive train information with basic theory of the epicyclic gears and differential drives, a clarified presentation of the basic theory of energy in the wind and fallacies about ducted rotor design related to theory, lab testing and field testing of the Katru and Wind Lens ducted rotor systems, a short review of LiDAR, latest developments of the multi-rotor concept including the Vestas 4 Table of ContentsForeword xv Preface xvii Acknowledgement xix Introduction 1 0.1 Why Innovation? 1 0.2 The Challenge of Wind 2 0.3 The Specification of a Modern Wind Turbine 2 0.4 The Variability of the Wind 4 0.5 Early Electricity-Generating Wind Turbines 4 0.6 Commercial Wind Technology 6 0.7 Basis of Wind Technology Evaluation 7 0.7.1 Standard Design as Baseline 7 0.7.2 Basis of Technological Advantage 7 0.7.3 Security of Claimed Power Performance 8 0.7.4 Impact of Proposed Innovation 8 0.8 Competitive Status of Wind Technology 8 References 9 Part I Design Background 11 1 Rotor Aerodynamic Theory 13 1.1 Introduction 13 1.2 Aerodynamic Lift 14 1.3 Power in the Wind 16 1.4 The Actuator Disc Concept 17 1.5 Open Flow Actuator Disc 19 1.5.1 Power Balance 19 1.5.2 Axial Force Balance 20 1.5.3 Froude’s Theorem and the Betz Limit 20 1.5.4 The Power Extraction Process 22 1.5.5 Relativity in a Fluid Flow Field 23 1.6 Why a Rotor? 25 1.7 Actuator Disc in Augmented Flow and Ducted Rotor Systems 26 1.7.1 Fundamentals 26 1.7.2 Generalised Actuator Disc 28 1.7.3 The Force on a Diffuser 36 1.7.4 Generalised Actuator Disc Theory and Realistic Diffuser Design 37 1.8 Blade Element Momentum Theory 38 1.8.1 Introduction 38 1.8.2 Momentum Equations 38 1.8.3 Blade Element Equations 40 1.8.4 Non-dimensional Lift Distribution 40 1.8.5 General Momentum Theory 41 1.8.6 BEM in Augmented Flow 42 1.8.7 Closed-Form BEM Solutions 44 1.9 Optimum Rotor Design 46 1.9.1 Optimisation to Maximise Cp 46 1.9.2 The Power Coefficient, Cp 48 1.9.3 Thrust Coefficient 51 1.9.4 Out-of-Plane Bending Moment Coefficient 52 1.9.5 Optimisation to a Loading Constraint 54 1.9.6 Optimisation of Rotor Design and Hub Flow 56 1.10 Limitations of Actuator Disc and BEM Theory 57 1.10.1 Actuator Disc Limitations 57 1.10.2 Inviscid Modelling and Real Flows 58 1.10.3 Wake Rotation and Tip Effect 58 1.10.4 Optimum Rotor Theory 59 1.10.5 Skewed Flow 59 1.10.6 Summary of BEM Limitations 59 References 60 2 Rotor Aerodynamic Design 65 2.1 Optimum Rotors and Solidity 65 2.2 Rotor Solidity and Ideal Variable Speed Operation 66 2.3 Solidity and Loads 68 2.4 Aerofoil Design Development 68 2.5 Sensitivity of Aerodynamic Performance to Planform Shape 73 2.6 Aerofoil Design Specification 74 2.7 Aerofoil Design for Large Rotors 75 References 77 3 Rotor Structural Interactions 79 3.1 Blade Design in General 79 3.2 Basics of Blade Structure 80 3.3 Simplified Cap Spar Analyses 82 3.3.1 Design for Minimum Mass with Prescribed Deflection 83 3.3.2 Design for Fatigue Strength: No Deflection Limits 83 3.4 The Effective t/c Ratio of Aerofoil Sections 84 3.5 Blade Design Studies: Example of a Parametric Analysis 85 3.6 Industrial Blade Technology 91 3.6.1 Design 91 3.6.2 Manufacturing 92 3.6.3 Design Development 94 References 94 4 Upscaling of Wind Turbine Systems 97 4.1 Introduction: Size and Size Limits 97 4.2 The ‘Square-Cube’ Law 100 4.3 Scaling Fundamentals 100 4.4 Similarity Rules for Wind Turbine Systems 102 4.4.1 Tip Speed 102 4.4.2 Aerodynamic Moment Scaling 103 4.4.3 Bending Section Modulus Scaling 103 4.4.4 Tension Section Scaling 103 4.4.5 Aeroelastic Stability 103 4.4.6 Self-Weight Load Scaling 103 4.4.7 Blade (Tip) Deflection Scaling 104 4.4.8 More Subtle Scaling Effects and Implications 104 4.4.8.1 Size Effect 104 4.4.8.2 Aerofoil Boundary Layer 104 4.4.8.3 Earth’s Boundary Layer, Wind Shear and Turbulence 104 4.4.9 Gearbox Scaling 105 4.4.10 Support Structure Scaling 105 4.4.11 Power/Energy Scaling 105 4.4.12 Electrical Systems Scaling 106 4.4.13 Control Systems Scaling 106 4.4.14 Scaling Summary 106 4.5 Analysis of Commercial Data 107 4.5.1 Blade Mass Scaling 108 4.5.2 Shaft Mass Scaling 111 4.5.3 Scaling of Nacelle Mass and Tower Top Mass 112 4.5.4 Tower Top Mass 114 4.5.5 Tower Scaling 114 4.5.5.1 Height versus Diameter 114 4.5.5.2 Mass versus Diameter 115 4.5.5.3 Normalised Mass versus Diameter 116 4.5.6 Gearbox Scaling 118 4.6 Upscaling of VAWTs 119 4.7 Rated Tip Speed 120 4.8 Upscaling of Loads 121 4.9 Violating Similarity 123 4.10 Cost Models 124 4.11 Scaling Conclusions 125 References 126 5 Wind Energy Conversion Concepts 127 References 129 6 Drive-Train Design 131 6.1 Introduction 131 6.2 Definitions 131 6.3 Objectives of Drive-Train Innovation 132 6.4 Drive-Train Technology Maps 132 6.5 Direct Drive 136 6.6 Hybrid Systems 139 6.7 Geared Systems – the Planetary Gearbox 140 6.8 Drive Trains with Differential Drive 144 6.9 Hydraulic Transmission 145 6.10 Efficiency of Drive-Train Components 148 6.10.1 Introduction 148 6.10.2 Efficiency over the Operational Range 150 6.10.3 Gearbox Efficiency 151 6.10.4 Generator Efficiency 152 6.10.5 Converter Efficiency 153 6.10.6 Transformer Efficiency 153 6.10.7 Fluid Coupling Efficiency 153 6.11 Drive-Train Dynamics 154 6.12 The Optimum Drive Train 155 6.13 Innovative Concepts for Power Take-Off 157 References 160 7 Offshore Wind Technology 163 7.1 Design for Offshore 163 7.2 High-Speed Rotor 164 7.2.1 Design Logic 164 7.2.2 Speed Limit 164 7.2.3 Rotor Configurations 165 7.2.4 Design Comparisons 167 7.3 ‘Simpler’ Offshore Turbines 170 7.4 Rating of Offshore Wind Turbines 171 7.5 Foundation and Support Structure Design 172 7.5.1 Foundation Design Concepts 172 7.5.2 Support Structure Design Concepts 173 7.5.3 Loads, Foundations and Costs 174 7.6 Electrical Systems of Offshore Wind Farms 175 7.6.1 Collection System for an Offshore Wind Farm 175 7.6.2 Integration of Offshore Wind Farms into Electrical Networks 177 7.6.2.1 High-Voltage Alternating Current (HVAC) 177 7.6.2.2 Current-Source Converter (CSC) 179 7.6.2.3 Voltage-Source Converter for Offshore Wind Farm Integration 180 7.7 Operations and Maintenance (O&M) 180 7.7.1 Introduction 180 7.7.2 Modelling 181 7.7.3 Inspection of Wind Turbines 182 7.8 Offshore Floating Wind Turbines 183 References 188 8 Future Wind Technology 191 8.1 Evolution 191 8.2 Present Trends – Consensus in Blade Number and Operational Concept 193 8.3 Present Trends – Divergence in Drive-Train Concepts 194 8.4 Future Wind Technology – Airborne 194 8.4.1 Introduction 194 8.4.2 KPS – Cable Tension Power Take-Off 198 8.4.2.1 Earth Axes 198 8.4.2.2 Kite Axes 198 8.4.2.3 BEM Application to the Kite as an Aerofoil Section (No Tip Loss Applied) 199 8.4.3 Daisy Kite – Rotary Power Transmission 202 8.4.4 Omnidea – Rotating Cylindrical Balloon as a Lifting Body 203 8.4.5 Makani 203 8.4.6 Airborne Conclusions 204 8.5 Future Wind Technology – Energy Storage 204 8.5.1 Types of Energy Storage 204 8.5.2 Battery Storage 204 8.5.3 Gas Pressure Storage 205 8.5.4 Compressed Air Storage 205 8.5.5 Flywheel Energy Storage 206 8.5.6 Thermal Energy Storage 206 8.6 Innovative Energy Conversion Solutions 207 8.6.1 Electrostatic Generator 207 8.6.2 Vibrating Column 208 References 208 Part II Technology Evaluation 211 9 Cost of Energy 213 9.1 The Approach to Cost of Energy 213 9.2 Energy: the Power Curve 216 9.3 Energy: Efficiency, Reliability, Availability 222 9.3.1 Efficiency 222 9.3.2 Reliability 222 9.3.3 Availability 223 9.4 Capital Costs 224 9.5 Operation and Maintenance 225 9.6 Overall Cost Split 226 9.7 Scaling Impact on Cost 227 9.8 Impact of Loads (Site Class) 228 References 232 10 Evaluation Methodology 235 10.1 Key Evaluation Issues 235 10.2 Fatal Flaw Analysis 235 10.3 Power Performance 236 10.3.1 The Betz Limit 236 10.3.2 The Pressure Difference across a Wind Turbine 237 10.3.3 Total Energy in the Flow 238 10.4 Structure and Essential Mass 239 10.5 Drive-Train Torque 241 10.6 Representative Baseline 241 10.7 Design Loads Comparison 242 10.8 Evaluation Example: Optimum Rated Power of a Wind Turbine 244 10.9 Evaluation Example: the Carter Wind Turbine and Structural Flexibility 246 10.10 Evaluation Example: Concept Design Optimisation Study 249 10.11 Evaluation Example: Ducted Turbine Design Overview 251 10.11.1 Extreme Loads 251 10.11.2 Drive-Train Torque 252 10.11.3 Energy Capture 252 References 253 Part III Design Themes 255 11 Optimum Blade Number 257 11.1 Energy Capture Comparisons 257 11.2 Blade Design Issues 258 11.3 Operational and System Design Issues 260 11.4 Multi-bladed Rotors 265 References 266 12 Pitch versus Stall 267 12.1 Stall Regulation 267 12.2 Pitch Regulation 269 12.3 Fatigue Loading Issues 270 12.4 Power Quality and Network Demands 272 12.4.1 Grid Code Requirements and Implications for Wind Turbine Design 272 References 274 13 HAWT or VAWT? 277 13.1 Introduction 277 13.2 VAWT Aerodynamics 277 13.3 Power Performance and Energy Capture 282 13.4 Drive-Train Torque 284 13.5 Niche Applications for VAWTs 286 13.6 Status of VAWT Design 286 13.6.1 Problems 286 13.6.2 Advances in VAWT Understanding and Technology 287 References 289 14 Free Yaw 291 14.1 Yaw System COE Value 291 14.2 Yaw Dynamics 291 14.3 Yaw Damping 293 14.4 Main Power Transmission 293 14.5 Operational Experience of Free Yaw Wind Turbines 294 14.6 Summary View 295 References 295 15 Multi-rotor Systems (MRS) 297 15.1 Introduction 297 15.2 Standardisation Benefit and Concept Developments 297 15.3 Operational Systems 298 15.4 Scaling Economics 298 15.5 History Overview 300 15.6 Aerodynamic Performance of Multi-rotor Arrays 300 15.7 Recent Multi-rotor Concepts 301 15.8 MRS Design Based on VAWT Units 304 15.9 MRS Design within the Innwind.EU Project 306 15.9.1 Loads, Structure and Yaw System Design 306 15.9.2 Operations and Maintenance 308 15.9.3 Cost of Energy Evaluation 309 15.10 Multi-rotor Conclusions 311 References 311 16 Design Themes Summary 313 Part IV Innovative Technology Examples 315 17 Adaptable Rotor Concepts 317 17.1 Rotor Operational Demands 317 17.2 Management of Wind Turbine Loads 319 17.3 Control of Wind Turbines 320 17.4 LiDAR 321 17.4.1 Introduction 321 17.4.2 The LiDAR Operational Principle 321 17.4.3 Evaluation of LiDAR for Control of Wind Turbines 322 17.4.4 An Example of Future Innovation in LiDAR 323 17.5 Adaptable Rotors 323 17.6 The Coning Rotor 326 17.6.1 Concept 326 17.6.2 Coning Rotor: Outline Evaluation – Energy Capture 328 17.6.3 Coning Rotor: Outline Evaluation – Loads 329 17.6.4 Concept Overview 330 17.7 Variable Diameter Rotor 330 References 332 18 Ducted Rotors 335 18.1 Introduction 335 18.2 The Katru Shrouded Rotor System 336 18.3 The Wind Lens Ducted Rotor 340 References 344 19 The Gamesa G10X Drive Train 345 20 DeepWind Innovative VAWT 349 20.1 The Concept 349 20.1.1 Blades 349 20.1.2 Controls 351 20.1.3 Generator Concepts 351 20.1.4 Torque Absorption 353 20.1.5 Anchoring Part 353 20.2 DeepWind Concept at 5 MW Scale 353 20.3 Marine Operations Installation, Transportation and O&M 353 20.4 Testing and Demonstration 353 20.5 Cost Estimations 355 References 356 21 Gyroscopic Torque Transmission 357 References 362 22 The Norsetek Rotor Design 363 References 365 23 Siemens Blade Technology 367 24 Stall-Induced Vibrations 371 References 374 25 Magnetic Gearing and Pseudo-Direct Drive 377 25.1 Magnetic Gearing Technology 377 25.2 Pseudo-Direct-Drive Technology 380 References 382 26 Summary and Concluding Comments 383 Index 385

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical introduction to intelligent computer vision theory, design, implementation, and technology The past decade has witnessed epic growth in image processing and intelligent computer vision technology.Table of ContentsPreface xi About the Companion Website xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 The Scope of the Book 2 1.1.1 Classification 3 1.1.2 Parameter Estimation 4 1.1.3 State Estimation 5 1.1.4 Relations between the Subjects 7 1.2 Engineering 10 1.3 The Organization of the Book 12 1.4 Changes from First Edition 14 1.5 References 15 2 PRTools Introduction 17 2.1 Motivation 17 2.2 Essential Concepts 18 2.3 PRTools Organization Structure and Implementation 22 2.4 Some Details about PRTools 26 2.4.1 Datasets 26 2.4.2 Datafiles 30 2.4.3 Datafiles Help Information 31 2.4.4 Classifiers and Mappings 34 2.4.5 Mappings Help Information 36 2.4.6 How to Write Your Own Mapping 38 2.5 Selected Bibliography 42 3 Detection and Classification 43 3.1 Bayesian Classification 46 3.1.1 Uniform Cost Function and Minimum Error Rate 53 3.1.2 Normal Distributed Measurements; Linear and Quadratic Classifiers 56 3.2 Rejection 62 3.2.1 Minimum Error Rate Classification with Reject Option 63 3.3 Detection: The Two-Class Case 66 3.4 Selected Bibliography 74 Exercises 74 4 Parameter Estimation 77 4.1 Bayesian Estimation 79 4.1.1 MMSE Estimation 86 4.1.2 MAP Estimation 87 4.1.3 The Gaussian Case with Linear Sensors 88 4.1.4 Maximum Likelihood Estimation 89 4.1.5 Unbiased Linear MMSE Estimation 91 4.2 Performance Estimators 94 4.2.1 Bias and Covariance 95 4.2.2 The Error Covariance of the Unbiased Linear MMSE Estimator 99 4.3 Data Fitting 100 4.3.1 Least Squares Fitting 101 4.3.2 Fitting Using a Robust Error Norm 104 4.3.3 Regression 107 4.4 Overview of the Family of Estimators 110 4.5 Selected Bibliography 111 Exercises 112 5 State Estimation 115 5.1 A General Framework for Online Estimation 117 5.1.1 Models 117 5.1.2 Optimal Online Estimation 123 5.2 Infinite Discrete-Time State Variables 125 5.2.1 Optimal Online Estimation in Linear-Gaussian Systems 125 5.2.2 Suboptimal Solutions for Non-linear Systems 133 5.3 Finite Discrete-Time State Variables 147 5.3.1 Hidden Markov Models 148 5.3.2 Online State Estimation 152 5.3.3 Offline State Estimation 156 5.4 Mixed States and the Particle Filter 163 5.4.1 Importance Sampling 164 5.4.2 Resampling by Selection 166 5.4.3 The Condensation Algorithm 167 5.5 Genetic State Estimation 170 5.5.1 The Genetic Algorithm 170 5.5.2 Genetic State Estimation 176 5.5.3 Computational Issues 177 5.6 State Estimation in Practice 183 5.6.1 System Identification 185 5.6.2 Observability, Controllability and Stability 188 5.6.3 Computational Issues 193 5.6.4 Consistency Checks 196 5.7 Selected Bibliography 201 Exercises 204 6 Supervised Learning 207 6.1 Training Sets 208 6.2 Parametric Learning 210 6.2.1 Gaussian Distribution, Mean Unknown 211 6.2.2 Gaussian Distribution, Covariance Matrix Unknown 212 6.2.3 Gaussian Distribution, Mean and Covariance Matrix Both Unknown 213 6.2.4 Estimation of the Prior Probabilities 215 6.2.5 Binary Measurements 216 6.3 Non-parametric Learning 217 6.3.1 Parzen Estimation and Histogramming 218 6.3.2 Nearest Neighbour Classification 223 6.3.3 Linear Discriminant Functions 230 6.3.4 The Support Vector Classifier 237 6.3.5 The Feedforward Neural Network 242 6.4 Adaptive Boosting – Adaboost 245 6.5 Convolutional Neural Networks (CNNs) 249 6.5.1 Convolutional Neural Network Structure 249 6.5.2 Computation and Training of CNNs 251 6.6 Empirical Evaluation 252 6.7 Selected Bibliography 257 Exercises 257 7 Feature Extraction and Selection 259 7.1 Criteria for Selection and Extraction 261 7.1.1 Interclass/Intraclass Distance 262 7.1.2 Chernoff–Bhattacharyya Distance 267 7.1.3 Other Criteria 270 7.2 Feature Selection 272 7.2.1 Branch-and-Bound 273 7.2.2 Suboptimal Search 275 7.2.3 Several New Methods of Feature Selection 278 7.2.4 Implementation Issues 287 7.3 Linear Feature Extraction 288 7.3.1 Feature Extraction Based on the Bhattacharyya Distance with Gaussian Distributions 291 7.3.2 Feature Extraction Based on Inter/Intra Class Distance 296 7.4 References 300 Exercises 300 8 Unsupervised Learning 303 8.1 Feature Reduction 304 8.1.1 Principal Component Analysis 304 8.1.2 Multidimensional Scaling 309 8.1.3 Kernel Principal Component Analysis 315 8.2 Clustering 320 8.2.1 Hierarchical Clustering 323 8.2.2 K-Means Clustering 327 8.2.3 Mixture of Gaussians 329 8.2.4 Mixture of probabilistic PCA 335 8.2.5 Self-Organizing Maps 336 8.2.6 Generative Topographic Mapping 342 8.3 References 345 Exercises 346 9 Worked Out Examples 349 9.1 Example on Image Classification with PRTools 349 9.1.1 Example on Image Classification 349 9.1.2 Example on Face Classification 354 9.1.3 Example on Silhouette Classification 357 9.2 Boston Housing Classification Problem 361 9.2.1 Dataset Description 361 9.2.2 Simple Classification Methods 363 9.2.3 Feature Extraction 365 9.2.4 Feature Selection 367 9.2.5 Complex Classifiers 368 9.2.6 Conclusions 371 9.3 Time-of-Flight Estimation of an Acoustic Tone Burst 372 9.3.1 Models of the Observed Waveform 374 9.3.2 Heuristic Methods for Determining the ToF 376 9.3.3 Curve Fitting 377 9.3.4 Matched Filtering 379 9.3.5 ml Estimation Using Covariance Models for the Reflections 380 9.3.6 Optimization and Evaluation 385 9.4 Online Level Estimation in a Hydraulic System 392 9.4.1 Linearized Kalman Filtering 394 9.4.2 Extended Kalman Filtering 397 9.4.3 Particle Filtering 398 9.4.4 Discussion 403 9.5 References 406 Appendix A: Topics Selected from Functional Analysis 407 Appendix B: Topics Selected from Linear Algebra and Matrix Theory 421 Appendix C: Probability Theory 437 Appendix D: Discrete-Time Dynamic Systems 453 Index 459

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book discusses modern-day Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors (MOSFETs) and future trends of transistor devices. This bookprovides an overview of Field Effect Transistors (FETs)by discussing the basic principles ofFETs andexploring the latest technological developments in the field.It covers and connects a wide spectrum of topics related to semiconductor device physics, physics of transistors, and advanced transistor concepts. This book containssix chapters. Chapter 1 discusses electronic materials and charge. Chapter 2 examines junctions, discusses contacts under thermal-equilibrium, metal-semiconductor contacts, and metal-insulator-semiconductor systems. Chapter 3 covers traditional planar Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors (MOSFETs). Chapter 4 describes scaling-driving technological variationsandnovel dimensions of MOSFETs. Chapter 5 analyzes Heterojunction Field Effect Transistors (FETs) and also discusses the challenges and rewaTable of ContentsIntroduction xi 1 Electronic Materials and Charge Transport 1 1.1 Wave/Particle Electrons in Solids 1 1.1.1 Quantum Description of Electrons 3 1.1.2 Band Diagram and Effective-Mass Formalism 6 1.1.3 Density of States Function 7 1.1.4 Conduction and Valence Bands 8 1.1.5 Band Diagram and Free Charge Carriers 10 1.1.6 Supplementary Notes on Band Diagram 11 1.1.7 Bond Model 14 1.2 Electrons, Holes, and Doping in Semiconductors 14 1.2.1 Electrons and Holes 14 1.2.2 Doping 18 1.2.3 Calculation of Ionization Energies in Semiconductors 24 1.3 Thermal-Equilibrium Statistics 25 1.3.1 Fermi–Dirac Statistics 25 1.3.2 Maxwell–Boltzmann Statistics 27 1.3.3 Calculating Electron and Hole Concentration in Nondegenerate Semiconductors 29 1.3.4 Mass Action Law 31 1.3.5 Calculation of Electron and Hole Concentration in a Degenerate Semiconductor 33 1.3.6 Quasi-Fermi Levels 35 1.3.7 Statistics of Dopant Activation Process 35 1.4 Charge-Carrier Transport in Semiconductors 37 1.4.1 Current-Continuity Equation 39 1.4.2 Drift–Diffusion Formalism 40 1.4.3 Characterization of Low Electric-Field Transport Parameters 53 1.4.4 High Electric-Field Drift Transport 54 1.4.5 Thermionic and Field Emission 61 1.5 Breakdown in Semiconductors 66 1.6 Crystallinity and Semiconductor Materials 69 1.6.1 Bravais Lattices 71 1.6.2 Strain and Techniques of Epitaxy 78 1.7 Quantum Transport Phenomena and Scattering Mechanisms in Semiconductors 89 1.7.1 Quantum Phenomena in Carrier Transport: A Snapshot 90 1.7.2 Drude’s Model: A Close-UP 91 1.7.3 Major Scattering Processes 95 Further Reading 109 Solid-State Theory 109 Physics of Semiconductor Devices 109 Semiconductor Materials and Heterostructures 109 Problems 110 Appendix 1.A Derivation of Fermi–Dirac Statistics 111 Further Reading 114 Appendix 1.B Derivation of Einstein Relationship in Degenerate Semiconductors 114 Further Reading 115 Appendix 1.C Strain Tensor 116 2 Junctions 119 2.1 Contacts Under Thermal Equilibrium 119 2.2 Metal–Semiconductor Contacts 121 2.2.1 Band Diagram of an MS Junction 122 2.2.2 SDA 127 2.3 P–N Junctions 149 2.3.1 Thermal-Equilibrium Band Diagram of P–N Junctions 149 2.3.2 Calculation of Potential across P–N Junctions and SDA 151 2.4 Metal–Insulator–Semiconductor System 188 2.4.1 Thermal-Equilibrium Band Diagram of MOS System 189 2.4.2 Biased MOS System 192 2.4.3 Threshold-Voltage Adjustment and Calculations 200 2.4.4 C–V Characteristic of MOS Systems 208 2.5 Current Conduction in the Presence of Band Discontinuities in Junctions 216 2.5.1 Thermionic Emission 216 2.5.2 Field Emission and Thermionic-Field Emission 224 Further Reading 227 Physics of Semiconductor Devices 227 Problems 228 Appendix 2.A Limitations of SDA and the Meaning of Debye Length 229 3 Traditional Planar MOSFETs: Operation, Modeling, and Technology Scaling 231 3.1 Battle of Transistors: MOSFET Versus BJT 232 3.2 Principles of Operation of MOSFETs and Device Modeling: First-Order Principles 236 3.2.1 Modeling of the Operation of Long-Channel MOSFET 238 3.2.2 Modeling of the Operation of Short-Channel MOSFET 250 3.3 Quantum Confinement and Electrostatics of MOSFET 282 3.4 Subthreshold Operation of Short-Channel MOSFET 285 3.5 Limits of Scaling: A Recap 290 Reference 291 Further Reading 291 Physics of Semiconductor Devices 292 Microfabrication Technology and Material Characterization 292 Problems 292 4 From Scaling-Driven Technological Variations to Novel Dimensions in MISFETs 295 4.1 FinFET, UTBSOI, and Other Multiple-Gate FETs 296 4.1.1 Quantitative Assessment of the Advantages of SOI and Multiple-Gate MOSFETs 301 4.1.2 Multiple-Gate MOSFETs: A Complementary Perspective on the Implementation and Physics of Operation 306 4.1.3 Strain Engineering: From Bulk to Multiple-Gate MOSFETs 313 4.1.4 Limitations of the Introduction of III–V Channels to Multiple-Gate and Other Modern CMOS Technologies 320 4.2 Velocity-Modulation Transistor 321 4.2.1 VMT: Basic Principles of Operation 322 4.2.2 Real-Space Transfer: Speed and Functionality 325 4.3 Resonant-Gate and Resonant-Channel Transistors 333 4.3.1 Resonant-Gate Transistor: Principles of Operation 336 4.3.2 Resonant-Channel Transistor: Principles of Operation 343 4.4 Carbon Nanotube FET and FETs Realized on Other Nanotube and Nanowires 346 4.4.1 CNFETs versus MOSFETs: Differences in Principles of Operation and Realization 348 4.4.2 Other Nanotube and Nanowire Transistors 363 4.5 spinFET 365 4.5.1 spinFET: Principles of Operation 365 4.5.2 spinFET: Challenges in Realization 368 References 372 Further Reading 372 Problems 373 5 Heterojunction FETs 375 5.1 Challenges and Rewards of Heteroepitaxy 377 5.1.1 Lattice Matching and the Substrate Challenge 379 5.1.2 Properties of a Few Famous Nonpolar Heterostructures: A Brief Visit 380 5.2 Quantum Phenomena in Semiconductor Heterostructures 385 5.2.1 Electron Behavior in a Triangular Quantum Well 389 5.2.2 Subbands and Two-Dimensional Electron Gas 391 5.2.3 Semiconductor Heterojunctions and Self-Consistent Evaluation 392 5.2.4 Modulation Doping 394 5.3 HFET: Brief Exposé of Design Intricacies 400 5.3.1 Deep Donors and Modulation Doping 407 5.3.2 Threshold-Voltage Calculation in HFET 409 5.3.3 HFET: A Brief Visit to Microfabrication Challenges 414 5.3.4 Hot Electron Applications Among HFETs 416 5.4 Polar III-Nitride HFET 417 5.4.1 Polarization Among III-Nitride Heterostructures 418 5.4.2 Subband Energy Levels and 2DEG Characteristics of Polar AlGaN/GaN Heterojunctions 422 References 427 Further Reading 427 Physics of Heterostructures and High-Speed Transistors 427 Material Properties and Processing of Semiconductor Materials and Heterostructures 427 Problems 428 6 FETs at Molecular Scales 429 6.1 FET: A Change of Paradigm 430 6.2 Resistance Redefined 431 6.3 Evaluation of Current–Voltage Characteristics of a Single Energy-Level Channel FET 440 6.4 From Current Conduction in Single Energy-Level Channels to Definition of Conductance in Macroscale Conductors 444 Further Reading 448 Index 449

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive reference of the latest developments in MV drive technology in the area of power converter topologies This new edition reflects the recent technological advancements in the MV drive industry, such as advanced multilevel converters and drive configurations. It includes three new chapters, Control of Synchronous Motor Drives, Transformerless MV Drives, and Matrix Converter Fed Drives. In addition, there are extensively revised chapters on Multilevel Voltage Source Inverters and Voltage Source Inverter-Fed Drives. This book includes a systematic analysis on a variety of high-power multilevel converters, illustrates important concepts with simulations and experiments, introduces various megawatt drives produced by world leading drive manufacturers, and addresses practical problems and their mitigations methods. This new edition: Provides an in-depth discussion and analysis of various control schemes for the MV synchronous motor drives Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xv Preface and Acknowledgments xvii List of Abbreviations xix Part One Introduction 1 1. Introduction 3 1.1 Overview of High-Power Drives 3 1.2 Technical Requirements and Challenges 5 1.3 Converter Configurations 8 1.4 Industrial MV Drives 11 1.5 Summary 14 References 15 Appendix 16 2. High-Power Semiconductor Devices 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 High-Power Switching Devices 18 2.3 Operation of Series Connected Devices 29 2.4 Summary 32 References 33 Part Two Multipulse Diode and SCR Rectifiers 35 3. Multipulse Diode Rectifiers 37 3.1 Introduction 37 3.2 Six-Pulse Diode Rectifier 38 3.3 Series-Type Multipulse Diode Rectifiers 47 3.4 Separate-Type Multipulse Diode Rectifiers 57 3.5 Summary 62 References 63 4. Multipulse SCR Rectifiers 65 4.1 Introduction 65 4.2 Six-Pulse SCR Rectifier 65 4.3 12-Pulse SCR Rectifier 74 4.4 18- and 24-Pulse SCR Rectifiers 79 4.5 Summary 80 References 81 5. Phase-Shifting Transformers 83 5.1 Introduction 83 5.2 Y/Z Phase-Shifting Transformers 83 5.3 Δ/Z Transformers 86 5.4 Harmonic Current Cancellation 89 5.5 Summary 92 Part Three Multilevel Voltage Source Converters 93 6. Two-Level Voltage Source Inverter 95 6.1 Introduction 95 6.2 Sinusoidal PWM 95 6.3 Space Vector Modulation 101 6.4 Summary 116 References 117 7. Cascaded H-Bridge Multilevel Inverters 119 7.1 Introduction 119 7.2 H-Bridge Inverter 120 7.3 Multilevel Inverter Topologies 124 7.4 Carrier-Based PWM Schemes 128 7.5 Staircase Modulation 138 7.6 Summary 140 References 140 8. Diode-Clamped Multilevel Inverters 143 8.1 Introduction 143 8.2 Three-Level Inverter 143 8.3 Space Vector Modulation 148 8.4 Neutral-Point Voltage Control 165 8.5 Carrier-Based PWM Scheme and Neutral-Point Voltage Control 167 8.6 Other Space Vector Modulation Algorithms 169 8.7 High-Level Diode-Clamped Inverters 170 8.8 NPC/H-Bridge Inverter 174 8.9 Summary 180 References 180 Appendix 182 9. Other Multilevel Voltage Source Inverters 185 9.1 Introduction 185 9.2 Multilevel Flying-Capacitor Inverter 185 9.3 Active Neutral-Point Clamped Inverter 188 9.4 Neutral-Point Piloted Inverter 197 9.5 Nested Neutral-Point Clamped Inverter 200 9.6 Modular Multilevel Converter 209 9.7 Summary 222 References 222 Part Four PWM Current Source Converters 225 10. PWM Current Source Inverters 227 10.1 Introduction 227 10.2 PWM Current Source Inverter 228 10.3 Space Vector Modulation 237 10.4 Parallel Current Source Inverters 247 10.5 Load-Commutated Inverter (LCI) 253 10.6 Summary 254 References 255 Appendix 256 11. PWM Current Source Rectifiers 257 11.1 Introduction 257 11.2 Single-Bridge Current Source Rectifier 257 11.3 Dual-Bridge Current Source Rectifier 265 11.4 Power Factor Control 269 11.5 Active Damping Control 275 11.6 Summary 283 References 284 Appendix 285 Part Five High-Power AC Drives 287 12. Voltage Source Inverter Fed Drives 289 12.1 Introduction 289 12.2 Two-Level VSI-Based MV Drives 289 12.3 Neutral Point Clamped (NPC) Inverter Fed Drives 293 12.4 Multilevel Cascaded H-Bridge (CHB) Inverter Fed Drives 298 12.5 NPC/H-Bridge Inverter Fed Drives 302 12.6 ANPC Inverter Fed Drive 303 12.7 MMC Inverter Fed Drive 305 12.8 10 KV-Class Drives with Multilevel Converters 306 12.9 Summary 307 References 307 13. Current Source Inverter Fed Drives 309 13.1 Introduction 309 13.2 CSI Drives with PWM Rectifiers 309 13.3 Transformerless CSI Drive for Standard AC Motors 315 13.4 CSI Drive with Multipulse SCR Rectifier 316 13.5 LCI Drives for Synchronous Motors 318 13.6 Summary 320 References 320 14. Control of Induction Motor Drives 321 14.1 Introduction 321 14.2 Reference Frame Transformation 322 14.3 Induction Motor Dynamic Models 325 14.4 Principle of Field Oriented Control (FOC) 332 14.5 Direct Field Oriented Control 335 14.6 Indirect Field Oriented Control 339 14.7 FOC for CSI Fed Drives 341 14.8 Direct Torque Control 344 14.9 Summary 351 References 351 15. Control of Synchronous Motor Drives 353 15.1 Introduction 353 15.2 Modeling of Synchronous Motor 353 15.3 VSC FED SM Drive with Zero d-Axis Current (ZDC) Control 360 15.4 VSC FED SM Drive with MTPA Control 367 15.5 VSC FED SM Drive with DTC Scheme 372 15.6 Control of CSC FED SM Drives 381 15.7 Summary 390 References 390 Appendix 391 Part Six Special Topics on MV Drives 393 16. Matrix Converter Fed MV Drives 395 16.1 Introduction 395 16.2 Classic Matrix Converter (MC) 396 16.3 Three-Module Matrix Converter 401 16.4 Multi-Module Cascaded Matrix Converter (CMC) 408 16.5 Multi-Module CMC Fed MV Drive 413 16.6 Summary 415 References 415 17. Transformerless MV Drives 417 17.1 Introduction 417 17.2 Common-Mode Voltage Issues and Conventional Solution 418 17.3 CM Voltage Reduction in Multilevel VSC 422 17.4 Transformerless Drives with Multilevel VSC 434 17.5 Transformerless CSI Fed Drives 440 17.6 Summary 444 References 445 Index 447

Read more less

Book SynopsisA thorough and complete examination of LTE networks, their operating principles and key insights to performance optimization.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xvi Preface xvii Part 1 LTE Basics and Optimization Overview 1 1 LTE Basement 3 1.1 LTE Principle 3 1.1.1 LTE Architecture 6 1.1.2 LTE Network Interfaces 7 1.2 LTE Services 11 1.2.1 Circuit]Switched Fallback 12 1.2.2 Voice over LTE 13 1.2.3 IMS Centralized Services 16 1.2.4 Over the Top Solutions 16 1.2.5 SMS Alternatives over LTE 17 1.2.6 Converged Communication 19 1.3 LTE Key Technology Overview 19 1.3.1 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 20 1.3.2 MIMO 21 1.3.3 Radio Resource Management 22 2 LTE Optimization Principle and Method 24 2.1 LTE Wireless Optimization Overview 24 2.1.1 Why LTE Wireless Optimization 24 2.1.2 Characters of LTE Optimization 24 2.1.3 LTE Joint Optimization with 2G/3G 25 2.1.4 Optimization Target 25 2.2 LTE Optimization Procedure 26 2.2.1 Optimization Procedure Overview 26 2.2.2 Collection of Mass Nerwork Measurement Data 28 2.2.3 Measurement Report Data Analysis 30 2.2.4 Signaling Data Analysis 31 2.2.5 UE Positioning 32 2.2.5.1 Timing Advance 33 2.2.5.2 Location Accuracy Evaluation 35 2.2.5.3 Location Support 36 2.2.5.4 3D Geolocation 37 2.2.6 Key Performance Indicators Optimization 42 2.2.7 Technology Evolution of Optimization 43 2.3 LTE Optimization Key Point 44 2.3.1 RF Optimization 44 2.3.1.1 RSRP/RSSI/SINR/CINR 44 2.3.1.2 External Interference 48 2.3.2 CQI versus RSRP and SINR 51 2.3.2.1 CQI Adjustment 51 2.3.2.2 SINR Versus Load 54 2.3.2.3 SINR Versus MCS 56 2.3.3 Channel Power Configuration 58 2.3.3.1 RE Power 58 2.3.3.2 CRS Power Boosting 64 2.3.3.3 Power Allocation Optimization 66 2.3.4 Link Adaption 67 2.3.5 Adaptive Modulation and Coding 69 2.3.6 Scheduler 70 2.3.6.1 Downlink Scheduler 72 2.3.6.2 Uplink Scheduler 74 2.3.7 Radio Frame 75 2.3.8 System Information and Timers 76 2.3.8.1 System Information 76 2.3.8.2 Timers 81 2.3.9 Random Access 83 2.3.10 Radio Admission Control 85 2.3.11 Paging Control 86 2.3.11.1 Paging 86 2.3.11.2 Paging Capacity 92 2.3.11.3 Paging Message Size 95 2.3.11.4 Smart Paging 95 2.3.11.5 Priority Paging 96 2.3.12 MIMO and Beamforming 97 2.3.12.1 Basic Multi]Antenna Techniques 100 2.3.12.2 2D]Beamforming 101 2.3.12.3 2D MIMO and Parameters 104 2.3.12.4 Massive]MIMO 105 2.3.13 Power Control 107 2.3.13.1 PUSCH/PUCCH Power Control 107 2.3.13.2 PRACH Power Control 109 2.3.14 Antenna Adjustment 111 2.3.14.1 Antenna Position 112 2.3.14.2 Remote Electrical Tilt 113 2.3.14.3 Antenna Azimuths and Tilts Optimization 117 2.3.14.4 VSWR Troubleshooting 118 2.3.15 Main Key Performance Indicators 120 Part 2 Main Principles of LTE Optimization 123 3 Coverage Optimization 125 3.1 Traffic Channel Coverage 125 3.1.1 Parameters of Coverage 126 3.1.2 Weak Coverage 128 3.1.2.1 DL Coverage Hole 128 3.1.2.2 UL Weak Coverage 128 3.1.2.3 UL and DL Imbalance 129 3.1.3 Overlapping Coverage 129 3.1.4 Overshooting 130 3.1.5 Tx1/Tx2 RSRP Imbalance 132 3.1.6 Extended Coverage 132 3.1.7 Cell Border Adjustment 135 3.1.8 Vertical Coverage 137 3.1.9 Parameters Impacting Coverage 138 3.2 Control Channel Coverage 138 4 Capacity Optimization 140 4.1 RS SINR 140 4.2 PDCCH Capacity 141 4.3 PUCCH Capacity 144 4.3.1 Factors Affecting PUCCH Capacity 145 4.3.2 PUCCH Dimensioning Example 151 4.4 Number of Scheduled UEs 152 4.5 Spectral Efficiency 153 4.6 DL Data Rate Optimization 154 4.6.1 Limitation Factor 156 4.6.2 Model of DL Data Throughput 157 4.6.3 UDP/TCP Protocol 158 4.6.4 MIMO 161 4.6.4.1 DL MIMO 161 4.6.4.2 4Tx/4Rx Performance 163 4.6.4.3 Transmission Mode Switch 163 4.6.4.4 UL MU]MIMO 164 4.6.5 DL PRB Allocation and Utilization Mechanism 165 4.6.6 DL BLER 167 4.6.7 Impact of UE Velocity 169 4.6.8 Single User Throughput Optimization 170 4.6.8.1 Radio Analysis – Assignable Bits 171 4.6.8.2 Radio Analysis – CFI and Scheduling 171 4.6.8.3 Radio Analysis – HARQ 171 4.6.9 Avarage Cell Throughput Optimization 172 4.6.10 Cell Edge Throughput Optimization 172 4.6.11 Some Issues of DL Throughput 173 4.6.11.1 Antenna Diversity not Balanced 173 4.6.11.2 DL Grant is not Enough 173 4.6.11.3 Unstable Rate 175 4.7 UL Data Rate Optimization 175 4.7.1 Model of UL Data Throughput 176 4.7.2 UL SINR and PUSCH Data Rate 176 4.7.3 PRB Stretching and Throughput 179 4.7.4 Single User Throughput Optimization 180 4.7.4.1 Radio Analysis – Available PRBs 181 4.7.4.2 Radio Analysis—Link Adaptation 181 4.7.4.3 Radio Analysis – PDCCH 182 4.7.5 Cell Avarage and Cell]edge Throughput Optimization 182 4.7.6 Some Issues of UL Throughput 183 4.8 Parameters Impacting Throughput 185 5 Internal Interference Optimization 188 5.1 Interference Concept 188 5.2 DL Interference 190 5.2.1 DL Interference Ratio 191 5.2.2 Balance Between SINR and RSRP 192 5.3 UL Interference 192 5.3.1 UL Interference Detection 194 5.3.2 Generation of UL Interference 196 5.3.2.1 Cell Loading Versus Inter]Cell Interference 196 5.3.2.2 Unreasonable UL Network Structure 197 5.3.2.3 Cross slot interference 199 5.3.3 PUSCH Tx Power Analysis 200 5.3.4 UL Effect of P0 and α 202 5.3.5 PRACH Power Control 204 5.3.6 SRS Power Control 206 5.3.7 Interference Rejection Combinin 209 5.4 Inter]Cell Interference Coordination 210 5.5 UL IoT Control 210 5.5.1 UL Interference Issues and Possible Solutions 210 5.5.2 UL IoT Control Mechanism 210 5.5.3 PUSCH UL_SINR Target Calculation 212 5.5.4 UL Interference Criteria 213 6 Drop Call Optimization 216 6.1 Drop Call Mechanism 216 6.1.1 Radio Link Failure Detection by UE 217 6.1.2 RadioLink Failure Detection by eNB 220 6.1.2.1 Link Monitors in eNB 220 6.1.2.2 Time Alignment Mechanism 221 6.1.2.3 Maximum RLC Retransmissions Exceeded 224 6.1.3 RadioLink Failure Optimization and Recovery 225 6.2 Reasons of Call Drop and Optimization 227 6.2.1 Reasons of E]RAB Drop 227 6.2.2 S1 Release 230 6.2.3 Retainability Optimization 233 6.3 RRC Connection Reestablishment 233 6.4 RRC Connection Supervision 239 7 Latency Optimization 244 7.1 User Plane Latency 244 7.2 Control Plane Latency 247 7.3 Random Access Latency Optimization 247 7.4 Attach Latency Optimization 248 7.5 Paging Latency Optimization 250 7.6 Parameters Impacting Latency 250 8 Mobility Optimization 254 8.1 Mobility Management 255 8.1.1 RRC Connection Management 256 8.1.2 Measurement and Handover Events 256 8.1.3 Handover Procedure 260 8.1.3.1 X2 Handover 261 8.1.3.2 S1 Handover 267 8.1.3.3 Key point of X2/S1 Handover 267 8.2 Mobility Parameter 269 8.2.1 Attach and Dettach 272 8.2.2 UE Measurement Criterion in Idle Mode and Cell Selection 273 8.2.3 Cell Priority 276 8.3 Intra]LTE Cell Reselection 276 8.3.1 Cell Reselection Procedure 278 8.3.2 Inter]Frequency Cell Reselection 279 8.3.3 Cell Reselection Parameters 282 8.3.4 Inter]Frequency Reselection Optimization 283 8.4 Intra]LTE Handover Optimization 285 8.4.1 A3 and A5 Handover 285 8.4.2 Data Forwarding 290 8.4.3 Intra]Frequency Handover Optimization 291 8.4.4 Inter]Frequency Handover Optimization 292 8.4.5 Timers for Handover Failures 296 8.5 Neighbor Cell Optimization 297 8.5.1 Intra]LTE Neighbor Cell Optimization 297 8.5.1.1 Neighbor Relations Table 297 8.5.1.2 ANR 298 8.5.2 Suitable Neighbors for Load Balancing 299 8.6 Measurement Gap 299 8.6.1 Measurement Gap Pattern 299 8.6.2 Measurement Gap Versus Period of CQI Report and DRX 304 8.6.3 Impact of Throughput on Measurement Gap 304 8.7 Indoor and Outdoor Mobility 305 8.8 Inter]RAT Mobility 306 8.8.1 Inter]RAT Mobility Architecture and Key Technology 307 8.8.2 LTE to G/U Strategy 309 8.8.3 Reselection Optimization 314 8.8.3.1 LTE to UTRAN 315 8.8.3.2 UTRAN to LTE 319 8.8.4 Redirection Optimization 320 8.8.4.1 LTE to UTRAN 320 8.8.4.2 UTRAN to LTE 322 8.8.5 PS Handover Optimization 322 8.8.5.1 LTE to UTRAN 322 8.8.5.2 UTRAN to LTE 324 8.8.6 Reselection and Redirection Latency 325 8.8.7 Optimization Case Study 326 8.9 Handover Interruption Time Optimization 326 8.9.1 Control Plane and User Plane Latency 329 8.9.2 Inter]RAT Mobility Latency 332 8.10 Handover Failure and Improvement 332 8.11 Mobility Robustness Optimization 335 8.12 Carrier Aggregation Mobility Optimization 341 8.13 FDD]TDD Inter]mode Mobility Optimization 345 8.14 Load Balance 346 8.14.1 Inter]Frequency Load Balance 346 8.14.2 Inter]RAT Load Balance 348 8.14.3 Load Based Idle Mode Mobility 349 8.15 High]Speed Mobile Optimization 351 8.15.1 High]Speed Mobile Feature 353 8.15.2 Speed]Dependent Cell Reselection 354 8.15.3 PRACH Issues 356 8.15.4 Solution for Air to Ground 358 9 Traffic Model of Smartphone and Optimization 360 9.1 Traffic Model of Smartphone 360 9.1.1 QoS Mechanism 362 9.1.2 Rate Shaping and Traffic Management 366 9.1.3 Traffic Model 371 9.2 Smartphone]Based Optimization 372 9.3 High]Traffic Scenario Optimization 372 9.3.1 Resource Configuration 374 9.3.2 Capacity Monitoring 375 9.3.3 Special Features and Parameters for High Traffic 377 9.3.4 UL Noise Rise 379 9.3.5 Offload Solution and Parameter Settings 379 Part III Voice Optimization of LTE 383 10 Circuit Switched Fallback Optimization 385 10.1 Voice Evolution 385 10.2 CSFB Network Architecture and Configuration 386 10.2.1 CSFB Architecture 386 10.2.2 Combined Register 387 10.2.3 CSFB Call Procedure 392 10.2.3.1 Fallback Options 392 10.2.3.2 RRC Release with Redirection 393 10.2.3.3 CSFB Call Procedure 395 10.2.4 Mismatch Between TA and LA 397 10.3 CSFB Performance Optimization 402 10.3.1 CSFB Optimization 402 10.3.1.1 Main Issues of CSFB 402 10.3.1.2 CSFB Optimization Method 403 10.3.2 CSFB Main KPI 407 10.3.3 Fallback RAT Frequency Configuration Optimization 409 10.3.4 Call Setup Time Latency Optimization 411 10.3.4.1 ESR to Redirection Optimization 416 10.3.4.2 Twice Paging 416 10.3.5 Data Interruption Time 418 10.3.6 Return to LTE After Call Complete 419 10.4 Short Message Over CSFB 422 10.5 Case Study of CSFB Optimization 423 10.5.1 Combined TA/LA Updating Issue 423 10.5.2 MTRF Issue 425 10.5.3 Track Area Update Reject After CSFB 425 10.5.3.1 No EPS Bearer Context Issue 428 10.5.3.2 Implicitly Detach Issue 428 10.5.3.3 MS Identity Issue 428 10.5.4 Pseudo Base Station 428 11 VoLTE Optimization 434 11.1 VoLTE Architecture and Protocol Stack 435 11.1.1 VoLTE Architecture 435 11.1.2 VoLTE Protocol Stack 435 11.1.3 VoLTE Technical Summary 438 11.1.4 VoLTE Capability in UE 439 11.2 VoIP/Video QoS and Features 442 11.2.1 VoIP/Video QoS 442 11.2.2 Voice Codec 444 11.2.3 Video Codec 446 11.2.4 Radio Bearer for VoLTE 449 11.2.5 RLC UM 454 11.2.6 Call Procedure 457 11.2.6.1 LTE Attach and IMS Register 458 11.2.6.2 E2E IMS Flow 458 11.2.6.3 Video Phone Session Handling 462 11.2.7 Multiple Bearers Setup and Release 466 11.2.8 VoLTE Call On]Hold/Call Waiting 467 11.2.9 Differentiated Paging Priority 468 11.2.10 Robust Header Compression 470 11.2.10.1 RoHC Feature 470 11.2.10.2 Gain by RoHC 470 11.2.11 Inter]eNB Uplink CoMP for VoLTE 475 11.3 Semi] Persistent Scheduling and Other Scheduling Methods 477 11.3.1 SPS Scheduling 477 11.3.2 SPS Link Adaptation 478 11.3.3 Delay Based Scheduling 481 11.3.4 Pre]scheduling 482 11.4 PRB and MCS Selection Mechanism 484 11.4.1 Optimized Segmentation 484 11.4.2 PRB and MCS Selection 485 11.5 VoLTE Capacity 486 11.5.1 Control Channel for VoLTE 487 11.5.2 Performance of Mixed VoIP and Data 488 11.6 VoLTE Coverage 491 11.6.1 VoIP Payload and RoHC 492 11.6.2 RLC Segmentation 492 11.6.3 TTI Bundling 498 11.6.4 TTI Bundling Optimization 502 11.6.5 Coverage Gain with RLC Segmentation and TTI Bundling 507 11.6.6 MCS/TBS/PRB Selection 509 11.6.7 Link Budget 510 11.7 VoLTE Delay 513 11.7.1 Call Setup Delay 516 11.7.1.1 Call Setup Time 516 11.7.1.2 Reasons for Long Call Setup Time 516 11.7.2 Conversation Start Delay 519 11.7.3 RTP Delay 521 11.7.4 Handover Delay and Optimization 525 11.8 Intra]LTE Handover and eSRVCC 527 11.8.1 Intra]Frequency Handover 527 11.8.2 Inter]Frequency Handover 528 11.8.3 Single Radio Voice Call Continuity Procedure 529 11.8.4 SRVCC Parameters Optimization 539 11.8.4.1 Handover Parameters 539 11.8.4.2 SRVCC–Related Timer 539 11.8.5 aSRVCC and bSRVCC 543 11.8.6 SRVCC Failure 543 11.8.7 Reducing SRVCC Voice Gap and eSRVCC 545 11.8.7.1 Voice Interruption Time during SRVCC 545 11.8.7.2 eSRVCC 549 11.8.8 Fast Return to LTE 552 11.8.9 Roaming Behavior According to Network Capabilities 555 11.9 Network Quality and Subjective Speech Quality 555 11.9.1 Bearer Latency 558 11.9.2 MoS 561 11.9.2.1 Voice Quality 561 11.9.2.2 Video Quality 570 11.9.3 Jitter 571 11.9.4 Packet Loss 572 11.9.5 One Way Audio 575 11.9.6 PDCP Discard Timer Operation 576 11.10 Optimization 577 11.10.1 Distribution of Main Indicators of Field Test 580 11.10.2 Compression Ratio and GBR Throughput 584 11.10.3 RB Utilization 584 11.10.4 BLER Issue 587 11.10.5 Quality Due to Handover 589 11.10.6 eSRVCC Handover Issues 589 11.10.7 Packet Loss 592 11.10.7.1 Packet Loss due to Poor RF 592 11.10.7.2 Packet Loss due to Massive users 592 11.10.7.3 Packet Loss Due to Insufficient UL grant 592 11.10.7.4 Packet Loss due to Handover 601 11.10.7.5 Packet Loss Due to Network Issue 601 11.10.8 Call Setup Issues 601 11.10.8.1 Missed Pages 602 11.10.8.2 IMS Issues 604 11.10.8.3 Dedicated Bearer Setup Issues 609 11.10.8.4 CSFB Call Issues 612 11.10.8.5 aSRVCC Failure 612 11.10.8.6 RF Issues 612 11.10.8.7 Frequent TFT Updates 617 11.10.8.8 Encryption Issue 618 11.10.9 Call Drop 619 11.10.9.1 Call Drop 619 11.10.9.2 Radio Link Failure 622 11.10.9.3 RTP]RTCP Timeout 624 11.10.9.4 RLC/PDCP SN Length Mismatch 626 11.10.9.5 IMS Session Drop 626 11.10.9.6 eNB/MME Initiated Drop 632 11.10.10 Packet Aggregation Level 632 11.10.11 VoIP Padding 633 11.10.12 VoIP Ralated Parameters 635 11.10.13 Video]Related Optimization 635 11.10.13.1 Video Bit Rate and Frame Rate 637 11.10.13.2 Video MoS and Audio/Video Sync 637 11.10.14 IMS Ralated Timer 637 11.11 UE Battery Consumption Optimization for VoLTE 638 11.11.1 Connected Mode DRX Parameter 643 11.11.2 DRX Optimization 644 11.11.2.1 State Estimation 644 11.11.2.2 DRX Optimization and Parameters 644 11.11.2.3 KPI Impacts with DRX 648 11.11.3 Scheduling Request Periodicity and Disabling of Aperiodic CQI 652 11.12 Comparation with VoLTE and OTT 654 11.12.1 OTT VoIP User Experience 654 11.12.2 OTT VoIP Codec 657 11.12.3 Signaling Load of OTT VoIP 658 Part IV Advanced Optimization of LTE 663 12 PRACH Optimization 665 12.1 Overview 665 12.2 PRACH Configuration Index 669 12.3 RACH Root Sequence 673 12.4 PRACH Cyclic Shift 674 12.4.1 PRACH Cyclic Shift Optimization 674 12.4.2 Rrestricted Set 679 12.5 Prach Frequency Offset 682 12.6 Preamble Collision Probability 683 12.7 Preamble Power 684 12.8 Random Access Issues 687 12.9 RACH Message Optimization 689 12.10 Accessibility Optimization 692 12.10.1 Reasons for Poor Accessibility 692 12.10.2 Accessibility 693 12.10.3 Accessibility Analysis Tree 695 12.10.4 Call and Data Session Setup Optimization 697 12.10.5 RACH Estimation for Different Traffic Profile 698 13 Physical Cell ID Optimization 702 13.1 Overview 702 13.2 PCI Optimization Methodology 703 13.2.1 PCI Group Optimization 705 13.2.2 PCI Code Reuse Distance 705 13.2.3 Mod3/30 Discrepancy Analysis 708 13.2.4 Collision and Confusion 708 13.3 PCI Optimization 709 14 Tracking Areas Optimization 711 14.1 TA Optimization 712 14.1.1 TA Update Procedure 713 14.1.2 TA Optimization and TAU Failure 715 14.2 TA List Optimization 716 14.3 TAU Reject Analysis and Optimization 719 15 Uplink Signal Optimization 721 15.1 Uplink Reference Signal Optimization 721 15.1.1 Coding Scheme of UL RS 722 15.1.2 Correlation of UL Sequence Group 723 15.1.2.1 UL Sequence Group Hopping 725 15.1.2.2 UL Sequence Hopping 726 15.1.2.3 UL Cyclic Shift Hopping 726 15.1.3 UL Sequence Group Optimization 727 15.2 Uplink Sounding Signal Optimization 729 15.2.1 SRS Characters 730 15.2.2 Wideband SRS Coverage 736 15.2.3 Dynamic SRS Adjustment Scheme 736 15.2.4 SRS Selection Dimension and Confliction 737 15.2.5 SRS Conflict and Optimization 739 16 HetNet Optimization 741 16.1 UE Geolocation and Identification of Traffic Hot Spots 741 16.2 Wave Propagation Characteristics for HetNet 745 16.3 New Features in HetNet 746 16.4 Combined Cell Optimization 747 16.5 Cell Range Expansion Offset 748 16.6 HetNet Cell Reselection and Handover Optimization 751 17 QoE Evaluation and Optimization Strategy 752 17.1 QoE Modeling 753 17.2 Data Collecting and Processing 756 17.3 QoE]Based Traffic Evaluation 757 17.3.1 Online Video QoE 757 17.3.1.1 Video Quality Monitoring Methods 761 17.3.1.2 RATE Adaptive Video Codecs 763 17.3.1.3 Streaming KPI and QoE 764 17.3.1.4 Video Optimization 766 17.3.2 Voice QoE 769 17.3.3 Data Service QoE 770 17.3.3.1 Web browsing 770 17.3.3.2 Online Gaming 774 17.4 QoE Based Optimization 776 18 Signaling]Based Optimization 780 18.1 S1] AP Signaling 780 18.1.1 NAS signaling 782 18.1.2 Inactivity Supervision 783 18.1.3 UE signaling Management 785 18.2 Signaling radio bearers 786 18.3 Signaling Storm 788 18.4 Signaling Troubleshooting Method 788 18.4.1 Attach Failure 788 18.4.2 Service Request Failure 796 18.4.3 S1/X2]Based Handover 796 18.4.4 eSRVCC Failure 798 18.4.5 CSFB Failure 800 Appendix 802 Glossary of Acronyms 820 References 823 Index 825

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn extensive introduction to the engineering and manufacture of current and next-generation flat panel displays This book provides a broad overview of the manufacturing of flat panel displays, with a particular emphasis on the display systems at the forefront of the current mobile device revolution. It is structured to cover a broad spectrum of topics within the unifying theme of display systems manufacturing. An important theme of this book is treating displays as systems, which expands the scope beyond the technologies and manufacturing of traditional display panels (LCD and OLED) to also include key components for mobile device applications, such as flexible OLED, thin LCD backlights, as well as the manufacturing of display module assemblies. Flat Panel Display Manufacturing fills an important gap in the current book literature describing the state of the art in display manufacturing for today's displays, and looks to create a reference the development of next generation displaysTrade Review"If there is only one book on flat panel displays that is going to be on your bookshelf, then I would highly recommend this one. It will be a text that you refer to time and again for clear and concise explanations of how LCD and OLED displays are constructed and the processes used to make them into commercially successful products. As you use it, you will find yourself drawn in by the clear and colorful illustrations and will find it hard to not read more than you first intended." Aris Silzars Ph.D., Member of the Board of Advisors, NanoLumens, Inc. and Past President of SID, USATable of ContentsList of Contributors xxi Series Editor’s Foreword xxv Preface xxvii 1 Introduction 1Fang‐Chen Luo, Jun Souk, Shinji Morozumi, and Ion Bita 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Historic Review of TFT‐LCD Manufacturing Technology Progress 1 1.2.1 Early Stage TFT and TFT‐Based Displays 2 1.2.2 The 1990s: Initiation of TFT‐LCD Manufacturing and Incubation of TFT‐LCD Products 2 1.2.3 Late 1990s: Booming of LCD Desktop Monitor and Wide Viewing Angle Technologies 4 1.2.4 The 2000s: A Golden Time for LCD‐TV Manufacturing Technology Advances 4 1.3 Analyzing the Success Factors in LCD Manufacturing 5 1.3.1 Scaling the LCD Substrate Size 7 1.3.2 Major Milestones in TFT‐LCD Manufacturing Technology 9 1.3.2.1 First Revolution: AKT Cluster PECVD Tool in 1993 9 1.3.2.2 Second Revolution: Wide Viewing Angle Technology in 1997 9 1.3.2.3 Third Revolution: LC Drop Filling Technology in 2003 10 1.3.3 Major Stepping Stones Leading to the Success of Active Matrix Displays 10 References 11 2 TFT Array Process Architecture and Manufacturing Process Flow 13Chiwoo Kim 2.1 Introduction 13 2.2 Material Properties and TFT Characteristics of a‐Si, LTPS, and Metal Oxide TFTs 15 2.2.1 a‐Si TFT 15 2.2.2 LTPS TFT 16 2.2.2.1 Excimer Laser Annealing (ELA) 17 2.2.3 Amorphous Oxide Semiconductor TFTs 22 2.3 a‐Si TFT Array Process Architecture and Process Flow 22 2.3.1 Four‐Mask Count Process Architecture for TFT‐LCDs 24 2.4 Poly‐Si TFT Architecture and Fabrication 27 2.5 Oxide Semiconductor TFT Architecture and Fabrication 30 2.6 TFT LCD Applications 32 2.7 Development of SLS‐Based System on Glass Display [1, 11, 14, 15] 33 References 35 3 Color Filter Architecture, Materials, and Process Flow 39Young Seok Choi, Musun Kwak, and Youn Sung Na 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Structure and Role of the Color Filter 39 3.2.1 Red, Green, and Blue (RGB) Layer 40 3.2.1.1 Color Coordinate and Color Gamut 41 3.2.2 Black Matrix 44 3.2.3 Overcoat and Transparent Electrode 45 3.2.4 Column Spacer 46 3.3 Color Filter Manufacturing Process Flow 46 3.3.1 Unit Process 46 3.3.1.1 Formation of Black Matrix 46 3.3.1.2 Formation of RGB Layer 48 3.3.1.3 Overcoat (OC) 51 3.3.1.4 Formation of ITO Electrodes 53 3.3.1.5 Column Spacer (Pattern Spacer) 53 3.3.2 Process Flow for Different LC Mode 54 3.3.2.1 Color Filter for the TN Mode 54 3.3.2.2 Color Filter for the IPS Mode 54 3.3.2.3 Color Filter for the VA Mode 55 3.4 New Color Filter Design 55 3.4.1 White Color (Four Primary Colors) Technology 55 3.4.2 Color Filter on TFT 56 References 57 4 Liquid Crystal Cell Process 59Heung‐Shik Park and Ki‐Chul Shin 4.1 Introduction 59 4.2 Liquid Crystal Cell Process 59 4.2.1 Alignment Layer Treatment 61 4.2.2 Process of Applying PI Layers 62 4.2.3 Rubbing Process 63 4.2.4 Photo‐Alignment Process 64 4.2.5 LC Filling Process 65 4.2.5.1 Vacuum Filling Method 66 4.2.5.2 End Seal Process 66 4.2.5.3 One Drop Filling (ODF) Method 67 4.2.6 Vacuum Assembly Process 68 4.2.7 Polarizer Attachment Process 69 4.3 Conclusions 70 Acknowledgments 70 References 70 5 TFT‐LCD Module and Package Process 73Chun Chang Hung 5.1 Introduction 73 5.2 Driver IC Bonding: TAB and COG 73 5.3 Introduction to Large‐Panel JI Process 74 5.3.1 COF Bonding 75 5.3.1.1 Edge Clean 75 5.3.1.2 ACF Attachment 76 5.3.1.3 COF Pre‐Bonding 77 5.3.1.4 COF Main Bonding 78 5.3.1.5 Lead Check 78 5.3.1.6 Silicone Dispensing 78 5.3.2 PCB Bonding 79 5.3.3 PCB Test 79 5.3.4 Press Heads: Long Bar or Short Bar 79 5.4 Introduction to Small‐Panel JI Process 79 5.4.1 Beveling 80 5.4.2 Panel Cleaning 80 5.4.3 Polarizer Attachment 80 5.4.4 Chip on Glass (COG) Bonding 81 5.4.5 FPC on Glass (FOG) Bonding 81 5.4.6 Optical Microscope (OM) Inspection 81 5.4.7 UV Glue Dispense 82 5.4.8 Post Bonding Inspection (PBI) 82 5.4.9 Protection Glue Dispensing 82 5.5 LCD Module Assembly 83 5.6 Aging 84 5.7 Module in Backlight or Backlight in Module 85 References 86 6 LCD Backlights 87Insun Hwang and Jae‐Hyeon Ko 6.1 Introduction 87 6.2 LED Sources 90 6.2.1 GaN Epi‐Wafer on Sapphire 92 6.2.2 LED Chip 93 6.2.3 Light Extraction 94 6.2.4 LED Package 96 6.2.5 SMT on FPCB 97 6.3 Light Guide Plate 98 6.3.1 Optical Principles of LGP 98 6.3.2 Optical Pattern Design 99 6.3.3 Manufacturing of LGP 101 6.3.3.1 Injection Molding 101 6.3.3.2 Screen Printing 102 6.3.3.3 Other Methods 103 6.4 Optical Films 104 6.4.1 Diffuser 106 6.4.2 Prism Film 107 6.4.3 Reflector 108 6.4.4 Other Films 108 6.5 Direct‐Type BLU 111 6.6 Summary 111 References 112 7 TFT Backplane and Issues for OLED 115Chiwoo Kim 7.1 Introduction 115 7.2 LTPS TFT Backplane for OLED Films 116 7.2.1 Advanced Excimer Laser Annealing (AELA) for Large‐Sized AMOLED Displays 117 7.2.2 Line‐Scan Sequential Lateral Solidification Process for AMOLED Application 120 7.3 Oxide Semiconductor TFT for OLED 122 7.3.1 Oxide TFT–Based OLED for Large‐Sized TVs 123 7.4 Best Backplane Solution for AMOLED 125 References 127 8A OLED Manufacturing Process for Mobile Application 129Jang Hyuk Kwon and Raju Lampande 8A.1 Introduction 129 8A.2 Current Status of AMOLED for Mobile Display 130 8A.2.1 Top Emission Technology 130 8A.3 Fine Metal Mask Technology (Shadow Mask Technology) 133 8A.4 Encapsulation Techniques for OLEDs 135 8A.4.1 Frit Sealing 135 8A.4.2 Thin‐Film Encapsulation 136 8A.5 Flexible OLED technology 137 8A.6 AMOLED Manufacturing Process 137 8A.7 Summary 140 References 140 8B OLED Manufacturing Process for TV Application 143Chang Wook Han and Yoon Heung Tak 8B.1 Introduction 143 8B.2 Fine Metal Mask (FMM) 144 8B.3 Manufacturing Process for White OLED and Color Filter Methods 147 8B.3.1 One‐Stacked White OLED Device 149 8B.3.2 Two‐Stacked White OLED Device 152 8B.3.3 Three‐Stacked White‐OLED Device 155 References 157 9 OLED Encapsulation Technology 159Young‐Hoon Shin 9.1 Introduction 159 9.2 Principles of OLED Encapsulation 159 9.2.1 Effect of H2O 160 9.3 Classification of Encapsulation Technologies 162 9.3.1 Edge Seal 163 9.3.2 Frit Seal 164 9.3.3 Dam and Fill 166 9.3.4 Face Seal 167 9.3.5 Thin‐Film Encapsulation (TFE) 168 9.4 Summary 170 References 170 10 Flexible OLED Manufacturing 173Woojae Lee and Jun Souk 10.1 Introduction 173 10.2 Critical Technologies in Flexible OLED Display 174 10.2.1 High‐Temperature PI Film 175 10.2.2 Encapsulation Layer 176 10.2.2.1 Thin‐Film Encapsulation (TFE) Method 176 10.2.2.2 Hyrid Encapsulation Method 177 10.2.2.3 Other Encapsulation Methods 178 10.2.2.4 Measurement of Barrier Performance 179 10.2.3 Laser Lift‐Off 180 10.2.4 Touch Sensor on F‐OLED 181 10.3 Process Flow of F‐OLED 181 10.3.1 PI Film Coating and Curing 181 10.3.2 LTPS TFT Backplane Process 183 10.3.3 OLED Deposition Process 183 10.3.4 Thin‐Film Encapsulation 185 10.3.5 Laser Lift‐Off 185 10.3.6 Lamination of Backing Plastic Film and Cut to Cell Size 185 10.3.7 Touch Sensor Attach 186 10.3.8 Circular Polarizer Attach 186 10.3.9 Module Assembly (Bonding Drive IC) 186 10.4 Foldable OLED 186 10.5 Summary 188 References 189 11A Metal Lines and ITO PVD 193Hyun Eok Shin, Chang Oh Jeong, and Junho Song 11A.1 Introduction 193 11A.1.1 Basic Requirements of Metallization for Display 193 11A.1.2 Thin‐Film Deposition by Sputtering 195 11A.2 Metal Line Evolution in Past Years of TFT‐LCD 198 11A.2.1 Gate Line Metals 199 11A.2.1.1 Al and Al Alloy Electrode 199 11A.2.1.2 Cu Electrode 201 11A.2.2 Data line (Source/Drain) Metals 202 11A.2.2.1 Data Al Metal 202 11A.2.2.2 Data Cu Metal 203 11A.2.2.3 Data Chromium (Cr) Metal 203 11A.2.2.4 Molybdenum (Mo) Metal 203 11A.2.2.5 Titanium (Ti) Metal 204 11A.3 Metallization for OLED Display 205 11A.3.1 Gate Line Metals 205 11A.3.2 Source/Drain Metals 205 11A.3.3 Pixel Anode 206 11A.4 Transparent Electrode 207 References 208 11B Thin‐Film PVD: Materials, Processes, and Equipment 209Tetsuhiro Ohno 11B.1 Introduction 209 11B.2 Sputtering Method 210 11B.3 Evolution of Sputtering Equipment for FPD Devices 212 11B.3.1 Cluster Tool for Gen 2 Size 212 11B.3.2 Cluster Tool for Gen 4.5 to Gen 7 Size 213 11B.3.3 Vertical Cluster Tool for Gen 8 Size 213 11B.4 Evolution of Sputtering Cathode 215 11B.4.1 Cathode Structure Evolution 215 11B.4.2 Dynamic Multi Cathode for LTPS 217 11B.4.3 Cathode Selection Strategy 217 11B.5 Transparent Oxide Semiconductor (TOS) Thin‐Film Deposition Technology 218 11B.5.1 Deposition Equipment for TOS‐TFT 218 11B.5.2 New Cathode Structure for TOS‐TFT 219 11B.6 Metallization Materials and Deposition Technology 221 References 223 11C Thin‐Film PVD (Rotary Target) 225 Marcus Bender 11C. 1 Introduction 225 11C.2 Source Technology 227 11C.2.1 Planar Cathodes 227 11C.2.2 Rotary Cathodes 229 11C.2.3 Rotary Cathode Array 230 11C.3 Materials, Processes, and Characterization 232 11C.3.1 Introduction 232 11C.3.2 Backplane Metallization 232 11C.3.3 Layers for Metal‐Oxide TFTs 234 11C.3.4 Transparent Electrodes 236 11C.3.5 Adding Touch Functionality and Improving End‐User Experience 238 References 239 12A Thin‐Film PECVD (AKT) 241Tae Kyung Won, Soo Young Choi, and John M. White 12A.1 Introduction 241 12A.2 Process Chamber Technology 243 12A.2.1 Electrode Design 243 12A.2.1.1 Hollow Cathode Effect and Hollow Cathode Gradient 243 12A.2.1.2 Gas Flow Control 245 12A.2.1.3 Susceptor 245 12A.2.2 Chamber Cleaning 246 12A.3 Thin‐Film Material, Process, and Characterization 248 12A.3.1 Amorphous Si (a‐Si) TFT 248 12A.3.1.1 Silicon Nitride (SiN) 248 12A.3.1.2 Amorphous Silicon (a‐Si) 253 12A.3.1.3 Phosphorus‐Doped Amorphous Silicon (n+ a‐Si) 257 12A.3.2 Low‐Temperature Poly Silicon (LTPS) TFT 258 12A.3.2.1 Silicon Oxide (SiO) 259 12A.3.2.2 a‐Si Precursor Film (Dehydrogenation) 260 12A.3.3 Metal‐Oxide (MO) TFT 263 12A.3.3.1 Silicon Oxide (SiO) 265 12A.3.4 Thin‐Film Encapsulation (TFE) 269 12A.3.4.1 Barrier Layer (Silicon Nitride) 269 12A.3.4.2 Buffer Layer 271 References 271 12B Thin‐Film PECVD (Ulvac) 273Masashi Kikuchi 12B.1 Introduction 273 12B.2 Plasma of PECVD 273 12B.3 Plasma Modes and Reactor Configuration 273 12B.3.1 CCP‐Type Reactor 274 12B.3.2 Microwave‐Type Reactor 274 12B.3.3 ICP‐Type Reactor 275 12B.4 PECVD Process for Display 276 12B.4.1 a‐Si Film for a‐Si TFT 276 12B.4.2 a‐Si Film for LTPS 277 12B.4.3 SiNx Film 278 12B.4.4 TEOS SiO2 Film 279 12B.5 PECVD System Overview 279 12B.6 Remote Plasma Cleaning 279 12B.6.1 Gas Flow Style of Remote Plasma Cleaning 281 12B.6.2 Cleaning and Corrosion 281 12B.7 Passivation Layer for OLED 282 12B.7.1 Passivation by Single/Double/Multi‐Layer 282 12B.8 PECVD Deposition for IGZO TFT 283 12B.8.1 Gate Insulator for IGZO TFT 283 12B.8.2 Passivation Film for IGZO TFT 284 12B.9 Particle Generation 284 References 286 13 Photolithography 287Yasunori Nishimura, Kozo Yano, Masataka Itoh, and Masahiro Ito 13.1 Introduction 287 13.2 Photolithography Process Overview 288 13.2.1 Cleaning 289 13.2.2 Preparation 289 13.2.3 Photoresist Coating 289 13.2.4 Exposure 289 13.2.5 Development 289 13.2.6 Etching 289 13.2.7 Resist Removal 289 13.3 Photoresist Coating 290 13.3.1 Evolution of Photoresist Coating 290 13.3.2 Slit Coating 290 13.3.2.1 Principles of Slit Coating 290 13.3.2.2 Slit‐Coating System 291 13.4 Exposure 292 13.4.1 Photoresist and Exposure 292 13.4.1.1 Photoresist 292 13.4.1.2 Color Resist 292 13.4.1.3 UV Light Source for Exposure 292 13.4.2 General Aspects of Exposure Systems 292 13.4.3 Stepper 293 13.4.4 Projection Scanning Exposure System 294 13.4.5 Mirror Projection Scan System (Canon) 296 13.4.6 Multi‐Lens Projection System (Nikon) 296 13.4.6.1 Multi‐Lens Optics 296 13.4.6.2 Multi‐Lens Projection System 296 13.4.7 Proximity Exposure 297 13.5 Photoresist Development 300 13.6 Inline Photolithography Processing Equipment 301 13.7 Photoresist Stripping 302 13.8 Photolithography for Color Filters 303 13.8.1 Color Filter Structures 303 13.8.1.1 TN 304 13.8.1.2 VA 304 13.8.1.3 IPS 304 13.8.2 Materials for Color Filters 305 13.8.2.1 Black Matrix Materials 305 13.8.2.2 RGB Color Materials 305 13.8.2.3 PS (Photo Spacer) Materials 306 13.8.3 Photolithography Process for Color Filters 307 13.8.3.1 Color Resist Coating 307 13.8.3.2 Exposure 307 13.8.3.3 Development 308 13.8.4 Higher‐Performance Color Filters 309 13.8.4.1 Mobile Applications 309 13.8.4.2 TV Applications 309 References 310 14A Wet Etching Processes and Equipment 311Kazuo Jodai 14A.1 Introduction 311 14A.2 Overview of TFT Process 312 14A.3 Applications and Equipment of Wet Etching 313 14A.3.1 Applications 313 14A.3.2 Equipment (Outline) 313 14A.3.3 Substrate Transferring System 315 14A.3.4 Dip Etching System 316 14A.3.5 Cascade Rinse System 316 14A.4 Problems Due to Increased Mother Glass Size and Solutions 317 14A.4.1 Etchant Concentration Management 317 14A.4.2 Quick Rinse 317 14A.4.3 Other Issues 318 14A.5 Conclusion 318 References 318 14B Dry Etching Processes and Equipment 319Ippei Horikoshi 14B.1 Introduction 319 14B.2 Principle of Dry Etching 319 14B.2.1 Plasma 320 14B.2.2 Ions 321 14B.2.3 Radicals 321 14B.3 Architecture for Dry Etching Equipment 322 14B.4 Dry Etching Modes 323 14B.4.1 Conventional Etching Mode and Each Characteristic 324 14B.4.2 Current Etching Mode and Each Characteristic 325 14B.5 TFT Process 325 14B.5.1 a‐Si Process 325 14B.5.2 LTPS Process 326 14B.5.3 Oxide Process 327 References 328 15 TFT Array: Inspection, Testing, and Repair 329Shulik Leshem, Noam Cohen, Savier Pham, Mike Lim, and Amir Peled 15.1 Defect Theory 329 15.1.1 Typical Production Defects 329 15.1.1.1 Pattern Defects 329 15.1.1.2 Foreign Particles 331 15.1.2 Understanding the Nature of Defects 332 15.1.2.1 Critical and Non‐Critical Defects 332 15.1.2.2 Electrical and Non‐Electrical Defects 333 15.1.3 Effect of Defects on Final FPD Devices and Yields 333 15.2 AOI (Automated Optical Inspection) 334 15.2.1 The Need 334 15.2.2 AOI Tasks, Functions, and Sequences 335 15.2.2.1 Image Acquisition 335 15.2.2.2 Defect Detection 336 15.2.2.3 Defect Classification 336 15.2.2.4 Review Image Grabbing 337 15.2.2.5 Defect Reporting and Judgment 337 15.2.3 AOI Optical Concept 337 15.2.3.1 Image Quality Criteria 338 15.2.3.2 Scan Cameras 339 15.2.3.2.1 Camera Type 339 15.2.3.2.2 Resolution Changer 339 15.2.3.2.3 Backside Inspection 339 15.2.3.3 Scan Illumination 339 15.2.3.3.1 Types of Illumination 339 15.2.3.4 Video Grabbing for Defect Review and Metrology 340 15.2.3.4.1 Review/Metrology Cameras 340 15.2.3.4.2 On‐the‐Fly Video Grabbing 340 15.2.3.4.3 Alternative to Video Images 340 15.2.4 AOI Defect Detection Principles 341 15.2.4.1 Gray Level Concept 342 15.2.4.2 Comparison of Gray Level Values Between Neighboring Cells 342 15.2.4.3 Detection Sensitivity 342 15.2.4.4 Detection Selectivity 344 15.2.5 AOI Special Features 344 15.2.5.1 Detection of Special Defect Types 344 15.2.5.2 Inspection of In‐Cell Touch Panels 345 15.2.5.3 Peripheral Area Inspection 346 15.2.5.4 Mura Defects 346 15.2.5.5 Cell Process Inspection 347 15.2.5.6 Defect Classification 347 15.2.5.7 Metrology: CD/O Measurement 349 15.2.5.8 Automatic Judgment 350 15.2.6 Offline Versus Inline AOI 350 15.2.7 AOI Usage, Application and Trends 351 15.3 Electrical Testing 352 15.3.1 The Need 352 15.3.2 Array Tester Tasks, Functions, and Sequences 353 15.3.2.1 Panel Signal Driving 353 15.3.2.1.1 Shorting Bar Probing Method 354 15.3.2.1.2 Full Contact Probing Method 354 15.3.2.2 Contact or Non‐Contact Sensing 354 15.3.2.2.1 Contact Sensing 355 15.3.2.2.2 Non‐Contact Sensing Methods 355 15.3.2.3 Panel Image Processing and Defect Detection 355 15.3.2.4 Post‐Defect Detection Processes 355 15.3.3 Array Tester System Design Concept 356 15.3.3.1 Signal Driving Probing 357 15.3.3.2 Ultra‐High‐Resolution Testing 357 15.3.3.3 System TACT 358 15.3.3.4 “High‐Channel” Testing 358 15.3.3.5 Advanced Process Technology Testing (AMOLED, FLEX OLED) 358 15.3.4 Array Tester Special Features 359 15.3.4.1 GOA, ASG, and IGD Testing 359 15.3.4.2 Electro Mura Monitoring 359 15.3.4.3 Free‐Form Panel Testing 361 15.3.5 Array Tester Usage, Application, and Trends 361 15.3.5.1 Source Drain Layer Testing for LTPS LCD/OLED 362 15.3.5.2 New Probing Concept 363 15.3.5.3 In‐Cell Touch Panel Testing 363 15.4 Defect Repair 363 15.4.1 The Need 363 15.4.2 Repair System in the Production Process 364 15.4.2.1 In‐Process Repair 364 15.4.2.2 Final Repair 364 15.4.3 Repair Sequence 364 15.4.4 Short‐Circuit Repair Method 365 15.4.4.1 Laser Ablation Concept 365 15.4.4.1.1 Thermal Ablation 366 15.4.4.1.2 Cold Ablation 366 15.4.4.1.3 Photochemical Ablation 366 15.4.4.2 Laser Light Wavelengths and their Typical Applications 366 15.4.4.2.1 Laser Matter Interaction 366 15.4.4.2.2 Using DUV Laser Light (266 nm) for Short‐Circuit Defect Repair 367 15.4.4.2.3 Using Infrared Laser Light (1,064 nm) for Short‐Circuit Defect Repair 367 15.4.4.3.4 Using Green Laser Light (532 nm) for Short‐Circuit Defect Repair 367 15.4.4.3 Typical Applications of the Short‐Circuit Repair Method 367 15.4.4.3.1 Cutting 367 15.4.4.3.2 Welding 368 15.4.5 Open‐Circuit Repair Method 369 15.4.5.1 LCVD (Laser Chemical Vapor Deposition) 369 15.4.5.2 Metal Ink Deposition Repair 370 15.4.5.2.1 Dispensing 370 15.4.5.2.2 Metal Inkjet Deposition 370 15.4.5.2.3 LIFT (Laser‐Induced Forward Transfer) Deposition 371 15.4.5.3 Main Applications of the Deposition Repair (Open‐Circuit Repair) 372 15.4.6 Photoresist (PR) Repair 372 15.4.6.1 Main Applications of the Photoresist Repair 373 15.4.6.2 Photoresist Repair Technology 373 15.4.6.2.1 Using DMD for Patterning 373 15.4.6.2.2 Using FSM for Patterning 373 15.4.7 Special Features of the Repair System 375 15.4.7.1 Line Defect Locator (LDL) 375 15.4.7.2 Parallel Repair Mode for Maximum System Throughput 375 15.4.8 Repair Technology Trends 376 15.4.8.1 Cold Ablation 376 15.4.8.2 Full Automatic Repair Solution 377 15.4.9 Summary 377 16 LCM Inspection and Repair 379Chun Chang Hung 379 16.1 Introduction 379 16.2 Functional Defects Inspection 379 16.3 Cosmetic Defects Inspection 381 16.4 Key Factors for Proper Inspection 383 16.4.1 Variation Between Inspectors 383 16.4.2 Testing Environments 385 16.4.3 Inspection Distance, Viewing Angle, and Sequence of Test Patterns 385 16.4.4 Characteristics of Product and Components 387 16.5 Automatic Optical Inspection (AOI) 388 16.6 LCM Defect Repair 388 References 391 17 Productivity and Quality Control Overview 393Kozo Yano, Yasunori Nishimura, and Masataka Itoh 17.1 Introduction 393 17.2 Productivity Improvement 394 17.2.1 Challenges for Productivity Improvement 394 17.2.2 Enlargement of Glass Substrate 395 17.2.2.1 Productivity Improvement and Cost Reduction by Glass Size Enlargement 397 17.3 Yield Management 399 17.3.1 Yield Analysis 399 17.3.1.1 Inspection and Yield 399 17.3.1.2 Failure Mode Analysis 401 17.3.2 Yield Improvement Activity 404 17.3.2.1 Process Yield Improvement 404 17.3.2.2 Systematic Failure Minimization 404 17.3.2.3 Random Failure Minimization by Clean Process 404 17.3.2.4 Yield Improvement by Repairing 406 17.4 Quality Control System 406 17.4.1 Materials (IQC) 407 17.4.2 Facility Control 408 17.4.3 Process Quality Control 408 17.4.3.1 TFT Array Process 409 17.4.3.2 Color Filter Process 410 17.4.3.3 LCD Cell Process 412 17.4.3.4 Modulization Process 412 17.4.4 Organization and Key Issues for Quality Control 413 References 417 18 Plant Architectures and Supporting Systems 419Kozo Yano and Michihiro Yamakawa 18.1 Introduction 419 18.2 General Issues in Plant Architecture 420 18.2.1 Plant Overview 420 18.2.2 Plant Design Procedure and Baseline 422 18.3 Clean Room Design 423 18.3.1 Clean Room Evolution 423 18.3.2 Floor Structure for Clean Room 424 18.3.3 Clean Room Ceiling Height 424 18.3.4 Air Flow and Circulation Design 427 18.3.5 Cleanliness Control 428 18.3.6 Air Flow Control Against Particle 428 18.3.7 Chemical Contamination Countermeasures 431 18.3.8 Energy Saving in FFU 433 18.4 Supporting Systems with Environmental Consideration 433 18.4.1 Incidental Facilities 433 18.4.2 Water and Its Recycle 434 18.4.3 Chemicals 436 18.4.4 Gases 436 18.4.5 Electricity 437 18.5 Production Control System 437 References 440 19 Green Manufacturing 441YiLin Wei, Mona Yang, and Matt Chien 19.1 Introduction 441 19.2 Fabrication Plant (Fab) Design 441 19.2.1 Fab Features 441 19.2.2 Green Building Design 442 19.3 Product Material Uses 443 19.3.1 Material Types and Uses 443 19.3.2 Hazardous Substance Management 444 19.3.3 Material Hazard and Green Trend 446 19.3.4 Conflict Minerals Control 446 19.4 Manufacturing Features and Green Management 447 19.4.1 The Manufacturing Processes 447 19.4.2 Greenhouse Gas Inventory 448 19.4.3 Energy Saving in Manufacturing 449 19.4.4 Reduction of Greenhouse Gas from Manufacturing 449 19.4.5 Air Pollution and Control 451 19.4.6 Water Management and Emissions Control 452 19.4.7 Waste Recycling and Reuse 453 19.5 Future Challenges 453 References 454 Index 457

Read more less

Book SynopsisOver the past forty years, media education research has emerged as a historical, epistemological and practical field of study. Shifts in the fieldalong with radical transformations in media technologies, aesthetic forms, ownership models, and audience participation practiceshave driven the application of new concepts and theories across a range of both school and non-school settings. The Handbook on Media Education Research is a unique exploration of the complex set of practices, theories, and tools of media research. Featuring contributions from a diverse range of internationally recognized experts and practitioners, this timely volume discusses recent developments in the field in the context of related scholarship, public policy, formal and non-formal teaching and learning, and DIY and community practice. Offering a truly global perspective, the Handbook focuses on empirical work from Media and Information Literacy (MIL) practitioners from around the world. The book's five parts explTable of ContentsForeword xiUlla Carlsson About the Editors xix Notes on Contributors xxi Introduction: Media Education Research in a Rapidly Changing Media Environment 1Stuart R. Poyntz, Divina Frau-Meigs, Michael Hoechsmann, Sirkku Kotilainen, and Manisha Pathak-Shelat Part I Global Youth Cultures 17Stuart R. Poyntz 1 Micro-Celebrity Communities, and Media Education: Understanding Fan Practices on YouTube and Wattpad 19Michael Dezuanni 2 Memes Production as Parodic Activism: Inclusion and Exclusion in Young People’s Digital Participation in Latin America 33Rosalía Winocur and Inés Dussel 3 Youth, ICTs, and “Violent Extremism”: A Media Education Perspective 47Sanjay Asthana 4 Unaccompanied Refugee Children and Media Literacy: Doing Media Education Research on the Margins 61Annamária Neag 5 The Change in Young Australians’ Television Viewing Behavior and What It Means for the Future of Local Content 75Marc C-Scott 6 “We Don’t Do That Here” and “Isme Tera Ghata, Mera Kuch Nahi Jata”: Young People’s Meme Cultures in India 85Devina Sarwatay 7 Toward Hybridized and Glocalized Youth Identities in Africa: Revisiting Old Concerns and Reimagining New Possibilities for Media Education 97Chikezie E. Uzuegbunam 8 Social Media Influences on Youth with Disabilities in the Global South 105Tafadzwa Rugoho Part II Pedagogies and Practices 113Manisha Pathak‐Shelat 9 Toward Transmedia Learning: Practices, Approaches, and Tools 115Maria-Jose Masanet, Gabriella Taddeo, and Simona Tirocchi 10 Youth Media Education in the Age of Algorithm-Driven Social Media 131Sirkku Kotilainen, Jussi Okkonen, Jaakko Vuorio, and Karoliina Leisti 11 Integrating Nonviolent Communication in Pedagogies of Media Literacy Education 141Vedabhyas Kundu 12 Different Countries, Similar Issues: Media Binds or Blinds? 155Melda N. Yildiz 13 Teaching Gender and Sexuality in a Critical Media Literacy Framework: Curriculum, Pedagogical Interventions, and Autoethnographic Reflections 167Ruchi Jaggi 14 Competencies About the News for Elementary School Children 175Ioli Campos 15 Looking for Digital (Alter) Natives: Why Teachers’ Beliefs About Children Matter in Media Education 183Pekka Mertala and Saara Salomaa 16 Understanding Media Regulation in the Public Interest 189Robert Beveridge 17 “Doing Journalism Isn’t Lying” – Literacies and Fake News in an Experience with Children in the Invisibility Triad 195Lumárya Souza de Sousa and Thaiane Oliveira 18 Teaching Media Literacy Through Scientific Controversies 201José Azevedo 19 Teaching Interactive Narratives: Developing User Engagement Through Theory-Empowered Practice 207Willemien Sanders Part III Histories 215Michael Hoechsmann 20 Media Education History: The Early Years 217Keval J. Kumar 21 Media Education 3.0? How Big Data, Algorithms, and AI Redefine Media Education 229Grzegorz Ptaszek 22 Media Education in Latin America: The Paradigm of Educommunication 241Cláudia Lago, Claudemir E. Viana, Maria Cristina Palma Mungioli, and Marciel Consani 23 A Brief History of Media Education in Chile 253Pablo Andrada and Cristian Cabalin 24 Nordic Perspectives on the History and Future of Media Education 259Reijo Kupiainen and Daniel Schofield 25 Media Education in Israel – Mainstreaming the Avant-Garde 267Arielle Friedman, Ornat Turin, and Orly Melamed 26 Media Education in the Czech Republic: Vision and Disconnection 275Lucie Römer 27 Media Education in India: Policy and Praxis in Old and New Communication Media 281C.S.H.N. Murthy Part IV Institutions and Policy Developments 289Divina Frau‐Meigs 28 Defining Media Education Policies: Building Blocks, Scope, and Characteristics 291Normand Landry and Christiane Caneva 29 The Development of Media Literacy in Chinese Societies: From Grassroots Efforts to Institutional Support 309Alice Y.L. Lee 30 Digital Privacy Policy Literacy: A Framework for Canadian Youth 327Leslie Regan Shade and Sharly Chan 31 Searching for Common Ground: Multiliteracy and Curricular Consistency in the Finnish Education System 339Lauri Palsa 32 Taking Media Literacy Education in Armenia to the Next Level: From Civil Society Movement to Post-Revolution Government Efforts 347Lusine Grigoryan 33 Media Education Challenges in a Digital Society: The Case of Chile 355Rayén Condeza Dall’Orso, Myrna Gálvez Johnson, Nadia Herrada Hidalgo, and Francisco J. Fernandez Medina 34 Landscape and Terrain of Digital Literacy Policy and Practice: Canada in the Twenty-First Century 363Helen DeWaard and Michael Hoechsmann 35 Media Education Policy Developments in Times of “Fake News”: The Case of the Czech Republic 373Markéta Supa, Lucie Štástna, and Jan Jirak Part V Critical Citizenship and Futures 381Sirkku Kotilainen 36 Expanding Ethics to the Environment with Ecomedia Literacy 383Antonio Lopez 37 Engaging the World: Social Media Literacy for Transcultural Citizenship 399Manisha Pathak-Shelat and Kiran Vinod Bhatia 38 Data and Privacy Literacy: The Role of the School in Educating Children in a Datafied Society 413Sonia Livingstone, Mariya Stoilova, and Rishita Nandagiri 39 Media Education and Dynamic Research: Known Unknowns and Rich Intersections 427Julian McDougall and Isabella Rega 40 Radical Media Education Practices from Social Movement Media: Lessons from Teaching and Learning in Lebanon 441Gretchen King 41 Activating Student Voice and Choice Globally: Reframing Negative Narratives in Ghana 449Ed Madison 42 Advocacy as Media Education: The Educational Activities of Digital Rights Advocates 459Efrat Daskal 43 Cyberbullying, Media Education, and Agents of Socialization in Montenegro 467Ida Cortoni and Jelena Perović Index 475

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical review of state-of-the-art non-contiguous multicarrier technologies that are revolutionizing how data is transmitted, received, and processed This book addresses the advantages and the limitations of modern multicarrier technologies and how to meet the challenges they pose using non-contiguous multicarrier technologies and novel algorithms that enhance spectral efficiency, interference robustness, and reception performance. It explores techniques using non-contiguous subcarriers which allow for flexible spectrum aggregation while achieving high spectral efficiency and flexible transmission and reception at lower OSI layers. These include non-contiguous orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (NC-OFDM), its enhanced version, non-contiguous filter-bank-based multicarrier (NC-FBMC), and generalized multicarrier. Following an overview of current multicarrier technologies for radio communication, the authors examine particular properties of these technTable of ContentsPreface ix List of Abbreviations xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 5G Radio Communications 2 1.2 Challenges for Future Radio Communications 6 1.3 Initiatives for the Future Radio Interface Definition 8 2 Multicarrier Technologies in Radio Communication Systems 11 2.1 The Principles of OFDM 15 2.2 Nonlinear Distortions in Multicarrier Systems 18 2.2.1 Power Amplifier Models 22 2.3 PAPR Reduction Methods 25 2.4 Link Adaptation in Multicarrier Systems 31 2.5 Reception Techniques and CFO Sensitivity 35 2.5.1 Synchronization 35 2.5.2 Channel Estimation and Equalization 40 3 Noncontiguous OFDM for Future Radio Communications 45 3.1 Enhanced NC-OFDM with Cancellation Carriers 54 3.1.1 Reception Quality Improvement for Cancellation Carrier Method 57 3.1.2 Reduced-Complexity Reduced-Power Combination of CCs and Windowing 63 3.1.3 Rate and Power Issues with the CC Method 64 3.2 Reduction of Subcarrier Spectrum Sidelobes by Flexible Quasi-Systematic Precoding 69 3.2.1 Precoder Design 70 3.2.2 Reception Quality Improvement for NC-OFDM with Quasi-Systematic Precoding 72 3.3 Optimized Cancellation Carriers Selection 77 3.3.1 Computational Complexity 80 3.3.2 Heuristic Approach to OCCS 80 3.4 Reduction of Nonlinear Effects in NC-OFDM 85 3.4.1 Sequential PAPR and OOB Power Reduction 88 3.4.2 Joint Non-linear Effects Reduction with Extra Carriers 91 3.5 NC-OFDM Receiver Design 101 3.5.1 NC-OFDM Receiver Synchronization 103 3.5.2 In-Band-Interference Robust Synchronization Algorithm for an NC-OFDMSystem 106 3.5.3 Performance Evaluation 119 3.5.4 Computational Complexity 126 3.6 Summary: Potentials and Challenges of NC-OFDM 127 4 Generalized Multicarrier Techniques for 5G Radio 131 4.1 The Principles of GMC 132 4.1.1 Frame Theory and Gabor Transform 135 4.1.2 Short-Time Fourier Transform and Gabor Transform 140 4.1.3 Calculation of the Dual Pulse 141 4.1.4 GMC Transceiver Design Using Polyphase Filters 143 4.2 Peak-to-Average Power Ratio Reduction in GMC Transmitters 145 4.2.1 Optimization of the Synthesis Pulse Shape for Minimization of Nonlinear Distortions 145 4.2.2 Active Constellation Extension for GMC Signals 150 4.3 Link Adaptation in GMC Systems 159 4.3.1 Two-DimensionalWater-Filling 159 4.3.2 AdaptiveModulation in GMC Transmitters 165 4.3.3 Application of the Modified Hughes–Hartogs Algorithm in GMC Systems 167 4.3.4 Remarks on Link Adaptation in the GMC Transmission 170 4.4 GMC Receiver Issues 173 4.4.1 Received Signal Analysis 174 4.4.2 Successive Interference Cancellation (SIC) 177 4.4.3 Parallel Interference Cancellation (PIC) 179 4.4.4 Hybrid Interference Cancellation (HIC) 181 4.5 Summary 190 5 Filter-Bank-Based Multicarrier Technologies 193 5.1 The Principles of FBMC Transmission 194 5.2 FBMC Transceiver Design 196 5.3 Pulse Design 199 5.3.1 Nyquist Filters and Ambiguity Function 199 5.3.2 IOTA Function 200 5.3.3 PHYDYAS Pulse 203 5.3.4 Other Pulse-Shape Proposals for FBMC 205 5.4 Practical FBMC System Design Issues 207 5.4.1 Self-Interference Problem in the FBMC Systems 207 5.4.2 Computational Complexity 209 5.4.3 Limitations of FBMC in Burst Transmission Schemes 211 5.4.4 MIMO technique for FBMC Transmission 211 5.5 Filter-bank-Based Multicarrier Systems Revisited 213 5.6 Summary 218 6 Multicarrier Technologies for Flexible Spectrum Usage 219 6.1 Cognitive Radio 219 6.2 Spectrum Sharing and Licensing Schemes 223 6.2.1 Exclusive Use of Spectrum 225 6.2.2 License Exempt Rules 225 6.2.3 Licensed Shared Access and Authorized Shared Access 226 6.2.4 Citizen Broadband Radio Service and Spectrum Access System 226 6.2.5 Pluralistic Licensing 227 6.2.6 Licensed Assisted Access 227 6.2.7 Co-Primary Shared Access 228 6.3 Dynamic Spectrum Access Based on Multicarrier Technologies 228 6.3.1 DSA Based on Spectrum Pricing 229 6.3.2 DSA Based on Coopetition 231 6.4 Dynamic Spectrum Aggregation 231 6.4.1 Complexity and Aggregation Dynamics 236 6.4.2 Transmitter Issues 237 6.4.3 Receiver Issues 239 6.4.4 Throughput Maximization 241 6.5 Summary 245 7 Conclusions and Future Outlook 247 References 251 Index 283

Read more less

Book SynopsisA hands-on guide to image registration theory and methods with examples of a wide range of real-world applications Theory and Applications of Image Registration offers comprehensive coverage of feature-based image registration methods.Table of ContentsContributors xv Acknowledgments xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Organization of the Book 3 1.2 Further Reading 5 References 5 2 Image Orientation Detection 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Geometric Gradient and Geometric Smoothing 13 2.2.1 Calculating Geometric Gradients 15 2.3 Comparison of Geometric Gradients and Intensity Gradients 18 2.4 Finding the Rotational Difference between Two Images 21 2.5 Performance Evaluation 23 2.5.1 Reliability 23 2.5.2 Accuracy 31 2.5.3 Computational Complexity 32 2.6 Registering Images with a Known Rotational Difference 34 2.7 Discussion 36 2.8 Further Reading 37 References 40 3 Feature Point Detection 43 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 Variant Features 44 3.2.1 Central Moments 44 3.2.2 Uniqueness 48 3.3 Invariant Features 50 3.3.1 Rotation-Invariant Features 50 3.3.1.1 Laplacian of Gaussian (LoG) Detector 51 3.3.1.2 Entropy 53 3.3.1.3 InvariantMoments 55 3.3.2 SIFT: A Scale-and Rotation-Invariant Point Detector 58 3.3.3 Radiometric-Invariant Features 60 3.3.3.1 Harris Corner Detector 60 3.3.3.2 Hessian Corner Detector 63 3.4 Performance Evaluation 64 3.5 Further Reading 68 References 68 4 FeatureLineDetection 75 4.1 Hough Transform Using Polar Equation of Lines 79 4.2 Hough Transform Using Slope and y-Intercept Equation of Lines 82 4.3 Line Detection Using Parametric Equation of Lines 86 4.4 Line Detection by Clustering 89 4.5 Line Detection by Contour Tracing 92 4.6 Line Detection by Curve Fitting 95 4.7 Line Detection by Region Subdivision 101 4.8 Comparison of the Line Detection Algorithms 106 4.8.1 Sensitivity to Noise 106 4.8.2 Positional and Directional Errors 106 4.8.3 Length Accuracy 109 4.8.4 Speed 109 4.8.5 Quality of Detected Lines 109 4.9 Revisiting Image Dominant Orientation Detection 117 4.10 Further Reading 121 References 125 5 Finding Homologous Points 133 5.1 Introduction 133 5.2 Point Pattern Matching 134 5.2.1 Parameter Estimation by Clustering 137 5.2.2 Parameter Estimation by RANSAC 141 5.3 Point Descriptors 146 5.3.1 Histogram-Based Descriptors 147 5.3.2 SIFT Descriptor 148 5.3.3 GLOH Descriptor 151 5.3.4 Composite Descriptors 152 5.3.4.1 Hu InvariantMoments 152 5.3.4.2 Complex Moments 152 5.3.4.3 Cornerness Measures 153 5.3.4.4 Power Spectrum Features 154 5.3.4.5 Differential Features 155 5.3.4.6 Spatial Domain Features 155 5.4 SimilarityMeasures 160 5.4.1 Correlation Coefficient 160 5.4.2 Minimum Ratio 161 5.4.3 Spearman’s ;; 161 5.4.4 Ordinal Measure 162 5.4.5 Correlation Ratio 162 5.4.6 Shannon Mutual Information 164 5.4.7 Tsallis Mutual Information 165 5.4.8 F-Information 166 5.5 Distance Measures 167 5.5.1 Sum of Absolute Differences 167 5.5.2 Median of Absolute Differences 167 5.5.3 Square Euclidean Distance 168 5.5.4 Intensity-Ratio Variance 168 5.5.5 Rank Distance 169 5.5.6 Shannon Joint Entropy 169 5.5.7 Exclusive F-Information 170 5.6 TemplateMatching 170 5.6.1 Coarse-to-Fine Matching 171 5.6.2 MultistageMatching 172 5.6.3 Rotationally InvariantMatching 173 5.6.4 Gaussian-Weighted TemplateMatching 174 5.6.5 Template Matching in Different Modality Rotated Images 175 5.7 Robust Parameter Estimation 178 5.7.1 Ordinary Least-Squares Estimator 180 5.7.2 Weighted Least-Squares Estimator 182 5.7.3 Least Median of Squares Estimator 184 5.7.4 Least Trimmed Squares Estimator 184 5.7.5 Rank Estimator 185 5.8 Finding Optimal Transformation Parameters 193 5.9 Performance Evaluation 193 5.10 Further Reading 197 References 200 6 Finding Homologous Lines 215 6.1 Introduction 215 6.2 Determining Transformation Parameters from Line Parameters 215 6.3 Finding Homologous Lines by Clustering 221 6.3.1 Finding the Rotation Parameter 222 6.3.2 Finding the Translation Parameters 223 6.4 Finding Homologous Lines by RANSAC 229 6.5 Line Grouping Using Local Image Information 232 6.6 Line Grouping Using Vanishing Points 235 6.6.1 Methods Searching the Image Space 235 6.6.2 Methods Searching the Polar Space 236 6.6.3 Methods Searching the Gaussian Sphere 236 6.6.4 A Method Searching Both Image and Gaussian Sphere 237 6.6.5 Measuring the Accuracy of Detected Vanishing Points 244 6.6.6 Discussion 247 6.7 Robust Parameter Estimation Using Homologous Lines 253 6.8 Revisiting Image Dominant Orientation Detection 255 6.9 Further Reading 256 References 257 7 Nonrigid Image Registration 261 7.1 Introduction 261 7.2 Finding Homologous Points 262 7.2.1 Coarse-to-Fine Matching 262 7.2.2 Correspondence by Template Matching 269 7.3 Outlier Removal 274 7.4 Elastic Transformation Models 278 7.4.1 Surface Spline (SS) Interpolation 280 7.4.2 Piecewise Linear (PWL) Interpolation 282 7.4.3 Moving Least Squares (MLS) Approximation 283 7.4.4 Weighted Linear (WL) Approximation 285 7.4.5 Performance Evaluation 287 7.4.6 Choosing the Right Transformation Model 291 7.5 Further Reading 292 References 293 8 Volume Image Registration 299 8.1 Introduction 299 8.2 Feature Point Detection 301 8.2.1 Central Moments 301 8.2.2 Entropy 302 8.2.3 LoG Operator 302 8.2.4 First-Derivative Intensities 303 8.2.5 Second-Derivative Intensities 304 8.2.6 Speed-Up Considerations in Feature Point Detection 305 8.2.7 Evaluation of Feature Point Detectors 305 8.3 Finding Homologous Points 307 8.3.1 Finding Initial Homologous Points Using Image Descriptors 310 8.3.2 Finding Initial Homologous Points by Template Matching 313 8.3.3 Finding Final Homologous Points from Coarse to Fine 315 8.3.4 Finding the Final Homologous Points by Outlier Removal 320 8.4 Transformation Models for Volume Image Registration 321 8.4.1 Volume Spline 323 8.4.2 Weighted Rigid Transformation 325 8.4.3 Computing the Overall Transformation 327 8.5 Performance Evaluation 330 8.5.1 Accuracy 330 8.5.2 Reliability 333 8.5.3 Speed 333 8.6 Further Reading 335 References 337 9 Validation Methods 343 9.1 Introduction 343 9.2 Validation Using Simulation Data 344 9.3 Validation Using a Gold Standard 345 9.4 Validation by an Expert Observer 347 9.5 Validation Using a Consistency Measure 348 9.6 Validation Using a Similarity/DistanceMeasure 350 9.7 Further Reading 351 References 352 10 Video Image Registration 357 EdgardoMolina,Wai Lun Khoo, Hao Tang, and Zhigang Zhu 10.1 Introduction 357 10.2 Motion Modeling 358 10.2.1 The Motion Field of Rigid Objects 358 10.2.2 Motion Models 360 10.2.2.1 Pure Rotation and a 3-D Scene 361 10.2.2.2 General Motion and a Planar Scene 362 10.2.2.3 TranslationalMotion and a 3-D Scene 363 10.3 Image Alignment 365 10.3.1 Feature-Based Methods 367 10.3.2 Mechanical-Based Methods 369 10.4 Image Composition 370 10.4.1 Compositing Surface 370 10.4.2 ImageWarping 371 10.4.3 Pixel Selection and Blending 373 10.5 Application Examples 374 10.5.1 Pushbroom Stereo Mosaics Under TranslationalMotion 374 10.5.1.1 Parallel-Perspective Geometry and Panoramas 374 10.5.1.2 Stereo and Multiview Panoramas 376 10.5.1.3 Results 378 10.5.2 Stereo Mosaics when Moving a Camera on a Circular Path 378 10.5.2.1 Circular Geometry 379 10.5.2.2 Stereo Geometry 379 10.5.2.3 Geometry and ResultsWhen Using PRISM 381 10.5.3 Multimodal Panoramic Registration of Video Images 382 10.5.3.1 Concentric Geometry 383 10.5.3.2 Multimodal Alignment 385 10.5.3.3 Results 387 10.5.4 Video Mosaics Under GeneralMotion 387 10.5.4.1 Direct Layering Approach 389 10.5.4.2 Multiple Runs and Results 392 10.6 Further Reading 393 References 395 11 Multitemporal Image Registration 397 11.1 Introduction 397 11.2 Finding Transformation Parameters from Line Parameters 398 11.3 Finding an Initial Set of Homologous Lines 399 11.4 Maximizing the Number of Homologous Lines 403 11.5 Examples of Multitemporal Image Registration 406 11.6 Further Reading 413 References 415 12 Open Problems and Research Topics 419 12.1 Finding Rotational Difference between Multimodality Images 419 12.2 Designing a Robust Image Descriptor 420 12.3 Finding Homologous Lines for Nonrigid Registration 421 12.4 Nonrigid Registration Using Homologous Lines 423 12.5 Transformation Models with Nonsymmetric Basis Functions 423 12.6 Finding Homologous Points along Homologous Contours 426 12.7 4-D Image Registration 429 References 430 Glossary 433 Acronyms 437 Symbols 439 A Image Registration Software 441 A.1 Chapter 2: Image Orientation Detection 441 A.1.1 Introduction 441 A.1.2 Operations 442 A.2 Chapter 3: Feature Point Detection 444 A.2.1 Introduction 444 A.2.2 Operations 445 A.3 Chapter 4: Feature Line Detection 448 A.3.1 Introduction 448 A.3.2 Operations 449 A.4 Chapter 5: Finding Homologous Points 452 A.4.1 Introduction 452 A.4.2 Operations 452 A.5 Chapter 6: Finding Homologous Lines 459 A.5.1 Introduction 459 A.5.2 Operations 460 A.6 Chapter 7: Nonrigid Image Registration 469 A.6.1 Introduction 469 A.6.2 Operations 469 A.7 Chapter 8: Volume Image Registration 479 A.7.1 Introduction 479 A.7.2 I/O File Formats 479 A.7.3 Operations 480 References 487 Index 489

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplore foundational and advanced topics in nanoscience with this intuitive introduction In the newly revised Second Edition of Introduction to Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, renowned researcher Dr. Chris Binns delivers an accessible and broad-based treatment of nanoscience and nanotechnology. Beginning with the fundamental physicochemical properties of nanoparticles and nanostructures, the book moves on to discuss how these properties can be exploited to produce high-performance materials and devices. Following chapters explore naturally occurring nanoparticles and artificially engineered carbon nanoparticles, their mechanical properties, and their applications in nanotechnological science. Both design ideologies for manufacturing nanostructuresbottom-up and top-downare examined, as is the idea that the two methodologies can be combined to allow for the imaging, probing, and manipulation of nanostructures. A survey of the current state of nanoteTable of ContentsPreface to Second Edition ix Acknowledgments x Introduction to Second Edition 1 1 Size Matters 13 1.1 The Fundamental Importance of Size 13 1.2 The Magnetic Behavior of Nanoparticles 16 1.3 The Mechanical Properties of Nanostructured Materials 26 1.4 The Chemical Properties of Nanoparticles 27 1.5 Nanoparticles Interacting with Bacteria and Viruses 29 Problems 31 References 32 2 Nanoparticles and the Environment 35 2.1 Nanoparticles in the Atmosphere 35 2.2 Atmospheric Nanoparticles and Health 39 2.2.1 Entry Via the Lungs 39 2.2.2 Entry Via the Intestines 42 2.2.3 Nanoparticles and the Skin 43 2.2.4 Air Quality Specifications 44 2.3 Nanoparticles and Clouds 44 2.4 Marine Aerosol 48 2.5 Effect of Cosmic Rays on Atmospheric Aerosol 50 2.6 Nanoparticles in Space 51 2.7 Environmental Applications of Nanoparticles 52 2.7.1 Water Remediation Using Magnetic Nanoparticles 52 2.7.2 Conversion of Waste Plastics to High-Grade Materials (Upcycling) 55 Problems 57 References 59 3 Carbon Nanostructures: Bucky Balls and Nanotubes 61 3.1 Why Carbon? 61 3.2 Discovery of the First Fullerene – C60 62 3.3 Structural Symmetry of the Closed Fullerenes 64 3.4 Smaller Fullerenes and “Shrink-Wrapping” Atoms 68 3.5 Larger Fullerenes 70 3.6 Electronic Properties of Individual Fullerenes 72 3.7 Materials Produced by Assembling Fullerenes (Fullerites and Fullerides) 76 3.8 Discovery of Carbon Nanotubes 81 3.9 Structure of Single-Wall Carbon Nanotubes (SWNTs) 82 3.10 Electronic Properties of SWNTs 84 3.11 Electronic Transport in Carbon Nanotubes 86 3.12 Field Emission from Carbon Nanotubes 87 3.13 Mechanical Properties of Nanotubes 88 3.14 Thermal Conductivity of Nanotubes 92 3.15 Carbon Nanohorns 93 3.16 Carbon Nanobuds and Pea Pods 94 Problems 95 References 96 4 Graphene 99 4.1 Background 99 4.1.1 Low-Dimensional Materials 99 4.1.2 Discovery of Graphene 101 4.2 Electrical Properties of Graphene 101 4.2.1 Electrical Conduction in Normal Metals 101 4.2.2 Electrical Conduction in Semiconductors 104 4.2.3 Electrical Conduction in Graphene 107 4.3 Graphene as a Testbed for Relativistic Quantum Effects 112 4.4 Thermal Conductivity of Graphene 112 4.5 Mechanical Strength of Graphene 116 4.6 Superconductivity in Graphene Bilayers 117 4.7 Current Technological Applications of Graphene 120 4.7.1 Graphene Batteries 120 4.7.2 Graphene Nanoelectromechanical Systems (NEMS) Accelerometers 124 4.7.3 Graphene Membranes for Water Desalination 125 4.8 Summary 126 Problems 126 References 128 5 The Nanotechnology Toolkit 131 5.1 Making Nanostructures Using Bottom–Up Methods 131 5.1.1 Making Nanoparticles Using Supersaturated Vapor 131 5.1.2 Sources Producing Nanoparticle Beams in Vacuum 133 5.1.3 Synthesis of Alloy, Core–Shell, and Janus Nanoparticles 137 5.1.4 Mass Selection of Charged Nanoparticle Beams in Vacuum 141 5.1.5 Aerodynamic Lensing and Mass Selection of Neutral Nanoparticles 147 5.1.6 Plasma, Spark and Flame Metal Aerosol Sources 147 5.1.7 Size Selection of Nanoparticles in Aerosols 150 5.1.8 Chemical Synthesis of Nanoparticles in Liquid Suspensions 153 5.1.9 Biological Synthesis of Magnetic Nanoparticles 156 5.1.10 Gas-Phase Synthesis of Hydrosols 157 5.1.11 Size Determination of Nanoparticles in Liquids 157 5.1.12 Synthesis of Graphene 160 5.1.13 Synthesis of Fullerenes 162 5.1.14 Synthesis of Carbon Nanotubes 163 5.1.15 Controlling the Growth of SWNTs 165 5.2 Making Nanostructures Using Top–Down Methods 167 5.2.1 Electron-Beam Lithography 168 5.2.2 Manufacturing Nanostructures Using Focused Ion Beams 171 5.3 Combining Bottom–up and Top–Down Nanostructures 176 5.4 Imaging, Probing, and Manipulating Nanostructures 180 5.4.1 Scanning Tunneling Microscope 180 5.4.2 Manipulating Atoms and Molecules with STM 185 5.4.3 Scanning Tunneling Spectroscopy (STS) 189 5.4.4 Atomic Force Microscopy 192 5.4.5 AFM Imaging of Biological Samples in Liquids 195 5.4.6 Dip-Pen Nanolithography 198 5.4.7 Electron Microscopy 200 Problems 204 References 206 6 Single-Nanoparticles Devices 211 6.1 Data Storage on Magnetic Nanoparticles 211 6.2 Quantum Dots 218 6.3 Quantum Dot Solar Cells 222 6.4 Nanoparticles as Transistors 226 6.5 Carbon Nano-Electronics 232 6.5.1 Fullerene SET 232 6.5.2 Porphyrin Molecule SET 234 6.5.3 Carbon Nanotube SET 236 6.5.4 Limitations of SETs in Applications and Moving to Multiple Transistor Devices 236 6.6 Carbon Nanotube Light Emitters and Detectors 239 Problems 240 References 240 7 Hydrosols, Nanobubbles, and Nanoscale Interfaces 243 7.1 Reynolds Number 243 7.2 Brownian Motion 245 7.3 Stability of Hydrosols 250 7.4 Nanobubbles 257 7.4.1 Fundamental Considerations 257 7.4.2 Synthesis of Bulk Nanobubbles 260 7.4.3 Properties of Bulk Nanobubbles 262 7.4.4 Surface Nanobubbles 265 7.4.5 Applications of Nanobubbles 267 7.5 Nanofluidics 271 Problems 277 References 278 8 Magic Beacons and Magic Bullets: The Medical Applications of Functional Nanoparticles 281 8.1 Nanoparticles Interacting with Living Organisms 282 8.1.1 Targeted Nanovectors for Therapy and Diagnosis 282 8.1.2 Uptake of Nanomaterials by the Body 284 8.1.3 Types of Core Nanoparticle in Nanovectors 286 8.1.4 Targeting to Tumors by Enhanced Permeability and Retention (EPR) 288 8.1.5 Some Elementary Cell Biology 289 8.1.5.1 The Outer Cell Membrane (Plasma Membrane) 290 8.1.5.2 Membrane Proteins 291 8.1.5.3 Internal Cell Structure 292 8.1.5.4 Cytoskeleton 292 8.1.6 “Trojan horse” Targeting Using Stem Cells and Macrophages 294 8.1.7 Molecular Targeting 296 8.1.8 Magnetic Targeting 302 8.2 Treatment of Tumors by Hyperthermia 304 8.2.1 Biological Response to Heating 304 8.2.2 Magnetic Nanoparticle Hyperthermia (MNH) 307 8.2.2.1 Current State of the art in Clinical Trials 307 8.2.2.2 Limitations on the Applied RF Magnetic Field 309 8.2.2.3 Heating Mechanisms of Magnetic Nanoparticles in an AMF 311 8.2.2.4 New Nanoparticles for MNH 316 8.2.3 Optical Hyperthermia Using Near-Infrared Radiation 318 8.2.4 Hyperthermia with Carbon Nanotubes 326 8.3 Medical Diagnosis and “Theranostics” using Nanomaterials 327 8.3.1 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) and Contrast Enhancement Using Magnetic Nanoparticles 328 8.3.2 Magnetic Particle Imaging (MPI) 331 8.3.3 Imaging Using Au Nanoparticles 337 8.3.4 Imaging Using QDs 339 8.4 Antibacterial and Antiviral Applications of Nanoparticles 343 8.4.1 Nanoparticle Delivery Systems for Covid 19 Vaccines 343 8.4.2 Antibacterial Action of Ag Nanoparticles 343 8.4.3 Antiviral Action of Nanoparticles 346 Problems 347 References 348 9 Radical Nanotechnology 355 9.1 Locomotion for Nanobots and Nanofactories 356 9.1.1 Movement Within the Nanofactory using Kinesin 356 9.1.2 Moving Small Cargo in the Nanofactory: DNA Walkers 364 9.1.3 Propulsion for Swimmers 369 9.2 Onboard Processing for Nanomachines 374 9.3 Medical Micro/Nanobots 374 9.4 Molecular Assembly 376 Problems 379 References 379 10 Prodding the Cosmic Fabric 381 10.1 Zero-Point Energy of Space 381 10.2 The Casimir Force 385 10.3 The Casimir Force in Micro-and Nanomachines 389 10.4 Controlling the Casimir Force Using Phase-Change Materials 394 10.5 Repulsive Casimir Forces 395 Problems 397 References 398 Glossary 401 Index 403

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to the latest developments in grid dynamics and control and highlights the role of transmission and distribution grids Dynamics and Control of Electric Transmission and Microgrids offers a concise and comprehensive review of the most recent developments and research in grid dynamics and control. In addition, the authors present a new style of presentation that highlights the role of transmission and distribution grids that ensure the reliability and quality of electric power supply. The authors noted experts in the field offer an introduction to the topic and explore the basic characteristics and operations of the grid. The text also reviews a wealth of vital topics such as FACTS and HVDC Converter controllers, the stability and security issues of the bulk power system, loads which can be viewed as negative generation, the power limits and energy availability when distributed storage is used and much more. This important resource: Puts the focus on the role of transmissionTrade ReviewThis textbook is one of the first on Power System Dynamics, Control and Stability to integrate in a straightforward and illustrative way the recently introduced modern power system components, such as Renewable Energy Sources (RES), converter interfaced generating sources, FACTS, energy storage devices, and wide area measurement systems (WAMS), in the same, common and well defined framework with the more conventional component, such as Synchronous Generators. - C. Vournas, NTUA, Athens, GreeceTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Present Status of Grid Operation 1 1.1.1 General 1 1.1.2 HVDC Transmission 4 1.1.3 Reliability of Electricity Supply 4 1.2 Overview of System Dynamics and Control 4 1.2.1 Power System Stability 4 1.2.2 Mathematical Preliminaries 6 Stability of Equilibrium Point 6 Steady-State Behavior 8 1.2.3 Power System Security 8 1.3 Monitoring and Enhancing System Security 10 1.4 Emergency Control and System Protection 11 1.5 Recent Developments 12 1.5.1 Power System Protection 12 1.5.2 Development of Smart Grids 13 1.5.3 Microgrids 14 1.5.4 Role of System Dynamics and Control 14 1.6 Outline of Chapters 14 References 17 2 Grid Characteristics and Operation 19 2.1 Description of Electric Grids 19 2.2 Detailed Modeling of Three-Phase AC Lines 21 2.3 Circuit Models of Symmetric Networks 22 2.4 Network Equations in DQo and 𝛼𝛽o Components 23 2.4.1 Transformation to Park (dqo) Components 24 2.4.2 Steady-State Equations 25 2.4.3 D-Q Transformation using 𝛼-𝛽 Variables 26 2.5 Frequency and Power Control 28 2.5.1 Tie-Line Bias Frequency Control 31 2.6 Dynamic Characteristics of AC Grids 33 2.6.1 Grid Response to Frequency Modulation 33 2.6.2 Grid Response to Injection of Reactive Current 35 2.7 Control of Power Flow in AC Grids 38 2.7.1 Power Transfer Capability of a Line 38 2.7.2 Power Flow in a Line connected to an AC Transmission Grid 41 2.8 Analysis of Electromagnetic Transients 42 2.8.1 Modeling of Lumped Parameter Components 42 2.8.2 Modeling of a Single-Phase Line 43 2.8.3 Approximation of Series Resistance of Line 44 2.8.4 Modeling of Lossless Multiphase Line 45 2.8.5 Modeling of Multiphase Networks with Lumped Parameters 46 2.9 Transmission Expansion Planning 47 2.10 Reliability in Distribution Systems 48 2.11 Reliable Power Flows in a Transmission Network 48 2.12 Reliability Analysis of Transmission Networks 50 2.A Analysis of a Distributed Parameter Single-Phase Line in Steady State 51 2.A.1 Expressions for a Lossless Line 53 2.A.2 Performance of a Symmetrical Line 54 2.B Computation of Electrical Torque 55 References 57 3 Modeling and Simulation of Synchronous Generator Dynamics 59 3.1 Introduction 59 3.2 Detailed Model of a Synchronous Machine 59 3.2.1 Flux Linkage Equations 60 3.2.2 Voltage equations 61 3.3 Park’s Transformation 62 3.4 Per-Unit Quantities 69 3.5 Equivalent Circuits of a Synchronous Machine 72 3.6 Synchronous Machine Models for Stability Analysis 76 3.6.1 Application of Model (2.1) 80 3.6.2 Application of Model (1.1) 80 3.6.3 Modeling of Saturation 82 3.7 An Exact Circuit Model of a Synchronous Machine for Electromagnetic Transient Analysis 82 3.7.1 Derivation of the Circuit Model 83 3.7.2 Transformation of the Circuit Model 87 3.7.3 Modeling of a Synchronous Generator in the Simulation of Electromagnetic Transients 91 3.7.4 Treatment of Dynamic Saliency 92 3.8 Excitation and Prime Mover Controllers 93 3.8.1 Excitation Systems 93 3.8.2 Modeling of Prime-Mover Control Systems 98 3.9 Transient Instability due to Loss of Synchronism 101 3.10 Extended Equal Area Criterion 103 3.11 Dynamics of a Synchronous Generator 104 Network Equations 104 Calculation of Initial Conditions 106 System Simulation 108 3.A Derivation of Electrical Torque 110 References 112 4 Modeling and Simulation of Wind Power Generators 115 4.1 Introduction 115 4.2 Power Extraction byWind Turbines 116 4.2.1 Wind Speed Characteristics 117 4.2.2 Control of Power Extraction 118 4.3 Generator and Power Electronic Configurations 120 4.3.1 Wind Farm Configurations 122 4.4 Modeling of the Rotating System 122 4.5 Induction Generator Model 124 4.5.1 Rotor Speed Instability 127 4.5.2 Modeling Issues 130 4.5.3 Frequency Conversion Using Voltage Source Converters 132 4.6 Control of Type IIIWTG System 133 4.6.1 Rotor-Side Converter Control 133 4.6.2 Grid-Side Converter Control 136 4.6.3 Overall Control Scheme for a Type III WTG system 137 4.6.4 Simplified Modeling of the Controllers for Slow Transient Studies 141 4.7 Control of Type IVWTG System 142 References 143 5 Modeling and Analysis of FACTS and HVDC Controllers 145 5.1 Introduction 145 5.2 FACTS Controllers 146 5.2.1 Description 146 5.2.2 A General Equivalent Circuit for FACTS Controllers 147 5.2.3 Benefits of the Application of FACTS Controllers 148 5.2.4 Application of FACTS Controllers in Distribution Systems 150 5.3 Reactive Power Control 150 Control Characteristics 153 5.4 Thyristor-Controlled Series Capacitor 153 5.4.1 Basic Concepts of Controlled Series Compensation 155 5.4.2 Operation of a TCSC 157 5.4.3 Analysis of a TCSC 158 5.4.4 Computation of the TCSC Reactance (XTCSC) 159 5.4.5 Control of the TCSC 161 5.5 Static Synchronous Compensator 166 5.5.1 General 166 5.5.2 Two-Level (Graetz Bridge) Voltage Source Converter 168 5.5.3 Pulse0020Width Modulation 169 5.5.4 Analysis of a Voltage Source Converter 171 5.5.5 Control of VSC 175 5.6 HVDC Power Transmission 177 5.6.1 Application of DC Transmission 178 5.6.2 Description of HVDC Transmission Systems 178 5.6.3 Analysis of a Line Commutated Converter 180 5.6.4 Introduction of VSC-HVDC Transmission 186 5.A Case Study of a VSC-HVDC Link 190 References 193 6 Damping of Power Swings 195 6.1 Introduction 195 6.2 Origin of Power Swings 196 6.3 SMIB Model with Field Flux Dynamics and AVR 199 6.3.1 Small-Signal Model and Eigenvalue Analysis 201 6.4 Damping and Synchronizing Torque Analysis 205 6.5 Analysis of Multi-Machine Systems 210 6.5.1 Electro-Mechanical Modes in a Multi-Machine System 210 6.5.2 Analysis with Detailed Models 216 6.6 Principles of Damping Controller Design 225 6.6.1 Actuator Location and Choice of Feedback Signals 229 6.6.2 Components of a PSDC 230 6.6.3 PSDCs based on Generator Excitation Systems: Power System Stabilizers 231 6.6.4 Adverse Torsional Interactions with the Speed/Slip Signal 237 6.6.5 Damping of Swings using Grid-Connected Power Electronic Systems 237 6.7 Concluding Remarks 241 6.A Eigenvalues of the Stiffness matrix K of Section 6.5.1 242 6.B Three-Machine Data 244 References 244 7 Analysis and Control of Loss of Synchronism 247 7.1 Introduction 247 7.2 Effect of LoS 247 7.3 Understanding the LoS Phenomenon 249 7.4 Criteria for Assessment of Stability 251 7.5 Power System Modeling and Simulation for Analysis of LoS 252 7.5.1 Effect of System Model 254 7.5.2 Effect of Changing Operating Conditions 255 7.6 Loss of Synchronism in Multi-Machine Systems 256 7.6.1 Effect of Disturbance Location on Mode of Separation: 258 7.6.2 Effect of the Load Model 258 7.6.3 Effect of Series Compensation in a Critical Line 260 7.6.4 Effect of a Change in the Pre-fault Generation Schedule 261 7.6.5 Voltage Phase Angular Differences across Critical Lines/Apparent Impedance seen by Relays 261 7.7 Measures to Avoid LoS 263 7.7.1 System Planning and Design 263 7.7.2 Preventive Control During Actual Operation 264 7.7.3 Emergency Control 264 7.8 Assessment and Control of LoS Using Energy Functions 265 7.8.1 Energy Function Method Applied to an SMIB System 266 7.8.2 Energy Function Method Applied to Multi-Machine Systems/Detailed Models 270 7.8.3 Evaluation of Critical Energy in a Multi-Machine System 274 7.9 Generation Rescheduling Using Energy Margin Sensitivities 274 7.9.1 Case Study: Generation Rescheduling 276 7.A Simulation Methods for Transient Stability Studies 276 7.A.1 Simultaneous Implicit Method 277 7.A.2 Partitioned Explicit Method 277 7.B Ten-Machine System Data 279 References 281 8 Analysis of Voltage Stability and Control 283 8.1 Introduction 283 8.2 Definitions of Voltage Stability 284 8.3 Comparison of Angle and Voltage Stability 286 8.3.1 Analysis of the SMLB System 287 8.4 Mathematical Preliminaries 290 8.5 Factors Affecting Instability and Collapse 292 8.5.1 Induction Motor Loads 292 8.5.2 HVDC Converter 293 8.5.3 Overexcitation Limiters 294 8.5.4 OLTC Transformers 295 8.5.5 A Nonlinear Dynamic Load Model 296 8.6 Dynamics of Load Restoration 296 8.7 Analysis of Voltage Stability and Collapse 298 8.7.1 Simulation 298 8.7.2 Small Signal (Linear) Analysis 298 8.8 Integrated Analysis of Voltage and Angle Stability 301 8.9 Analysis of Small Signal Voltage Instability Decoupled from Angle Instability 303 8.9.1 Decoupling of Angle and Voltage Variables 304 8.9.2 Incremental RCFN 305 8.9.3 Nonlinear Reactive Loads 306 8.9.4 Generator Model 306 Discussion 307 8.10 Control of Voltage Instability 308 References 308 9 Wide-AreaMeasurements and Applications 311 9.1 Introduction 311 9.2 Technology and Standards 311 9.2.1 Synchrophasor Definition 313 9.2.2 Reporting Rates 314 9.2.3 Latency and Data Loss 315 9.3 Modeling ofWAMS in Angular Stability Programs 315 9.4 Online Monitoring of Power Swing Damping 316 9.4.1 Modal Estimation based on Ringdown Analysis 317 9.4.2 Modal Estimation based on Probing Signals 319 9.4.3 Modal Estimation based on Ambient Data Analysis 323 9.5 WAMS Applications in Power Swing Damping Controllers 327 9.6 WAMS Applications in Emergency Control 330 9.7 Generator Parameter Estimation 335 9.8 Electro-MechanicalWave Propagation and Other Observations in Large Grids 335 References 338 10 Analysis of Subsynchronous Resonance 341 10.1 Introduction 341 10.2 Analysis of Electrical Network Dynamics 342 10.2.1 Equations in DQo Variables 344 10.2.2 Interfacing a DQ Network Model with a Generator Model 346 10.3 Torsional Dynamics of a Generator-Turbine System 353 10.3.1 Damping of Torsional Oscillations 359 10.3.2 Sensitivity of the Torsional Modes to the External Electrical System 360 10.4 Generator-Turbine and Network Interactions: Subsynchronous Resonance 362 10.4.1 Torsional Modes in Multi-Generator Systems 368 10.4.2 Adverse Interactions with Turbine-Generator Controllers 371 10.4.3 Detection of SSR/Torsional Monitoring 373 10.4.4 Countermeasures for Subsynchronous Resonance and Subsynchronous Torsional Interactions 374 10.4.5 Case Study: TCSC-Based SSDC 377 10.5 Time-InvariantModels of Grid-Connected Power Electronic Systems 378 10.5.1 Discrete-Time DynamicModels using the PoincaréMapping Technique 380 10.5.2 Dynamic Phasor-Based Modeling 380 10.5.3 Numerical Derivation of PES Models: A Frequency Scanning Approach 383 10.A Transfer Function Representation of the Network 385 References 386 11 Solar Power Generation and Energy Storage 391 11.1 Introduction 391 11.2 Solar Thermal Power Generation 392 11.3 Solar PV Power Generation 392 11.3.1 Solar Module I-V Characteristics 393 11.3.2 Solar PV Connections and Power Extraction Strategies 393 11.3.3 Power Electronic Converters for Solar PV Applications 395 11.3.4 Maximum Power Point Tracking Algorithms 397 11.3.5 Control of Grid-Connected Solar PV Plants 398 11.3.6 Low-Voltage Ride Through and Voltage Support Capability 400 11.4 Energy Storage 403 11.4.1 Attributes of Energy Storage Devices 404 11.4.2 Energy Storage Technologies 404 11.4.3 Mapping to Applications 406 11.4.4 Battery Modeling 410 References 412 12 Microgrids: Operation and Control 415 12.1 Introduction 415 12.2 Microgrid Concept 416 12.2.1 Definition of a Microgrid 416 12.2.2 Control System 417 12.3 Microgrid Architecture 419 12.4 Distribution Automation and Control 420 12.5 Operation and Control of Microgrids 421 12.5.1 DER Units 421 12.5.2 Microgrid Loads 423 12.5.3 DER Controls 423 12.5.4 Control Strategies under Grid-Connected Operation 425 12.5.5 Control Strategy for an Islanded Microgrid 427 12.6 Energy Management System 428 12.6.1 Microgrid Supervisory Control 429 12.6.2 Decentralized Microgrid Control based on a Multi-Agent System 430 12.6.3 IndustrialMicrogrid Controllers 431 12.7 Adaptive Network Protection in Microgrids 432 12.7.1 Protection Issues 433 12.7.2 Adaptive Protection 434 12.8 Dynamic Modeling of Distributed Energy Resources 435 12.8.1 Photovoltaic Array with MPP Tracker 435 12.8.2 Fuel Cells 437 12.8.3 Natural Gas Generator Set 438 12.8.4 Fixed-SpeedWind Turbine Driving SCIG 439 12.9 Some Operating Problems in Microgirds 442 12.10 Integration of DG and DS in a Microgrid 444 12.11 DC Microgrids 444 12.12 Future Trends and Conclusions 445 12.A A Three-Phase Model of an Induction Machine 448 References 452 A Equal Area Criterion 455 An Interesting Network Analogy 456 References 458 B Grid Synchronization and Current Regulation 459 Choice of Reference Frames 459 References 462 C Fryze–Buchbolz–Depenbrock Method for Load Compensation 463 C.1 Introduction 463 C.2 Description of FBDTheory 463 C.3 Power Theory in Multiconductor Circuits 466 Virtual Star Point 466 Collective Quantities 467 C.4 Examples 469 C.5 Load Characterization over a Period 470 C.6 Compensation of Non-Active Currents 471 Discussion 472 References 472 D Symmetrical Components and Per-Unit Representation 473 D.1 Symmetrical Component Representation of Three-Phase Systems 473 D.2 Per-Unit Representation 476 References 478 Index 479

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive collection of influential articles from one of IEEE Computer magazine's most popular columns This book is a compendium of extended and revised publications that have appeared in the Software Technologies column of IEEE Computer magazine, which covers key topics in software engineering such as software development, software correctness and related techniques, cloud computing, self-managing software and self-aware systems. Emerging properties of software technology are also discussed in this book, which will help refine the developing framework for creating the next generation of software technologies and help readers predict future developments and challenges in the field. Software Technology provides guidance on the challenges of developing software today and points readers to where the best advances are being made. Filled with one insightful article after another, the book serves to inform the conversation about the next wavTable of ContentsForeword xv Preface xix Acknowledgments xxiii List of Contributors xxv Part I The Software Landscape 1 1 Software Crisis 2.0 3Brian Fitzgerald 1.1 Software Crisis 1.0 3 1.2 Software Crisis 2.0 5 1.2.1 Hardware Advances 6 1.2.2 “Big Data” 8 1.2.3 Digital Natives Lifelogging and the Quantified Self 9 1.2.4 Software-Defined∗ 10 1.3 Software Crisis 2.0: The Bottleneck 10 1.3.1 Significant Increase in Volume of Software Required 11 1.3.2 New Skill Sets Required for Software Developers 12 1.4 Conclusion 13 References 14 2 Simplicity as a Driver for Agile Innovation 17Tiziana Margaria and Bernhard Steffen 2.1 Motivation and Background 17 2.2 Important Factors 20 2.3 The Future 22 2.4 Less Is More: The 80/20 Principle 27 2.5 Simplicity: A Never Ending Challenge 28 2.6 IT Specifics 29 2.7 Conclusions 29 Acknowledgments 30 References 30 3 Intercomponent Dependency Issues in Software Ecosystems 35Maëlick Claes, Alexandre Decan, and Tom Mens 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Problem Overview 36 3.2.1 Terminology 36 3.2.2 Identifying and Retrieving Dependency Information 38 3.2.3 Satisfying Dependencies and Conflicts 39 3.2.4 Component Upgrade 40 3.2.5 Inter-Project Cloning 41 3.3 First Case Study: Debian 42 3.3.1 Overview of Debian 42 3.3.2 Aggregate Analysis of Strong Conflicts 44 3.3.3 Package-Level Analysis of Strong Conflicts 45 3.4 Second Case Study: The R Ecosystem 46 3.4.1 Overview of R 46 3.4.2 R Package Repositories 47 3.4.3 Interrepository Dependencies 50 3.4.4 Intrarepository Dependencies 52 3.5 Conclusion 53 Acknowledgments 54 References 54 4 Triangulating Research Dissemination Methods: A Three-Pronged Approach to Closing the Research–Practice Divide 58Sarah Beecham, Ita Richardson, Ian Sommerville, Padraig O’Leary, Sean Baker, and John Noll 4.1 Introduction 58 4.2 Meeting the Needs of Industry 60 4.2.1 Commercialization Feasibility Study 61 4.2.2 Typical GSE Issues Were Reported 62 4.3 The Theory–Practice Divide 63 4.3.1 Making Research Accessible 64 4.3.2 Where Do Practitioners Really Go for Support? 65 4.4 Solutions: Rethinking Our Dissemination Methods 66 4.4.1 Workshops, Outreach, and Seminars 66 4.4.2 Case Studies 69 4.4.3 Action Research 70 4.4.4 Practitioner Ph.D.’s 71 4.4.5 Industry Fellowships 73 4.4.6 Commercializing Research 74 4.5 Obstacles to Research Relevance 76 4.5.1 The (IR) Relevance of Academic Software Engineering Research 76 4.5.2 Barriers to Research Commercialization 77 4.5.3 Academic Barriers to Commercialization 78 4.5.4 Business Barriers to Commercialization 79 4.5.5 Organizational Barriers to Commercialization 80 4.5.6 Funding Barriers to Commercialization 81 4.6 Conclusion 84 4.6.1 Research and Practice Working Together to Innovate 85 4.6.2 Final Thoughts 86 Acknowledgments 86 References 86 Part II Autonomous Software Systems 91 5 Apoptotic Computing: Programmed Death by Default for Software Technologies 93Roy Sterritt and Mike Hinchey 5.1 Biological Apoptosis 93 5.2 Autonomic Agents 94 5.3 Apoptosis within Autonomic Agents 96 5.4 NASA SWARM Concept Missions 98 5.5 The Evolving State-of-the-Art Apoptotic Computing 100 5.5.1 Strong versus Weak Apoptotic Computing 100 5.5.2 Other Research 101 5.6 “This Message Will Self-Destruct”: Commercial Applications 102 5.7 Conclusion 102 Acknowledgments 103 References 103 6 Requirements Engineering for Adaptive and Self-Adaptive Systems 107Emil Vassev and Mike Hinchey 6.1 Introduction 107 6.2 Understanding ARE 108 6.3 System Goals and Goals Models 109 6.4 Self-∗ Objectives and Autonomy-Assistive Requirements 111 6.4.1 Constraints and Self-∗ Objectives 113 6.4.2 Mission Analysis and Self-∗ Objectives 114 6.5 Recording and Formalizing Autonomy Requirements 116 6.5.1 ARE Requirements Chunk 117 6.6 Conclusion 118 Acknowledgments 119 References 119 7 Toward Artificial Intelligence through Knowledge Representation for Awareness 121Emil Vassev and Mike Hinchey 7.1 Introduction 121 7.2 Knowledge Representation 122 7.2.1 Rules 122 7.2.2 Frames 122 7.2.3 Semantic Networks and Concept Maps 122 7.2.4 Ontologies 123 7.2.5 Logic 123 7.2.6 Completeness and Consistency 124 7.2.7 Reasoning 125 7.2.8 Technologies 125 7.3 KnowLang 126 7.3.1 Modeling Knowledge with KnowLang 127 7.3.2 Knowledge Representation for Self-Adaptive Behavior 129 7.3.3 Case Study 129 7.4 Awareness 131 7.4.1 Classes of Awareness 132 7.4.2 Structuring Awareness 133 7.4.3 Implementing Awareness 134 7.5 Challenges and Conclusion 136 References 136 Part III Software Development and Evolution 139 8 Continuous Model-Driven Engineering 141Tiziana Margaria, Anna-Lena Lamprecht, and Bernhard Steffen 8.1 Introduction 141 8.2 Continuous Model-Driven Engineering 143 8.3 CMDE in Practice 147 8.4 Conclusion 150 Acknowledgment 150 References 151 9 Rethinking Functional Requirements: A Novel Approach Categorizing System and Software Requirements 155Manfred Broy 9.1 Introduction 155 9.2 Discussion: Classifying Requirements – Why and How 158 9.2.1 On Classifying Requirements as Being Functional 158 9.2.2 “Nonfunctional” Requirements and Their Characterization 159 9.2.3 Limitations of Classification Due to Heterogeneity and Lacking Precision 160 9.2.4 Approach: System Model-Based Categorization of Requirements 162 9.3 The System Model 164 9.3.1 The Basics: System Modeling Ontology 164 9.3.2 System Views and Levels of Abstractions 171 9.3.3 Structuring Systems into Views 172 9.4 Categorizing System Properties 172 9.4.1 System Behavior: Behavioral Properties 173 9.4.2 Variations in Modeling System Behavior 175 9.4.3 System Context: Properties of the Context 176 9.4.4 Nonbehavioral System Properties: System Representation 177 9.5 Categorizing Requirements 178 9.5.1 A Rough Categorization of Requirements 179 9.5.2 A Novel Taxonomy of Requirements? 183 9.6 Summary 186 Acknowledgments 187 References 187 10 The Power of Ten—Rules for Developing Safety Critical Code 188Gerard J. Holzmann 10.1 Introduction 188 10.2 Context 189 10.3 The Choice of Rules 190 10.4 Ten Rules for Safety Critical Code 192 10.5 Synopsis 200 References 201 11 Seven Principles of Software Testing 202Bertrand Meyer 11.1 Introduction 202 11.2 Defining Testing 202 11.3 Tests and Specifications 203 11.4 Regression Testing 204 11.5 Oracles 204 11.6 Manual and Automatic Test Cases 205 11.7 Testing Strategies 205 11.8 Assessment Criteria 206 11.9 Conclusion 207 References 207 12 Analyzing the Evolution of Database Usage in Data-Intensive Software Systems 208Loup Meurice, Mathieu Goeminne, Tom Mens, Csaba Nagy, Alexandre Decan, and Anthony Cleve 12.1 Introduction 208 12.2 State of the Art 210 12.2.1 Our Own Research 211 12.3 Analyzing the Usage of ORM Technologies in Database-Driven Java Systems 212 12.4 Coarse-Grained Analysis of Database Technology Usage 215 12.4.5 Discussion 222 12.5 Fine-Grained Analysis of Database Technology Usage 222 12.5.1 Analysis Background 222 12.5.2 Conceptual Schema 224 12.5.3 Metrics 226 12.5.4 Discussion 235 12.6 Conclusion 236 12.7 Future Work 237 Acknowledgments 238 References 238 Part IV Software Product Lines and Variability 41 13 Dynamic Software Product Lines 243Svein Hallsteinsen, Mike Hinchey, Sooyong Park, and Klaus Schmid 13.1 Introduction 243 13.2 Product Line Engineering 243 13.3 Software Product Lines 244 13.4 Dynamic SPLs 245 References 246 14 Cutting-Edge Topics on Dynamic Software Variability 247Rafael Capilla, Jan Bosch, and Mike Hinchey 14.1 Introduction 247 14.2 The Postdeployment Era 248 14.3 Runtime Variability Challenges Revisited 249 14.4 What Industry Needs from Variability at Any Time? 253 14.5 Approaches and Techniques for Dynamic Variability Adoption 255 14.6 Summary 266 14.7 Conclusions 267 References 268 Part V Formal Methods 271 15 The Quest for Formal Methods in Software Product Line Engineering 273Reiner Hähnle and Ina Schaefer 15.1 Introduction 273 15.2 SPLE: Benefits and Limitations 274 15.3 Applying Formal Methods to SPLE 275 15.4 The Abstract Behavioral Specification Language 277 15.5 Model-Centric SPL Development with ABS 279 15.6 Remaining Challenges 280 15.6.4 Maintenance 280 15.7 Conclusion 281 References 281 16 Formality, Agility, Security, and Evolution in Software Engineering 282Jonathan P. Bowen, Mike Hinchey, Helge Janicke, Martin Ward, and Hussein Zedan 16.1 Introduction 282 16.2 Formality 283 16.3 Agility 283 16.4 Security 284 16.5 Evolution 285 16.6 Conclusion 289 Acknowledgments 290 References 290 Part VI Cloud Computing 293 17 Cloud Computing: An Exploration of Factors Impacting Adoption 295Lorraine Morgan and Kieran Conboy 17.1 Introduction 295 17.2 Theoretical Background 296 17.3 Research Method 298 17.4 Findings and Analysis 303 17.4.2 Organizational Factors Impacting Adoption 306 17.4.3 Environmental Factors Impacting Adoption 308 17.5 Discussion and Conclusion 310 17.5.1 Limitations and Future Research 311 References 311 18 A Model-Centric Approach to the Design of Resource-Aware Cloud Applications 315Reiner Hähnle and Einar Broch Johnsen 18.1 Capitalizing on the Cloud 315 18.2 Challenges 316 18.2.1 Empowering the Designer 316 18.2.2 Deployment Aspects at Design Time 316 18.3 Controlling Deployment in the Design Phase 318 18.4 ABS: Modeling Support for Designing Resource-Aware Applications 319 18.5 Resource Modeling with ABS 320 18.6 Opportunities 324 18.6.1 Fine-Grained Provisioning 324 18.6.2 Tighter Provisioning 324 18.6.3 Application-Specific Resource Control 324 18.6.4 Application-Controlled Elasticity 324 18.7 Summary 325 Acknowledgments 325 References 325 Index 327

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplores how we judge engineering education in order to effectively redesign courses and programs that will prepare new engineers for various professional and academic careers Shows how present approaches to assessment were shaped and what the future holds Analyzes the validity of teaching and judging engineering education Shows the integral role that assessment plays in curriculum design and implementation Examines the sociotechnical system's impact on engineering curricula Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xv 1 Prologue 1 1.1 General Introduction: The Functions of Assessment 1 1.2 Health Warning: Ambiguities in the Use of the Term “Assessment” 6 1.3 The Assessment of Persons for the Professions 8 1.4 The Engineering Profession 10 1.5 The Development of Higher and Engineering Education as Areas of Academic Study in the 1960s 12 1.6 Assumptions About Examinations: Reliability 12 1.7 Myths Surrounding Examinations 14 1.8 The Introduction of Coursework Assessment 17 1.9 Rethinking Validity 19 1.10 Wastage (Dropout): The Predictive Value of School Examinations for Satisfactory Performance in Higher Education 20 1.11 Factors Influencing Performance in College Courses 22 1.12 Assessment: Results and Accountability 25 1.13 Assessing the Learner 26 Notes 27 References 27 2 Assessment and the Preparation of Engineers for Work 35 2.1 Engineers at Work 36 2.2 An Alternative Approach to the Education and Training of Engineers for Industry 37 2.3 Toward an Alternative Curriculum for Engineering 42 2.4 Creativity in Engineering and Design 43 2.5 Furneaux’s Study of a University’s Examinations in First-Year Mechanical Engineering: The Argument for “Objectives” 48 2.6 Discussion 51 Notes 53 References 54 3 The Development of a Multiple-Objective (Strategy) Examination and Multidimensional Assessment and Evaluation 61 3.1 The Development of an Advanced Level Examination in Engineering Science (For 17/18-Year-Old High School Students): The Assessment of Achievement and Competency 62 3.2 Skills Involved in Writing Design Proposals and Practical Laboratory Work 72 3.3 A Balanced System of Assessment 74 3.4 Pictures of the Curriculum Process 75 3.5 Multidimensional Assessment and Evaluation: A Case Study 79 3.6 Discussion 83 Notes 84 References 85 4 Categorizing the Work Done by Engineers: Implications for Assessment and Training 89 4.1 Introduction 90 4.2 A Study of Engineers at Work in a Firm in the Aircraft Industry 91 4.3 The Application of The Taxonomy of Educational Objectives to the Task Analysis of Managers in a Steel Plant 96 4.4 The Significance of Interpersonal Competence 96 4.5 A Comparative Study of British and German Production Engineers (Managers) 101 4.6 Engineering Knowledge 103 4.7 Discussion 105 Notes 105 References 107 5 Competency-Based Qualifications in the United Kingdom and United States and Other Developments 111 5.1 The Development of Competency-Based Vocational Qualifications in the United Kingdom 112 5.2 Outcomes Approaches in High Schools in the United Kingdom 115 5.3 Standards in Schools in the United States 116 5.4 Education for Capability: Capability vs. Competence 117 5.5 Ability (Assessment)-Led Curricula: The Alverno College Model 119 5.6 The Enterprise in Higher Education Initiative in the United Kingdom and the SCANS Report in the United States 122 5.7 The College Outcome Measures Program 125 5.8 Discussion 127 Notes 130 References 130 6 The Impact of Accreditation 133 6.1 ABET, European Higher Education Area (Bologna Process), and the Regulation of the Curriculum 134 6.2 Taxonomies 135 6.3 Outcomes-Based Engineering Education 142 6.4 Mastery Learning and Personalized Systems of Instruction 147 6.5 Discussion 152 References 152 7 Student Variability: The Individual the Organization, and Evaluation 157 7.1 Introduction 158 7.2 Learning and Teaching Styles 161 7.3 Study Habits/Strategies 163 7.4 Intellectual Development 165 7.5 Critical Thinking 168 7.6 The Assessment of Development 172 7.7 The Reflective Practitioner 174 7.8 Adaptive Expertise 180 7.9 Discussion 181 Notes 182 References 183 8 Emotional Intelligence, Peer and Self-Assessment, Journals and Portfolios, and Learning-How-to-Learn 189 8.1 Introduction 190 8.2 Emotional Intelligence 191 8.3 Self- and Peer Assessment 193 8.4 Learning Journals and Portfolios 206 8.5 Learning-How-to-Learn 209 8.6 Discussion 210 Note 211 References 211 9 Experiential Learning, Interdisciplinarity, Projects, and Teamwork 217 9.1 Introduction 218 9.2 Project Work as a Vehicle for Integrated Learning and Interdisciplinarity 219 9.3 Learning to Collaborate 220 9.4 Constructive Controversy 224 9.5 Communication Teamwork ,and Collegial Impediments to the Development of Good Engineering Practice 225 9.6 The Demand for Skill in Innovation: Can It Be Taught? 227 9.7 Creativity Teamwork and Reflective Practice (See Also Section 2.4) 228 9.8 Can Teamwork Be Taught? 229 9.9 Discussion 235 References 236 10 Competencies 241 10.1 Introduction 242 10.2 The Iowa Studies (ISU) 244 10.3 The Outcomes Approach in Australia Europe, and Elsewhere 246 10.4 The CDIO Initiative 247 10.5 A Standards-Based Approach to the Curriculum 248 10.6 Recent European Studies 252 10.7 Impact of Subjects (Courses) on Person-Centered Interventions 255 10.8 The Potential for Comparative Studies: Choosing Competencies 256 10.9 Expressive Outcomes 258 10.10 Discussion 259 References 260 11 “Outside” Competency 265 11.1 Introduction 266 11.2 Accidental Competencies 267 11.3 Understanding Competence at Work 269 11.4 Contextual Competence 270 11.5 A Post-Technician Cooperative Apprenticeship 272 11.6 Theories of Competence Development in Adult Life 275 11.7 Discussion 278 Notes 279 References 280 12 Assessment, Moral Purpose and Social Responsibility 283 12.1 Introduction 283 12.2 Moral Purpose and the Power of Grading 284 12.3 From Reliability to Validity: Toward a Philosophy of Engineering Education 284 12.4 Screening the Aims of Engineering Education 285 12.5 The Role of Educational Institutions in the Preparation for Industry (the Development of Professional Skills) 287 12.6 The Role of Industry in Professional Development 289 12.7 Assessment and the Curriculum 290 12.8 Changing Patterns in the Workforce the Structure of Higher Education 291 12.9 Lifelong Education and Credentialing 293 12.10 Conclusion 295 Notes 297 References 298 A A Quick Guide to the Changing Terminology in the Area of “Assessment” 301 A.1 Objectives and Outcomes 301 A.2 Assessment and Evaluation 307 References 308 B Extracts from the Syllabus and Notes for the Guidance of Schools for GCE Engineering Science (Advanced) 1972 Joint Matriculation Board Manchester 311 B. 1 Extract 1 (pp. 2–6) 311 B. 2 Extract 2 (p. 9) 317 B. 3 Extract 3 (pp. 13–16) 318 Author Index 325 Subject Index 339

Read more less

Book SynopsisA systematic guide to the theory, applications, and design of thermal management for LED packaging In Thermal Management for Opto-electronics Packaging and Applications, a team of distinguished engineers and researchers deliver an authoritative discussion of the fundamental theory and practical design required for LED product development. Readers will get a solid grounding in thermal management strategies and find up-to-date coverage of heat transfer fundamentals, thermal modeling, and thermal simulation and design. The authors explain cooling technologies and testing techniques that will help the reader evaluate device performance and accelerate the design and manufacturing cycle. In this all-inclusive guide to LED package thermal management, the book provides the latest advances in thermal engineering design and opto-electronic devices and systems. The book also includes: A thorough introduction to thermal conduction and solutions, including discussi

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive resource that provides the basic concepts of electric power systems, microeconomics, and optimization techniques Electricity Markets: Theories and Applications offers students and practitioners a clear understanding of the fundamental concepts of the economic theories, particularly microeconomic theories, as well as information on some advanced optimization methods of electricity markets. The authorsnoted experts in the fieldcover the basic drivers for the transformation of the electricity industry in both the United States and around the world and discuss the fundamentals of power system operation, electricity market design and structures, and electricity market operations. The text also explores advanced topics of power system operations and electricity market design and structure including zonal versus nodal pricing, market performance and market power issues, transmission pricing, and the emerging problems electricity markets face in sTable of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi 1 Introduction 1 2 Electric Power System 29 3 Microeconomic Theories 57 4 Power System Unit Commitment 97 5 Power System Economic Dispatch 119 6 Optimal Power Flow 147 7 Design, Structure, and Operation of an Electricity Market 173 8 Pricing, Modeling, and Simulation of an Electricity Market 211 9 Evaluation of an Electricity Market 239 10 Transmission Planning Under Electricity Market Regime 255 11 Electricity Market under a Future Grid 293 Index 315

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents the foundational systemic thinking needed to conceive systems that address complex socio-technical problems This book emphasizes the underlying systems analysis components and associated thought processes.Table of ContentsPreface ix Original Preface from Jack Gibson xiii Acknowledgments xv About the Companion Website xvii Part One: Primer 1. Introduction 3 1.1 What is a System? 4 1.2 Terminology Confusion 6 1.3 Systems Analysis Equals Operations Research Plus Policy Analysis 10 1.4 Attributes of Large-Scale Systems 11 1.5 Transportation Systems: An Example of a Large-Scale System 13 1.6 Systems Integration 16 1.7 What Makes a “Systems Analysis” Different? 17 1.8 Distant Roots of Systems Analysis 19 1.9 Immediate Precursors to Systems Analysis 20 1.10 Development of Systems Analysis as a Distinct Discipline: The Influence of RAND 23 References 26 2. Six Major Phases of Systems Analysis 28 2.1 The Systems Analysis Method: Six Major Phases 28 2.1.1 Determine Goals 28 2.1.2 Establish Criteria for Ranking Alternative Candidates 30 2.1.3 Develop Alternative Solutions 31 2.1.4 Rank Alternatives 32 2.1.5 Iterate 34 2.1.6 Action 35 2.2 The Goal-Centered or Top-Down Approach 35 2.3 The Index of Performance Concept 41 2.4 Developing Alternative Scenarios 45 2.5 Ranking Alternatives 47 2.6 Iteration and the “Error-Embracing” Approach 47 2.7 The Action Phase: The Life Cycle of a System 51 References 53 3. Goal Development 55 3.1 Seven Steps in Goal Development 55 3.2 On Generalizing the Question 59 3.3 The Descriptive Scenario 61 3.4 The Normative Scenario 63 3.5 The Axiological Component 63 3.6 Developing an Objectives Tree 67 3.7 Validate 73 3.8 Iterate 74 References 75 4. The Index of Performance 76 4.1 Introduction 76 4.2 Desirable Characteristics for an Index of Performance 78 4.3 Economic Criteria 81 4.4 Four Common Criteria of Economic Efficiency 83 4.5 Is There a Problem with Multiple Criteria? 86 4.6 What is Wrong with the B–C Ratio? 90 4.7 Can IRR be Fixed? 92 4.8 Expected Monetary Value 94 4.9 Nonmonetary Performance Indices 96 References 99 5. Develop and Evaluate Alternative Candidate Solutions 101 5.1 Introduction 101 5.2 The Classical Approach to Creativity 101 5.3 Concepts in Creativity 103 5.4 Brainstorming 104 5.5 Brainwriting 107 5.6 Dynamic Confrontation 109 5.7 Zwicky’s Morphological Box 110 5.8 The Options Field/Options Profile Approach 112 5.9 Computer Creativity 115 5.10 Trade Study Methods 116 5.11 Trade Study Example 120 References 127 6. The 10 Golden Rules of Systems Analysis 130 6.1 Introduction 130 6.2 Rule 1: There Always is a Client 131 6.3 Rule 2: Your Client Does Not Understand His Own Problem 132 6.4 Rule 3: The Original Problem Statement is too Specific: You Must Generalize the Problem to Give it Contextual Integrity 133 6.5 Rule 4: The Client Does Not Understand the Concept of the Index of Performance 135 6.6 Rule 5: You are the Analyst, Not the Decision Maker 137 6.7 Rule 6: Meet the Time Deadline and the Cost Budget 139 6.8 Rule 7: Take a Goal-Centered Approach to the Problem, not a Technology-Centered or Chronological Approach 140 6.9 Rule 8: Non-users Must Be Considered in the Analysis and in the Final Recommendations 141 6.10 Rule 9: The Universal Computer Model is a Fantasy 143 6.11 Rule 10: The Role of Decision Maker in Public Systems is Often a Confused One 143 References 145 Part Two: Casebook Cases in Systems Engineering 149 Introduction 149 The Case Study Method 151 What is a “Case”? 152 Implementing the Case Study Method 152 Chat Rooms and Polls 152 In-Class Group Activities 153 Case Study Assignments 153 Peer Review 154 The Case Studies 154 Using Case Studies to Build Teamwork and Communications Skills 154 Building the Systems Team 155 Tips on Managing the Team 156 How to Make an Effective Oral Presentation 157 How to Write a Report 162 Aligning Case Studies with the Ten Golden Rules of Systems Analysis 164 To Winnebago or to not Winnebago? 164 How can this Case be Used to Teach and Reinforce Systems Analysis? 169 A Word about the Cases 170 Validation of Learning: Evidence-Based Learning 170 Sample Evaluation Instrument: Exam with Solutions 171 Sample Evaluation Instrument: Exam without Solutions 176 Case 1: Great Buys 183 Case 2: Surf’s Up? 188 Case 3: Extended Engineering Education 189 Case 4: Systems Engineering Majors Proliferating 192 Case 5: Motor Carrier Safety and Compliance 193 Case 6: Is Getting There Half the Fun? 202 Case 7: Is Getting There Half the Fun? (Revisited) 206 Case 8: Which Camper Should We Choose? 210 Case 9: Seat Belt Issue 217 Case 10: Baseball Free Agent Draft—20xx 219 Case 11: For the Birds? 221 Case 12: Wal-Mart Crisis 222 Case 13: Ocean Cleanup 224 Case 14: BRAC 226 Case 15: Opportunity? 227 Case 16: Risky Business 228 Case 17: Corporate Headquarters 230 Case 18: The Ad Forecaster 231 Case 19: For the Birds (Revisited) 232 Case 20: Best MBA? 234 Case 21: Health Insurance? What Health Insurance? 235 Case 22: Social Media in Emergency Management 237 Case 23: Which Bridges to Repair? 241 Case 24: Going-to-the-Sun Road Rehabilitation Project 245 Case 25: HEV versus HOV? 256 Case 26: “Show Me the Money!” 259 Case 27: The Collections Subsidiary 261 Case 28: MNB One Credit Card Portfolio 266 Case 29: Select Collections 273 Case 30: To Distance or Not to Distance? Is That the Question? 278 Index 279

Read more less

Book SynopsisApplies basic field behavior in circuit design anddemonstrates how it relates togrounding and shielding requirements and techniques in circuit design This book connects the fundamentals of electromagnetic theory to the problems of interference in all types of electronic design. The text covers power distribution in facilities, mixing of analog and digital circuitry, circuit board layout at high clock rates, and meeting radiation and susceptibility standards. The author examines the grounding and shielding requirements and techniques in circuit design and applies basic physics to circuit behavior. The sixth edition of this book has been updated with new material added throughout the chapters where appropriate. The presentation of the book has also been rearranged in order to reflect the current trends in the field. Grounding and Shielding: Circuits and Interference, Sixth Edition: Includes new material on vias and field control, capacitTable of ContentsPreface to the Sixth Edition xi A Historical Perspective into Grounding and Shielding xv 1. Voltage and Capacitors 1 1.1. Introduction 1 1.2. Charges and Electrons 4 1.3. The Electric Force Field 6 1.4. Field Representations 6 1.5. The Definition of Voltage 9 1.6. Equipotential Surfaces 10 1.7. The Force Field or E Field Between Two Conducting Plates 11 1.8. Electric Field Patterns 12 1.9. The Energy Stored in An Electric Field 16 1.10. Dielectrics 17 1.11. The D Field 18 1.12. Capacitance 19 1.13. Mutual Capacitance 21 1.14. Displacement Current 22 1.15. Energy Stored in a Capacitor 23 1.16. Forces in the Electric Field 24 1.17. Capacitors 25 1.18. Dielectric Absorption 25 1.19. Resistance of Plane Conductors 26 2. Magnetics 27 2.1. Magnetic Fields 27 2.2. Ampere’s Law 29 2.3. The Solenoid 30 2.4. Faraday’s Law and the Induction Field 30 2.5. The Definition of Inductance 32 2.6. The Energy Stored in an Inductance 32 2.7. Magnetic Field Energy in Space 34 2.8. Electron Drift 36 2.9. The Magnetic Circuit 36 2.10. A Magnetic Circuit with a Gap 38 2.11. Small Inductors 39 2.12. Self- and Mutual Inductance 40 2.13. Transformer Action 40 2.14. Hysteresis and Permeability 45 2.15. Eddy Currents 46 3. Digital Electronics 48 3.1. Introduction 49 3.2. The Transport of Electrical Energy 49 3.3. Transmission Lines–Introduction 50 3.4. Transmission Line Operations 52 3.5. Transmission Line Field Patterns 54 3.6. A Terminated Transmission Line 54 3.7. The Unterminated Transmission Line 56 3.8. A Short Circuit Termination 58 3.9. The Real World 59 3.10. SineWaves Versus Step Voltages 60 3.11. A Bit of History 61 3.12. Ideal Conditions 61 3.13. Reflection and Transmission Coefficients 62 3.14. Taking Energy from an Ideal Energy Source 63 3.15. A Capacitor as a Transmission Line 63 3.16. Decoupling Capacitors and Natural Frequencies 65 3.17. Printed Circuit Boards 66 3.18. Two-Layer Logic Boards 67 3.19. Vias 68 3.20. The Termination of Transmission Lines 70 3.21. Energy in the Ground/Power Plane Capacitance 72 3.22. Poynting’s Vector 73 3.23. Skin Effect 74 3.24. Measurement Problems: Ground Bounce 75 3.25. Balanced Transmission 76 3.26. Ribbon Cable and Connectors 77 3.27. Interfacing Analog and Digital Circuits 78 4. Analog Circuits 80 4.1. Introduction 80 4.2. Instrumentation 81 4.3. History 83 4.4. The Basic Shield Enclosure 83 4.5. The Enclosure and Utility Power 86 4.6. The Two-Ground Problem 88 4.7. Instrumentation and the Two-Ground Problem 89 4.8. Strain-Gauge Instrumentation 92 4.9. The Floating Strain Gauge 93 4.10. The Thermocouple 95 4.11. The Basic Low-Gain Differential Amplifier (Forward Referencing Amplifer) 96 4.12. Shielding in Power Transformers 98 4.13. Calibration and Interference 99 4.14. The Guard Shield Above 100 kHz 100 4.15. Signal Flow Paths in Analog Circuits 101 4.16. Parallel Active Components 101 4.17. Feedback Stability–Introduction 102 4.18. Feedback Theory 103 4.19. Output Loads and Circuit Stability 105 4.20. Feedback Around a Power Stage 105 4.21. Constant Current Loops 106 4.22. Filters and Aliasing Errors 107 4.23. Isolation and DC-To-DC Converters 108 4.24. Charge Converter Basics 110 4.25. DC Power Supplies 113 4.26. Guard Rings 113 4.27. Thermocouple Effects 114 4.28. Some Thoughts on Instrumentation 114 5. Utility Power and Facility Grounding 115 5.1. Introduction 115 5.2. History 116 5.3. Semantics 116 5.4. Utility Power 117 5.5. The Earth as a Conductor 119 5.6. The Neutral Connection to Earth 120 5.7. Ground Potential Differences 122 5.8. Field Coupling to Power Conductors 124 5.9. Neutral Conductors 125 5.10. k Factor in Transformers 126 5.11. Power Factor Correction 127 5.12. Ungrounded Power 127 5.13. A Request for Power 128 5.14. Earth Power Currents 129 5.15. Line Filters 129 5.16. Isolated Grounds 130 5.17. Facility Grounds–Some More History 132 5.18. Ground Planes in Facilities 134 5.19. Other Ground Planes 137 5.20. Ground at Remote Sites 137 5.21. Extending Ground Planes 137 5.22. Lightning 138 5.23. Lightning and Facilities 139 5.24. Lightning Protection for Boats and Ships 141 5.25. Grounding of Boats and Ships at Dock 143 5.26. Aircraft Grounding (Fueling) 144 5.27. Ground Fault Interruption (GFI) 144 5.28. Isolation Transformers 145 5.29. Grounding and the Pacific Intertie 147 5.30. SolarWind 148 6. Radiation 149 6.1. Handling Radiation and Susceptibility 149 6.2. Radiation 150 6.3. SineWaves and Transmission Lines 151 6.4. Approximations for Pulses and SquareWaves 152 6.5. Radiation from Components 156 6.6. The Dipole Antenna 157 6.7. Wave Impedance 158 6.8. Field Strength and Antenna Gain 159 6.9. Radiation from Loops 160 6.10. E-Field Coupling to a Loop 162 6.11. Radiation from Printed Circuit Boards 163 6.12. The Sniffer and the Antenna 164 6.13. Microwave Ovens 165 7. Shielding from Radiation 166 7.1. Cables with Shields 166 7.2. Low-Noise Cables 168 7.3. Transfer Impedance 169 7.4. Waveguides 172 7.5. Electromagnetic Fields over a Ground Plane 173 7.6. Fields and Conductors 174 7.7. Conductive Enclosures–Introduction 175 7.8. Coupling Through EnclosureWalls by an Induction Field 176 7.9. Reflection and Absorption of Field Energy at a Conducting Surface 177 7.10. Independent Apertures 178 7.11. Dependent Apertures 179 7.12. Honeycombs 180 7.13. Summing Field Penetrations 181 7.14. Power Line Filters 182 7.15. Backshell Connectors 184 7.16. H-Field Coupling 186 7.17. Gaskets 186 7.18. Finger Stock 187 7.19. Glass Apertures 188 7.20. Guarding Large Transistors 188 7.21. Mounting Components on Surfaces 188 7.22. Zappers 190 7.23. Shielded and Screen Rooms 190 AppendixA. The Decibel 192 Further Reading 194 Index 195

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book examines how Fog will change the information technology industry in the next decade. Fog distributes the services of computation, communication, control and storage closer to the edge, access and users. As a computing and networking architecture, Fog enables key applications in wireless 5G, the Internet of Things, and big data.Table of ContentsContributors xi Introduction 1Bharath Balasubramanian, Mung Chiang, and Flavio Bonomi I.1 Summary of Chapters 5 I.2 Acknowledgments 7 References 8 I Communication and Management of Fog 11 1 ParaDrop: An Edge Computing Platform in Home Gateways 13Suman Banerjee, Peng Liu, Ashish Patro, and Dale Willis 1.1 Introduction 13 1.1.1 Enabling Multitenant Wireless Gateways and Applications through ParaDrop 14 1.1.2 ParaDrop Capabilities 15 1.2 Implementing Services for the ParaDrop Platform 17 1.3 Develop Services for ParaDrop 19 1.3.1 A Security Camera Service Using ParaDrop 19 1.3.2 An Environmental Sensor Service Using ParaDrop 22 References 23 2 Mind Your Own Bandwidth 24Carlee Joe-Wong, Sangtae Ha, Zhenming Liu, Felix Ming Fai Wong, and Mung Chiang 2.1 Introduction 24 2.1.1 Leveraging the Fog 25 2.1.2 A Home Solution to a Home Problem 25 2.2 Related Work 28 2.3 Credit Distribution and Optimal Spending 28 2.3.1 Credit Distribution 29 2.3.2 Optimal Credit Spending 31 2.4 An Online Bandwidth Allocation Algorithm 32 2.4.1 Estimating Other Gateways’ Spending 32 2.4.2 Online Spending Decisions and App Prioritization 34 2.5 Design and Implementation 35 2.5.1 Traffic and Device Classification 37 2.5.2 Rate Limiting Engine 37 2.5.3 Traffic Prioritization Engine 38 2.6 Experimental Results 39 2.6.1 Rate Limiting 39 2.6.2 Traffic Prioritization 41 2.7 Gateway Sharing Results 41 2.8 Concluding Remarks 45 Acknowledgments 46 Appendix 2.A 46 2.A.1 Proof of Lemma 2.1 46 2.A.2 Proof of Lemma 2.2 46 2.A.3 Proof of Proposition 2.1 47 2.A.4 Proof of Proposition 2.2 48 2.A.5 Proof of Proposition 2.3 49 2.A.6 Proof of Proposition 2.4 49 References 50 3 Socially-Aware Cooperative D2D and D4D Communications toward Fog Networking 52Xu Chen, Junshan Zhang, and Satyajayant Misra 3.1 Introduction 52 3.1.1 From Social Trust and Social Reciprocity to D2D Cooperation 54 3.1.2 Smart Grid: An IoT Case for Socially-Aware Cooperative D2D and D4D Communications 55 3.1.3 Summary of Main Results 57 3.2 Related Work 58 3.3 System Model 59 3.3.1 Physical (Communication) Graph Model 60 3.3.2 Social Graph Model 61 3.4 Socially-Aware Cooperative D2D and D4D Communications toward Fog Networking 62 3.4.1 Social Trust-Based Relay Selection 63 3.4.2 Social Reciprocity-Based Relay Selection 63 3.4.3 Social Trust and Social Reciprocity-Based Relay Selection 68 3.5 Network Assisted Relay Selection Mechanism 69 3.5.1 Reciprocal Relay Selection Cycle Finding 69 3.5.2 NARS Mechanism 70 3.5.3 Properties of NARS Mechanism 73 3.6 Simulations 75 3.6.1 Erdos–Renyi Social Graph 76 3.6.2 Real Trace Based Social Graph 78 3.7 Conclusion 82 Acknowledgments 82 References 83 4 You Deserve Better Properties (From Your Smart Devices) 86Steven Y. Ko 4.1 Why We Need to Provide Better Properties 86 4.2 Where We Need to Provide Better Properties 87 4.3 What Properties We Need to Provide and How 88 4.3.1 Transparency 88 4.3.2 Predictable Performance 93 4.3.3 Openness 99 4.4 Conclusions 102 Acknowledgment 102 References 103 II Storage and Computation in Fog 107 5 Distributed Caching for Enhancing Communications Efficiency 109A. Salman Avestimehr and Andreas F. Molisch 5.1 Introduction 109 5.2 Femtocaching 111 5.2.1 System Model 111 5.2.2 Adaptive Streaming from Helper Stations 114 5.3 User-Caching 115 5.3.1 Cluster-Based Caching and D2D Communications 115 5.3.2 IT LinQ-Based Caching and Communications 118 5.3.3 Coded Multicast 126 5.4 Conclusions and Outlook 130 References 131 6 Wireless Video Fog: Collaborative Live Streaming with Error Recovery 133Bo Zhang, Zhi Liu, and S.-H. Gary Chan 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 Related Work 136 6.3 System Operation and Network Model 138 6.4 Problem Formulation and Complexity 140 6.4.1 NC Packet Selection Optimization 140 6.4.2 Broadcaster Selection Optimization 143 6.4.3 Complexity Analysis 144 6.5 VBCR: A Distributed Heuristic for Live Video with Cooperative Recovery 144 6.5.1 Initial Information Exchange 145 6.5.2 Cooperative Recovery 145 6.5.3 Updated Information Exchange 147 6.5.4 Video Packet Forwarding 147 6.6 Illustrative Simulation Results 150 6.7 Concluding Remarks 156 References 156 7 Elastic Mobile Device Clouds: Leveraging Mobile Devices to Provide Cloud Computing Services at the Edge 159Karim Habak, Cong Shi, Ellen W. Zegura, Khaled A. Harras, and Mostafa Ammar 7.1 Introduction 159 7.2 Design Space with Examples 161 7.2.1 Mont-Blanc 162 7.2.2 Computing while Charging 163 7.2.3 FemtoCloud 164 7.2.4 Serendipity 166 7.3 FemtoCloud Performance Evaluation 168 7.3.1 Experimental Setup 168 7.3.2 FemtoCloud Simulation Results 169 7.3.3 FemtoCloud Prototype Evaluation 173 7.4 Serendipity Performance Evaluation 175 7.4.1 Experimental Setup 175 7.4.2 Serendipity’s Performance Benefits 176 7.4.3 Impact of Network Environment 179 7.4.4 The Impact of the Job Properties 182 7.5 Challenges 186 References 186 III Applications of Fog 189 8 The Role of Fog Computing in the Future of the Automobile 191Flavio Bonomi, Stefan Poledna, and Wilfried Steiner 8.1 Introduction 191 8.2 Current Automobile Electronic Architectures 193 8.3 Future Challenges of Automotive E/E Architectures and Solution Strategies 195 8.4 Future Automobiles as Fog Nodes on Wheels 200 8.5 Deterministic FOG Nodes on Wheels Through Real-Time Computing and Time-Triggered Technologies 203 8.5.1 Deterministic Fog Node Addressing the Scalability Challenge through Virtualization 203 8.5.2 Deterministic Fog Node Addressing the Connectivity and Security Challenges 204 8.5.3 Emerging Use Case of Deterministic Fog Nodes in Automotive Applications—Vehicle-Wide Virtualization 206 8.6 Conclusion 209 References 209 9 Geographic Addressing for Field Networks 211Robert J. Hall 9.1 Introduction 211 9.1.1 Field Networking 211 9.1.2 Challenges of Field Networking 212 9.2 Geographic Addressing 214 9.3 SAGP: Wireless GA in the Field 215 9.3.1 SAGP Processing 216 9.3.2 SAGP Retransmission Heuristics 217 9.3.3 Example of SAGP Packet Propagation 218 9.3.4 Followcast: Efficient SAGP Streaming 219 9.3.5 Meeting the Challenges 220 9.4 Georouting: Extending GA to the Cloud 221 9.5 SGAF: A Multi-Tiered Architecture for Large-Scale GA 222 9.5.1 Bridging Between Tiers 223 9.5.2 Hybrid Security Architecture 225 9.6 The AT&T Labs Geocast System 225 9.7 Two GA Applications 226 9.7.1 PSCommander 226 9.7.2 Geocast Games 230 9.8 Conclusions 232 References 232 10 Distributed Online Learning and Stream Processing for a Smarter Planet 234Deepak S. Turaga and Mihaela van der Schaar 10.1 Introduction: Smarter Planet 234 10.2 Illustrative Problem: Transportation 237 10.3 Stream Processing Characteristics 238 10.4 Distributed Stream Processing Systems 239 10.4.1 State of the Art 239 10.4.2 Stream Processing Systems 240 10.5 Distributed Online Learning Frameworks 244 10.5.1 State of the Art 244 10.5.2 Systematic Framework for Online Distributed Ensemble Learning 247 10.5.3 Online Learning of the Aggregation Weights 250 10.5.4 Collision Detection Application 254 10.6 What Lies Ahead 257 Acknowledgment 258 References 258 11 Securing the Internet of Things: Need for a New Paradigm and Fog Computing 261Tao Zhang, Yi Zheng, Raymond Zheng, and Helder Antunes 11.1 Introduction 261 11.2 New IoT Security Challenges That Necessitate Fundamental Changes to the Existing Security Paradigm 263 11.2.1 Many Things Will Have Long Life Spans but Constrained and Difficult-to-Upgrade Resources 264 11.2.2 Putting All IoT Devices Inside Firewalled Castles Will Become Infeasible or Impractical 264 11.2.3 Mission-Critical Systems Will Demand Minimal-Impact Incident Responses 265 11.2.4 The Need to Know the Security Status of a Vast Number of Devices 266 11.3 A New Security Paradigm for the Internet of Things 268 11.3.1 Help the Less Capable with Fog Computing 269 11.3.2 Scale Security Monitoring to Large Number of Devices with Crowd Attestation 272 11.3.3 Dynamic Risk–Benefit-Proportional Protection with Adaptive Immune Security 277 11.4 Summary 281 Acknowledgment 281 References 281 Index 285

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis new edition specifically addresses the most recent and relevant developments in the design and manufacture of OLED displays Provides knowledge of OLED fundamentals and related technologies for applications such as displays and solid state lighting along with processing and manufacturing technologies Serves as a reference for people engaged in OLED research, manufacturing, applications and marketing Includes coverage of white + color filter technology, which has become industry standard technology for large televisions Table of ContentsAbout the Author xi Preface xiii Series Editor’s Foreword to the Second Edition xv 1 Introduction 1 References 5 2 OLED Devices 7 2.1 OLED Definition 7 2.1.1 History of OLED Research and Development 7 2.1.2 Luminescent Effects in Nature 8 2.1.3 Difference Between OLED, LED, and Inorganic ELs 11 2.1.3.1 Inorganic EL 11 2.1.3.2 LED 11 2.2 Basic Device Structure 12 2.3 Basic Light Emission Mechanism 14 2.3.1 Potential Energy of Molecules 14 2.3.2 Highest Occupied and Lowest Unoccupied Molecular Orbitals (HOMO and LUMO) 15 2.3.3 Configuration of Two Electrons 17 2.3.4 Spin Function 20 2.3.5 Singlet and Triplet Excitons 20 2.3.6 Charge Injection from Electrodes 24 2.3.6.1 Charge Injection by Schottky Thermionic Emission 25 2.3.6.2 Tunneling Injection 28 2.3.6.3 Vacuum-Level Shift 28 2.3.7 Charge Transfer and Recombination 29 2.3.7.1 Charge Transfer Behavior 29 2.3.7.2 Space-Charge-Limited Current 29 2.3.7.3 Poole–Frenkel conduction 32 2.3.7.4 Recombination and Generation of Excitons 33 2.4 Emission Efficiency 36 2.4.1 Internal/External Quantum Efficiency 36 2.4.2 Energy Conversion and Quenching 37 2.4.2.1 Internal Conversion 37 2.4.2.2 Intersystem Crossing 37 2.4.2.3 Doping 38 2.4.2.4 Quenching 40 2.4.3 Outcoupling Efficiency of OLED Display 42 2.4.3.1 Light Output Distribution 42 2.4.3.2 Snell’s Law and Critical Angle 43 2.4.3.3 Loss Due to Light Extraction 44 2.4.3.4 Performance Enhancement by Molecular Alignment 45 2.5 Lifetime and Image Burning 46 2.5.1 Lifetime Definitions 46 2.5.2 Degradation Analysis and Design Optimization 47 2.5.3 Degradation Measurement and Mechanisms 50 2.5.3.1 Acceleration Factor and Temperature Contribution 50 2.5.3.2 Degradation Mechanism Variation 50 2.6 Technologies to Enhance the Device Performance 51 2.6.1 Thermally Activated Delayed Fluorescence 51 2.6.2 Other Types of Excited States 53 2.6.2.1 Excimer and Exciplex 53 2.6.2.2 Charge-Transfer Complex 53 2.6.3 Charge Generation Layer 54 References 56 3 OLED Manufacturing Process 61 3.1 Material Preparation 61 3.1.1 Basic Material Properties 61 3.1.1.1 Hole Injection Material 61 3.1.1.2 Hole Transportation Material 62 3.1.1.3 Emission Layer Material 62 3.1.1.4 Electron Transportation Material and Charge Blocking Material 63 3.1.2 Purification Process 67 3.2 Evaporation Process 68 3.2.1 Principle 68 3.2.2 Evaporation Sources 72 3.2.2.1 Resistive Heating Method 72 3.2.2.2 Electron Beam Evaporation 75 3.2.2.3 Monitoring Thickness Using a Quartz Oscillator 76 3.3 Encapsulation 79 3.3.1 Dark Spot and Edge Growth Defects 79 3.3.2 Light Emission from the Bottom and Top of the OLED Device 80 3.3.3 Bottom Emission and perimeter sealing 81 3.3.4 Top Emission 82 3.3.5 Encapsulation Technologies and Measurement 83 3.3.5.1 Thin-Film Encapsulation 84 3.3.5.2 Face Sealing Encapsulation 87 3.3.5.3 Frit Encapsulation 88 3.3.5.4 WVTR Measurement 88 3.4 Problem Analysis 91 3.4.1 Ionization Potential Measurement 91 3.4.2 Electron Affinity Measurement 92 3.4.3 HPLC Analysis 93 3.4.4 Cyclic Voltammetry 94 References 96 4 OLED Display Module 99 4.1 Comparison Between OLED and LCD Modules 99 4.2 Basic Display Design and Related Characteristics 101 4.2.1 Luminous Intensity, Luminance, and Illuminance 101 4.2.1.1 Luminous Intensity 101 4.2.1.2 Luminance 102 4.2.1.3 Illuminance 103 4.2.1.4 Metrics Summary 104 4.2.1.5 Helmholtz–Kohlrausch Effect 106 4.2.2 OLED Current Efficiencies and Power Efficacies 106 4.2.3 Color Reproduction 109 4.2.4 Uniform Color Space 115 4.2.5 White Point Determination 116 4.2.6 Color Boost 119 4.2.7 Viewing Condition 120 4.3 Passive-Matrix OLED Display 121 4.3.1 Structure 121 4.3.2 Pixel Driving 122 4.4 Active-Matrix OLED Display 125 4.4.1 OLED Module Components 125 4.4.2 Two-Transistor One-Capacitor (2T1C) Driving Circuit 127 4.4.3 Ambient Performance 136 4.4.3.1 Living Room Contrast Ratio 136 4.4.3.2 Chroma Reduction Due to Ambient Light 137 4.4.4 Subpixel Rendering 138 References 139 5 OLED Color Patterning Technologies 143 5.1 Color-Patterning Technologies 143 5.1.1 Shadow Mask Patterning 143 5.1.1.1 Shadow Mask Process 143 5.1.1.2 Blue Common Layer 146 5.1.1.3 Polychromatic Pixel 147 5.1.2 White+Color Filter Patterning 148 5.1.3 Color Conversion Medium (CCM) Patterning 149 5.1.4 Laser-Induced Thermal Imaging (LITI) Method 149 5.1.5 Radiation-Induced Sublimation Transfer (RIST) Method 151 5.1.6 Dual-Plate OLED Display (DOD) Method 152 5.1.7 Other Methods 153 5.2 Solution-Processed Materials and Technologies 153 5.3 Next-Generation OLED Manufacturing Tools 158 5.3.1 Vapor Injection Source Technology (VIST) Deposition 158 5.3.2 Hot-Wall Method 163 5.3.3 Organic Vapor-Phase Deposition (OVPD) Method 164 References 165 6 TFT and Driving for Active-Matrix Display 167 6.1 TFT Structure 167 6.2 TFT Process 169 6.2.1 Low-Temperature Polysilicon Process Overview 169 6.2.2 Thin-Film Formation 172 6.2.3 Patterning Technique 173 6.2.4 Excimer Laser Crystallization 177 6.3 MOSFET Basics 180 6.4 LTPS-TFT-Driven OLED Display Design 183 6.4.1 OFF Current 183 6.4.2 Driver TFT Size Restriction 184 6.4.3 Restriction Due to Voltage Drop 185 6.4.4 LTPS-TFT Pixel Compensation Circuit 190 6.4.4.1 Voltage Programming 190 6.4.4.2 Current Programming 192 6.4.4.3 External Compensation Method 193 6.4.4.4 Digital Driving 194 6.4.5 Circuit Integration by LTPS-TFT 197 6.5 TFT Technologies for OLED Displays 200 6.5.1 Selective Annealing Method 200 6.5.1.1 Sequential Lateral Solidification (SLS) Method 200 6.5.1.2 Selective Annealing by Microlens Array 200 6.5.2 Microcrystalline and Superamorphous Silicon 202 6.5.3 Solid-Phase Crystallization 205 6.5.3.1 MIC and MILC Methods 205 6.5.3.2 AMFC Method 205 6.5.4 Oxide Semiconductors 207 References 210 7 OLED Television Applications 215 7.1 Performance Target 215 7.2 Scalability Concept 217 7.2.1 Relationship between Defect Density and Production Yield 217 7.2.1.1 Purpose of Yield Simulation 217 7.2.1.2 Defective Pixel Number Estimation Using the Poisson Equation 217 7.2.2 Scalable Technology 217 7.2.2.1 Scalability 218 7.3 Murdoch’s Algorithm to Achieve Low Power and Wide Color Gamut 219 7.3.1 A Method for Achieving Both Low Power and Wide Color Gamut 219 7.3.2 RGBW Driving Algorithm 221 7.4 An Approach to Achieve 100% NTSC Color Gamut With Low Power Consumption Using White + Color Filter 224 7.4.1 Consideration of Performance Difference between W-RGB and W-RGBW Method 224 7.4.1.1 Issues of White+Color Filter Method for Large Displays 224 7.4.1.2 Analysis of W-RGBW Approach to Circumvent Its Trade-off Situation 224 7.4.1.3 Design of a Prototype to Demonstrate That Low Power Consumption Can Be Achieved with Large Color Gamut 229 7.4.1.4 Product-Level Performance Demonstration by the Combination of Scalable Technologies 230 References 233 8 New OLED Applications 235 8.1 Flexible Display/Wearable Displays 235 8.1.1 Flexible Display Applications 235 8.1.2 Flexible Display Substrates 235 8.1.3 Laser Liftoff Process 236 8.1.4 Barrier Technology for Flexible Displays 240 8.1.5 Organic TFTs for Flexible Displays 241 8.1.5.1 Organic Semiconductor Materials 242 8.1.5.2 Organic TFT Device Structure and Processing 243 8.1.5.3 Organic TFT Characteristics 245 8.2 Transparent Displays 245 8.3 Tiled Display 247 8.3.1 Passive-Matrix Tiling 247 8.3.2 Active-Matrix Tiling 248 References 252 9 OLED Lighting 255 9.1 Performance Improvement of OLED Lighting 255 9.2 Color Rendering Index 257 9.3 OLED Lighting Requirement 259 9.3.1 Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) 260 9.3.2 Other Requirements 262 9.4 Light Extraction Enhancement of OLED Lighting 262 9.4.1 Various Light Absorption Mechanisms 262 9.4.2 Microlens Array Structure 266 9.4.3 Diffusion Structure 266 9.4.4 Diffraction Structure 268 9.4.5 Reduction of Plasmon Absorption 268 9.4.5.1 Plasmonic Loss Mechanism 268 9.5 Color Tunable OLED Lighting 269 9.6 OLED Lighting Design 272 9.6.1 Resistance Reduction 272 9.6.2 Current Reduction 272 9.7 Roll-to-Roll OLED Lighting Manufacturing 273 References 275 Appendix 277 Index 281

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn all-in-one guide to high-voltage, multi-terminal converters, this book brings together the state of the art and cutting-edge techniques in the various stages of designing and constructing a high-voltage converter. The book includes 9 chapters, and can be classified into three aspects. First, all existing high-voltage converters are introduced, including the conventional two-level converter, and the multi-level converters, such as the modular multi-level converter (MMC). Second, different kinds of multi-terminal high-voltage converters are presented in detail, including the topology, operation principle, control scheme and simulation verification. Third, some common issues of the proposed multi-terminal high-voltage converters are discussed, and different industrial applications of the proposed multi-terminal high-voltage converters are provided. Systematically proposes, for the first time, the design methodology for high-voltage converters in use of MTDC grids; also Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface xiii Acknowledgments xv 1 Overview of High-voltage Converters 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Classification of High-voltage High-Power Converters 5 1.2.1 Two-Level Converters 5 1.2.2 Multilevel Converters 7 1.3 Topologies of Multilevel Converters 8 1.3.1 Neutral-Point Clamped Converter 8 1.3.2 Flying Capacitor Converter 10 1.3.3 Cascaded H-bridge Converter 11 1.3.4 Modular Multilevel Converter 13 1.3.5 Active Neutral-Point Clamped Converter 16 1.3.6 Hybrid Multilevel Converters 19 1.4 Modulation Methods of Multilevel Converter 22 1.4.1 Space-Vector Modulation 24 1.4.2 Multicarrier Pulse-Width Modulation 24 1.4.3 Selective Harmonic Elimination Modulation 25 1.4.4 Nearest-Level Control Method 26 1.4.5 Hybrid Modulation 27 1.5 Architecture of Multi-terminal High-voltage Converter 27 1.6 Arrangement of this Book 31 References 32 2 Multiple-Bridge-Module High-voltage Converters 35 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 Configuration of Bridge Module 35 2.2.1 Half-Bridge Module 36 2.2.2 Full-Bridge Module 37 2.3 Single-Phase Half-Bridge-Module High-voltage Converter 39 2.3.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 39 2.3.2 Control Scheme 41 2.3.3 Output Voltage Verification 43 2.3.4 Simplified Single-Phase Half-Bridge Module 43 2.4 Three-Phase Half-Bridge-Module High-voltage Converter 45 2.4.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 45 2.4.2 Control Scheme 47 2.4.3 Output Voltage Verification 49 2.5 Three-Phase Four-Leg Half-Bridge-Module High-voltage Converter 51 2.6 Full-Bridge-Module High-voltage Converter 51 2.7 Advantages of Multiple-Bridge-Module Converter 53 2.8 Summary 54 References 54 3 Single-InputMultiple-Output High-voltage DC–AC Converters 55 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 Single-Input Dual-Output Half-Bridge Single-Phase DC–AC Converter 55 3.2.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 55 3.2.2 Control Scheme 57 3.2.3 Output Voltage Verification 59 3.3 Single-Input Dual-Output Full-Bridge Single-Phase DC–AC Converter 60 3.3.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 60 3.3.2 Control Scheme 62 3.3.3 Output Voltage Verification 62 3.4 Single-Input Dual-Output Three-Phase DC–AC Converter 64 3.4.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 64 3.4.2 Control Scheme 64 3.4.3 Output Voltage Verification 66 3.5 Single-InputMultiple-Output Half-Bridge Single-Phase DC–AC Converter 67 3.5.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 67 3.5.2 Control Scheme 69 3.5.3 Output Voltage Verification 70 3.6 Single-InputMultiple-Output Full-Bridge Single-Phase DC–AC Converter 72 3.6.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 72 3.6.2 Control Scheme 72 3.6.3 Output Voltage Verification 75 3.7 Single-InputMultiple-Output Three-Phase DC–AC Converter 75 3.7.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 75 3.7.2 Control Scheme 77 3.7.3 Output Voltage Verification 77 3.8 Summary 79 References 79 4 Multiple-Input Single-Output High-voltage AC–DC Converters 81 4.1 Introduction 81 4.2 Single-PhaseThree-Arm Dual-Input Single-Output AC–DC Converter 81 4.2.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 81 4.2.2 Control Scheme 83 4.2.3 Performance Verification 84 4.3 Single-Phase Six-Arm Dual-Input Single-Output AC–DC Converter 84 4.3.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 84 4.3.2 Control Scheme 88 4.3.3 Performance Verification 89 4.4 Three-Phase Nine-Arm Dual-Input Single-Output AC–DC Converter 93 4.4.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 93 4.4.2 Control Scheme 93 4.4.3 Performance Verification 95 4.5 Single-Phase M-Arm Multiple-Input Single-Output AC–DC Converter 95 4.5.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 95 4.5.2 Control Scheme 98 4.5.3 Performance Verification 100 4.6 Single-Phase 2M-Arm Multiple-Input Single-Output AC–DC Converter 100 4.6.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 100 4.6.2 Control Scheme 104 4.6.3 Performance Verification 105 4.7 Three-Phase 3M-Arm Multiple-Input Single-Output AC–DC Converter 106 4.7.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 106 4.7.2 Control Scheme 106 4.7.3 Performance Verification 110 4.8 Summary 110 References 112 5 Multiple-InputMultiple-Output High-voltage AC–AC Converters 113 5.1 Introduction 113 5.2 Single-Phase Single-Input Single-Output AC–AC Converter 113 5.2.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 113 5.2.2 Control Scheme 114 5.2.3 Output Voltage Verification 117 5.3 Three-Phase Single-Input Single-Output AC–AC Converter 117 5.3.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 117 5.3.2 Control Scheme 118 5.3.3 Output Voltage Verification 120 5.4 Single-Phase Multiple-terminal AC–AC Converter 122 5.4.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 122 5.4.2 Control Scheme 124 5.4.3 Output Voltage Verification 125 5.5 Three-Phase Multiple-terminal AC–AC Converter 125 5.5.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 125 5.5.2 Control Scheme 126 5.5.3 Output Voltage Verification 129 5.6 Summary 133 References 133 6 Multiple-terminal High-voltage DC–DC Converters 135 6.1 Introduction 135 6.2 Single-Input Dual-Output DC–DC Converter 135 6.2.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 135 6.2.2 Control Scheme 136 6.2.3 Simulation Verification 138 6.3 Single-InputMultiple-Output DC–DC Converter 138 6.3.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 138 6.3.2 Control Scheme 141 6.3.3 Simulation Verification 143 6.4 Multiple-InputMultiple-Output DC–DC Converter 143 6.5 Summary 146 References 146 7 Multiple-terminal High-voltage Hybrid Converters 147 7.1 Introduction 147 7.2 Six-Arm Hybrid Converter with Single-Phase AC Input 147 7.2.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 147 7.2.2 Control Scheme 149 7.2.3 Simulation Verification 151 7.3 Nine-Arm Hybrid Converter with Three-Phase AC Input 151 7.3.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 151 7.3.2 Control Scheme 152 7.3.3 Simulation Verification 153 7.4 Multiple-Arm Hybrid Converter 153 7.4.1 Basic Structure and Operating Principle 153 7.4.2 Control Scheme 158 7.5 Summary 159 References 159 8 Short-Circuit Protection for High-voltage Converters 161 8.1 Introduction 161 8.2 Modular DC Circuit Breaker 162 8.3 Sub-Modules with DC Fault-Handling Capability 165 8.3.1 Full-Bridge Sub-Module 165 8.3.2 Clamp-Double Sub-Module 166 8.3.3 Unipolar-Voltage Sub-Module 167 8.3.4 Cross-Connected Sub-Module 168 8.3.5 Series-Connected Double Sub-Module 170 8.4 Configuration of the Hybrid Multi-terminal High-voltage Converter 171 8.5 Summary 174 References 175 9 Common Techniques and Applications of Multi-terminal High-voltage Converters 177 9.1 Introduction 177 9.2 Capacitor Voltage Control Scheme for Multi-terminal High-voltage Converters 177 9.2.1 Single-Input Dual-Output DC–AC Converter 177 9.2.2 Single-Phase Multiple-Input Single-Output AC–DC Converter 182 9.3 Applications of Multi-terminal High-voltage Converter 192 9.3.1 Multiple Wind Turbines and DC Bus 192 9.3.2 Multiple Wind Turbines and AC Bus 196 9.3.3 Multiple AC Motors and DC Bus 196 9.3.4 Multiple AC Motors and AC Bus 196 9.4 Summary 200 References 200 Index201

Read more less

Book SynopsisA timely guide using iterative learning control (ILC) as a solution for multi-agent systems (MAS) challenges, showcasing recent advances and industrially relevant applications Explores the synergy between the important topics of iterative learning control (ILC) and multi-agent systems (MAS) Concisely summarizes recent advances and significant applications in ILC methods for power grids, sensor networks and control processes Covers basic theory, rigorous mathematics as well as engineering practice Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction to Iterative Learning Control 1 1.1.1 Contraction-Mapping Approach 3 1.1.2 Composite Energy Function Approach 4 1.2 Introduction to MAS Coordination 5 1.3 Motivation and Overview 7 1.4 Common Notations in This Book 9 2 Optimal Iterative Learning Control for Multi-agent Consensus Tracking 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Preliminaries and Problem Description 12 2.2.1 Preliminaries 12 2.2.2 Problem Description 13 2.3 Main Results 15 2.3.1 Controller Design for Homogeneous Agents 15 2.3.2 Controller Design for Heterogeneous Agents 20 2.4 Optimal Learning Gain Design 21 2.5 Illustrative Example 23 2.6 Conclusion 26 3 Iterative Learning Control for Multi-agent Coordination Under Iteration-Varying Graph 27 3.1 Introduction 27 3.2 Problem Description 28 3.3 Main Results 29 3.3.1 Fixed Strongly Connected Graph 29 3.3.2 Iteration-Varying Strongly Connected Graph 32 3.3.3 Uniformly Strongly Connected Graph 37 3.4 Illustrative Example 38 3.5 Conclusion 40 4 Iterative Learning Control for Multi-agent Coordination with Initial State Error 41 4.1 Introduction 41 4.2 Problem Description 42 4.3 Main Results 43 4.3.1 Distributed D-type Updating Rule 43 4.3.2 Distributed PD-type Updating Rule 48 4.4 Illustrative Examples 49 4.5 Conclusion 50 5 Multi-agent Consensus Tracking with Input Sharing by Iterative Learning Control 53 5.1 Introduction 53 5.2 Problem Formulation 54 5.3 Controller Design and Convergence Analysis 54 5.3.1 Controller Design Without Leader’s Input Sharing 55 5.3.2 Optimal Design Without Leader’s Input Sharing 58 5.3.3 Controller Design with Leader’s Input Sharing 59 5.4 Extension to Iteration-Varying Graph 60 5.4.1 Iteration-Varying Graph with Spanning Trees 60 5.4.2 Iteration-Varying Strongly Connected Graph 60 5.4.3 Uniformly Strongly Connected Graph 62 5.5 Illustrative Examples 63 5.5.1 Example 1: Iteration-Invariant Communication Graph 63 5.5.2 Example 2: Iteration-Varying Communication Graph 64 5.5.3 Example 3: Uniformly Strongly Connected Graph 66 5.6 Conclusion 68 6 A HOIM-Based Iterative Learning Control Scheme for Multi-agent Formation 69 6.1 Introduction 69 6.2 Kinematic Model Formulation 70 6.3 HOIM-Based ILC for Multi-agent Formation 71 6.3.1 Control Law for Agent 1 72 6.3.2 Control Law for Agent 2 74 6.3.3 Control Law for Agent 3 75 6.3.4 Switching Between Two Structures 78 6.4 Illustrative Example 78 6.5 Conclusion 80 7 P-type Iterative Learning for Non-parameterized Systems with Uncertain Local Lipschitz Terms 81 7.1 Introduction 81 7.2 Motivation and Problem Description 82 7.2.1 Motivation 82 7.2.2 Problem Description 83 7.3 Convergence Properties with Lyapunov Stability Conditions 84 7.3.1 Preliminary Results 84 7.3.2 Lyapunov Stable Systems 86 7.3.3 Systems with Stable Local Lipschitz Terms but Unstable Global Lipschitz Factors 90 7.4 Convergence Properties in the Presence of Bounding Conditions 92 7.4.1 Systems with Bounded Drift Term 92 7.4.2 Systems with Bounded Control Input 94 7.5 Application of P-type Rule in MAS with Local Lipschitz Uncertainties 97 7.6 Conclusion 99 8 Synchronization for Nonlinear Multi-agent Systems by Adaptive Iterative Learning Control 101 8.1 Introduction 101 8.2 Preliminaries and Problem Description 102 8.2.1 Preliminaries 102 8.2.2 Problem Description for First-Order Systems 102 8.3 Controller Design for First-Order Multi-agent Systems 105 8.3.1 Main Results 105 8.3.2 Extension to Alignment Condition 107 8.4 Extension to High-Order Systems 108 8.5 Illustrative Example 113 8.5.1 First-Order Agents 114 8.5.2 High-Order Agents 115 8.6 Conclusion 118 9 Distributed Adaptive Iterative Learning Control for Nonlinear Multi-agent Systems with State Constraints 123 9.1 Introduction 123 9.2 Problem Formulation 124 9.3 Main Results 127 9.3.1 Original Algorithms 127 9.3.2 Projection Based Algorithms 135 9.3.3 Smooth Function Based Algorithms 138 9.3.4 Alternative Smooth Function Based Algorithms 141 9.3.5 Practical Dead-Zone Based Algorithms 156 9.4 Illustrative Example 163 9.5 Conclusion 171 10 Synchronization for Networked Lagrangian Systems under Directed Graphs 173 10.1 Introduction 173 10.2 Problem Description 174 10.3 Controller Design and Performance Analysis 175 10.4 Extension to Alignment Condition 181 10.5 Illustrative Example 182 10.6 Conclusion 186 11 Generalized Iterative Learning for Economic Dispatch Problem in a Smart Grid 187 11.1 Introduction 187 11.2 Preliminaries 188 11.2.1 In-Neighbor and Out-Neighbor 188 11.2.2 Discrete-Time Consensus Algorithm 189 11.2.3 Analytic Solution to EDP with Loss Calculation 190 11.3 Main Results 191 11.3.1 Upper Level: Estimating the Power Loss 192 11.3.2 Lower Level: Solving Economic Dispatch Distributively 192 11.3.3 Generalization to the Constrained Case 195 11.4 Learning Gain Design 196 11.5 Application Examples 198 11.5.1 Case Study 1: Convergence Test 199 11.5.2 Case Study 2: Robustness of Command Node Connections 200 11.5.3 Case Study 3: Plug and Play Test 201 11.5.4 Case Study 4: Time-Varying Demand 203 11.5.5 Case Study 5: Application in Large Networks 205 11.5.6 Case Study 6: Relation Between Convergence Speed and Learning Gain 205 11.6 Conclusion 206 12 Summary and Future Research Directions 207 12.1 Summary 207 12.2 Future Research Directions 208 12.2.1 Open Issues in MAS Control 208 12.2.2 Applications 212 Appendix A Graph Theory Revisit 221 Appendix B Detailed Proofs 223 B.1 HOIM Constraints Derivation 223 B.2 Proof of Proposition 2.1 224 B.3 Proof of Lemma 2.1 225 B.4 Proof of Theorem 8.1 227 B.5 Proof of Corollary 8.1 228 Bibliography 231 Index 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisLeverage the power of OpenStack to develop scalable applications with no vendor lock-in OpenStack Cloud Application Development is a fast-paced, professional book for OpenStack developers, delivering comprehensive guidance without wasting time on development fundamentals.Table of ContentsINTRODUCTION xi PART I: OPENSTACK OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCING OPENSTACK 3 What Is Cloud Computing? 3 Why Should I Care? 6 Understanding the Architecture 13 Summary 18 CHAPTER 2: UNDERSTANDING THE OPENSTACK ECOSYSTEM: CORE PROJECTS 19 Identity 20 Compute 24 Storage 28 Imaging 34 Dashboard 37 Networking 38 Bringing It All Together 45 Summary 48 CHAPTER 3: UNDERSTANDING THE OPENSTACK ECOSYSTEM: ADDITIONAL PROJECTS 49 OpenStack Heat 50 OpenStack Database as a Service: Trove 54 Designate: DNS as a Service 62 Magnum 67 Murano: Application as a Service 70 Ceilometer: Telemetry as a Service 75 Summary 76 PART II: DEVELOPING AND DEPLOYING APPLICATIONS WITH OPENSTACK CHAPTER 4: APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT 79 Converting a Legacy App to an OpenStack App 79 Building Apps from Scratch 83 OpenStack App Description and Deployment Strategies 87 Summary 92 CHAPTER 5: IMPROVING ON THE APPLICATION 93 Failure Scenarios 94 Hostname and IP Addressing 99 Scaling 103 Improving Our Application 111 Summary 119 CHAPTER 6: DEPLOYING THE APPLICATION 121 Bare Metal, Virtual Machines, and Containers 122 Orchestration and Configuration Management 127 Monitoring and Metering 136 Elasticity 137 Updating and Patching 147 Summary 149 Book Wrap Up 149 INDEX 151

Read more less

Book SynopsisExamines the important topic of fuel cell science by way of combining membrane design, chemical degradation mechanisms, and stabilization strategies This book describes the mechanism of membrane degradation and stabilization, as well as the search for stable membranes that can be used in alkaline fuel cells. Arranged in ten chapters, the book presents detailed studies that can help readers understand the attack and degradation mechanisms of polymer membranes and mitigation strategies. Coverage starts from fundamentals and moves to different fuel cell membrane types and methods to profile and analyze them. The Chemistry of Membranes Used in Fuel Cells: Degradation and Stabilization features chapters on: Fuel Cell Fundamentals: The Evolution of Fuel Cells and their Components; Degradation Mechanism of Perfluorinated Membranes; Ranking the Stability of Perfluorinated Membranes Used in Fuel Cells to Attack by Hydroxyl Radicals; Stabilization Mechanism of PerfTable of Contents Preface xiii About the Editor xvii List of Contributors xix 1 The Evolution of Fuel Cells and Their Components 1Thomas A. Zawodzinski, Zhijiang Tang, and Nelly Cantillo 1.1 Overview: A Personal Perspective of Recent Developments 1 1.2 Basics of Fuel Cell Operation 3 1.3 Types of Fuel Cells 5 1.3.1 Phosphoric Acid Fuel Cell 5 1.3.2 Molten Carbonate Fuel Cell and Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 5 1.3.3 Proton Exchange Membranes Fuel Cell 6 1.3.4 Alkaline Fuel Cell 6 1.3.5 Solid Acid Fuel Cell 8 1.4 Low Temperature Fuel Cells: Components 8 1.4.1 Membranes in PEM Systems 9 1.4.2 Electrocatalysts in PEM Systems 11 1.4.2.1 Catalyst Layer Structure in PEM Systems 13 1.5 Summary 16 Acknowledgments 16 References 16 2 Degradation Mechanism of Perfluorinated Membranes 19Marek Danilczuk, Shulamith Schlick, and Frank D. Coms 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Fluoride Release Rate 22 2.3 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance 26 2.4 Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy 30 2.5 Electron Spin Resonance 37 2.5.1 Direct ESR Radical Detection in Perfluorinated Membranes 37 2.5.2 Spin Trapping ESR 40 2.5.3 In Situ ESR Fuel Cell 41 2.5.4 Chemical Reactions and Crossover Processes in a Fuel Cell 43 2.5.5 Effect of Membrane Thickness 46 2.6 Conclusions 49 Acknowledgments 51 References 51 3 Ranking the Stability of Perfluorinated Membranes to Attack by Hydroxyl Radicals 55Marek Danilczuk and Shulamith Schlick 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 The Chemical Stability of Perfluorinated Ionomers 57 3.3 Electron Spin Resonance Studies of PFSAs Exposed to Hydroxyl Radicals 61 3.3.1 Spin©\Trapping ESR 61 3.3.2 Competitive Kinetics: Perfluorinated Ionomers as Competitors for HO• Radicals 62 3.3.3 Ce(III) as Competitor 68 3.4 Conclusions 70 Acknowledgments 72 References 72 4 Stabilization of Perfluorinated Membranes Using Ce3+ and Mn2+ Redox Scavengers: Mechanisms and Applications 75Frank D. Coms, Shulamith Schlick, and Marek Danilczuk 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 Oxidant Chemistry 76 4.3 Degradation Mechanisms of PFSA 79 4.4 Mitigation of Chemical Degradation by Redox Quenchers 81 4.4.1 Mitigation Mechanisms of Ce3+ and Mn2+ 82 4.4.1.1 Cerium Mitigation and Chain Scission Processes 89 4.4.2 ESR Spin Trapping Studies 89 4.4.3 Oxidative Stress and Ce3+ Mitigation 91 4.4.3.1 MEA Design 96 4.4.4 Cerium Distribution and Migration 97 4.4.5 CeO2 Mitigation 100 4.4.6 Synergistic Mitigation Strategies 101 4.5 Conclusions 103 Acknowledgments 104 References 104 5 Hydrocarbon Proton Exchange Membranes 107Lorenz Gubler and Willem H. Koppenol 5.1 Introduction 107 5.2 Radical Intermediates in Fuel Cells 108 5.3 Hydrocarbon Membranes 114 5.4 Chemical Stabilization by Antioxidants 119 5.4.1 Regenerative Radical Scavenging in PFSA Membranes 119 5.4.2 Hydrocarbon Membranes Doped with Organic Antioxidants 121 5.4.3 Polymer©\Bound Antioxidants 122 5.5 The Challenge of Regeneration 125 5.5.1 Learnings from Mother Nature 125 5.5.2 Approaches for the Fuel Cell 126 5.6 Concluding Remarks 133 References 134 6 Stabilization of Perfluorinated Membranes Using Nanoparticle Additives 139Guanxiong Wang, Javier Parrondo, and Vijay Ramani 6.1 Nanoparticle Additives as a Stabilizer for Perfluorinated Membranes 139 6.2 CeO2 and Modified CeO2 Nanoparticles as FRSs 141 6.3 Platinum©\Supported Ceria as FRS 152 6.4 Manganese Oxide and Manganese Oxide Composite as FRSs 154 6.5 Metal Nanoparticles as FRSs 160 6.6 Experimental Techniques for the Detection of Free Radicals and Measurement of the Membrane Degradation Rates 163 6.6.1 Fluoride Emission Rate 163 6.6.2 Fluorescence Spectroscopy as a Tool for the Detection and Quantification of Free Radical Degradation in PEMs 163 6.7 Conclusions 164 Acknowledgments 165 References 166 7 Degradation Mechanisms in Aquivion® Perfluorinated Membranes and Stabilization Strategies 171Vincenzo Arcella, Luca Merlo, and Alessandro Ghielmi 7.1 Introduction 171 7.2 Properties of SSC Ionomers 173 7.3 Properties of Aquivion® Ionomers 173 7.4 The Need for High Stability of PFSA Membranes 177 7.5 PFSA Membrane Degradation in Fuel Cell 177 7.6 Generation of Radical Species in the Fuel Cell Environment 178 7.7 Degradation Studies on Aquivion® Membranes 181 7.8 Stabilization Procedures on Aquivion® Membranes 185 7.9 Conclusions 190 References 190 8 Anion Exchange Membranes: Stability and Synthetic Approach 195Dongwon Shin, Chulsung Bae, and Yu Seung Kim 8.1 Introduction 195 8.2 Chemical Degradation Mechanisms 196 8.2.1 Degradation of Cationic Groups 196 8.2.1.1 Alkyl Ammoniums 196 8.2.1.2 N©\Based Cyclic Cations 199 8.2.1.3 Other Cationic Groups 202 8.2.2 Degradation of Polymer Backbones 204 8.2.2.1 Polyolefins 205 8.2.2.2 Polyaromatics 205 8.2.2.3 Polyacrylates 207 8.2.2.4 Polybenzimidazoles 208 8.2.2.5 Perfluorinated Polymers 208 8.3 Synthetic Approaches 210 8.3.1 Polyolefins 210 8.3.1.1 Polyethylene and Polypropylene 211 8.3.1.2 Polystyrene 212 8.3.1.3 Others 215 8.3.2 Polyaromatics 217 8.3.2.1 Cationic©\Group©\Tethered Poly(arylene)s 217 8.3.2.2 Poly(arylene)©\Containing Cationic Polymer Backbones 219 8.3.2.3 Multication©\Tethered Poly(arylene)s 219 8.3.3 Other Polymers 221 8.3.3.1 Polybenzimidazoles 221 8.3.3.2 Polynorbornenes 223 8.3.3.3 Perfluorinated Polymers 224 8.4 Conclusions 225 Acknowledgments 225 References 226 9 Profiling of Membrane Degradation Processes in a Fuel Cell by 2D Spectral–Spatial FTIR 229Shulamith Schlick and Marek Danilczuk 9.1 Introduction 229 9.2 Optical Images of Nafion® Cross Sections 231 9.3 Line Scan Maps of the Membranes 232 9.4 FTIR Spectra of Nafion® MEAs 232 9.5 Abstraction of a Fluorine Atom on a Carbon in the Nafion® Main Chain by H• 235 9.6 Conclusions 237 Acknowledgments 237 References 238 10 Quantum Mechanical Calculations of the Degradation in Perfluorinated Membranes Used in Fuel Cells 241Ted H. Yu, Boris V. Merinov, and William A. Goddard III 10.1 Introduction 241 10.2 Computational Methods 244 10.3 Results and Discussion 244 10.3.1 Generation of Radicals 244 10.3.1.1 Hydroxyl Radicals 244 10.3.1.2 Hydrogen Radicals, H• 247 10.3.1.3 Hydroperoxyl Radicals, HOO• 249 10.3.2 Concentrated HO• Conditions versus Fuel Cell Conditions 249 10.3.3 Degradation under Concentrated HO• Conditions 249 10.3.3.1 R©¤CF2H Polymer Main Chain Defect Initiation 249 10.3.3.2 R©¤CF¨TCF2 Polymer Main Chain Defect Initiation 250 10.3.3.3 R©¤COOH Polymer Main Chain Defect Initiation 250 10.3.3.4 Propagating Polymer Main Chain Degradation 250 10.3.3.5 Side©\Chain Degradation 252 10.3.4 Degradation under Fuel Cell Conditions with Fuel Crossover 256 10.3.4.1 Polymer Main Chain End©\Group Initiation 256 10.3.4.2 Propagating Polymer Main Chain Degradation 256 10.3.4.3 Side©\Chain Degradation 257 10.3.5 Degradation under Fuel Cell Conditions without Crossover 259 10.3.5.1 Degradation at the Cathode without H2 Crossover 259 10.3.5.2 Degradation at the Anode without O2 Crossover 261 10.4 Summary 265 10.4.1 Concentrated HO• Conditions 265 10.4.2 Fuel Cell Conditions 265 10.4.2.1 Fuel Cell Conditions without Crossover at Cathode 266 10.4.2.2 Fuel Cell Conditions without Crossover at Anode 266 Acknowledgments 267 References 267 Index 271

Read more less

Book SynopsisOffers a theoretical and practical guide to the communication and navigation of autonomous mobile robots and multi-robot systems This book covers the methods and algorithms for the navigation, motion planning, and control of mobile robots acting individually and in groups. It addresses methods of positioning in global and local coordinates systems, off-line and on-line path-planning, sensing and sensors fusion, algorithms of obstacle avoidance, swarming techniques and cooperative behavior. The book includes ready-to-use algorithms, numerical examples and simulations, which can be directly implemented in both simple and advanced mobile robots, and is accompanied by a website hosting codes, videos, and PowerPoint slides Autonomous Mobile Robots and Multi-Robot Systems: Motion-Planning, Communication and Swarming consists of four main parts. The first looks at the models and algorithms of navigation and motion planning in global coordinates systems with compTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xiii Acknowledgments xv About the Companion Website xvii Introduction 1Eugene Kagan, Nir Shvalb, and Irad Ben-Gal I.1 Early History of Robots 1 I.2 Autonomous Robots 2 I.3 Robot Arm Manipulators 6 I.4 Mobile Robots 8 I.5 Multi-Robot Systems and Swarms 12 I.6 Goal and Structure of the Book 16 References 17 1 Motion-Planning Schemes in Global Coordinates 21Oded Medina and Nir Shvalb 1.1 Motivation 21 1.2 Notations 21 1.2.1 The Configuration Space 22 1.2.2 The Workspace 23 1.2.3 The Weight Function 23 1.3 Motion-Planning Schemes: Known Configuration Spaces 25 1.3.1 Potential-Field Algorithms 25 1.3.2 Grid-Based Algorithms 27 1.3.3 Sampling-Based Algorithms 29 1.4 Motion-Planning Schemes: Partially Known Configuration Spaces 30 1.4.1 BUG0 (Reads Bug-Zero) 31 1.4.2 BUG1 32 1.4.3 BUG2 32 1.5 Summary 33 References 33 2 Basic Perception 35Simon Lineykin 2.1 Basic Scheme of Sensors 35 2.2 Obstacle Sensor (Bumper) 36 2.3 The Odometry Sensor 48 2.4 Distance Sensors 52 2.4.1 The ToF Range Finders 52 2.4.2 The Phase Shift Range Finder 56 2.4.3 Triangulation Range Finder 59 2.4.4 Ultrasonic Rangefinder 60 2.5 Summary 63 References 63 3 Motion in the Global Coordinates 65Nir Shvalb and Shlomi Hacohen 3.1 Models of Mobile Robots 65 3.1.1 Wheeled Mobile Robots 65 3.1.2 Aerial Mobile Robots 67 3.2 Kinematic and Control of Hilare-Type Mobile Robots 69 3.2.1 Forward Kinematics of Hilare-Type Mobile Robots 69 3.2.2 Velocity Control of Hilare-Type Mobile Robots 71 3.2.3 Trajectory Tracking 72 3.3 Kinematic and Control of Quadrotor Mobile Robots 74 3.3.1 Dynamics of Quadrotor-Type Mobile Robots 74 3.3.2 Forces and Torques Generated by the Propellers 75 3.3.3 Relative End Global Coordinates 76 3.3.4 The Quadrotor Dynamic Model 78 3.3.5 A Simplified Dynamic Model 79 3.3.6 Trajectory Tracking Control of Quadrotors 80 3.3.7 Simulations 84 References 85 4 Motion in Potential Field and Navigation Function 87Nir Shvalb and Shlomi Hacohen 4.1 Problem Statement 87 4.2 Gradient Descent Method of Optimization 89 4.2.1 Gradient Descent Without Constraints 89 4.2.2 Gradient Descent with Constraints 92 4.3 Minkowski Sum 94 4.4 Potential Field 95 4.5 Navigation Function 99 4.5.1 Navigation Function in Static Deterministic Environment 99 4.5.2 Navigation Function in Static Uncertain Environment 102 4.5.3 Navigation Function and Potential Fields in Dynamic Environment 104 4.5.3.1 Estimation 105 4.5.3.2 Prediction 105 4.5.3.3 Optimization 106 4.6 Summary 106 References 107 5 GNSS and Robot Localization 109Roi Yozevitch and Boaz Ben-Moshe 5.1 Introduction to Satellite Navigation 109 5.1.1 Trilateration 109 5.2 Position Calculation 111 5.2.1 Multipath Signals 111 5.2.2 GNSS Accuracy Analysis 112 5.2.3 DoP 112 5.3 Coordinate Systems 113 5.3.1 Latitude, Longitude, and Altitude 113 5.3.2 UTM Projection 113 5.3.3 Local Cartesian Coordinates 114 5.4 Velocity Calculation 115 5.4.1 Calculation Outlines 115 5.4.2 Implantation Remarks 116 5.5 Urban Navigation 116 5.5.1 Urban Canyon Navigation 117 5.5.2 Map Matching 117 5.5.3 Dead Reckoning – Inertial Sensors 118 5.6 Incorporating GNSS Data with INS 118 5.6.1 Modified Particle Filter 118 5.6.2 Estimating Velocity by Combining GNSS and INS 119 5.7 GNSS Protocols 120 5.8 Other Types of GPS 121 5.8.1 A-GPS 121 5.8.2 DGPS Systems 122 5.8.3 RTK Navigation 122 5.9 GNSS Threats 123 5.9.1 GNSS Jamming 123 5.9.2 GNSS Spoofing 123 References 123 6 Motion in Local Coordinates 125Shraga Shoval 6.1 Global Motion Planning and Navigation 125 6.2 Motion Planning with Uncertainties 128 6.2.1 Uncertainties in Vehicle Performance 128 6.2.1.1 Internal Dynamic Uncertainties 128 6.2.1.2 External Dynamic Uncertainties 129 6.2.2 Sensors Uncertainties 129 6.2.3 Motion-Planning Adaptation to Uncertainties 130 6.3 Online Motion Planning 131 6.3.1 Motion Planning with Differential Constraints 132 6.3.2 Reactive Motion Planning 134 6.4 Global Positioning with Local Maps 135 6.5 UAV Motion Planning in 3D Space 137 6.6 Summary 139 References 140 7 Motion in an Unknown Environment 143Eugene Kagan 7.1 Probabilistic Map-Based Localization 143 7.1.1 Beliefs Distribution and Markov Localization 145 7.1.2 Motion Prediction and Kalman Localization 150 7.2 Mapping the Unknown Environment and Decision-Making 154 7.2.1 Mapping and Localization 155 7.2.2 Decision-Making under Uncertainties 161 7.3 Examples of Probabilistic Motion Planning 169 7.3.1 Motion Planning in Belief Space 169 7.3.2 Mapping of the Environment 176 7.4 Summary 178 References 179 8 Energy Limitations and Energetic Efficiency of Mobile Robots 183Michael Ben Chaim 8.1 Introduction 183 8.2 The Problem of Energy Limitations in Mobile Robots 183 8.3 Review of Selected Literature on Power Management and Energy Control in Mobile Robots 185 8.4 Energetic Model of Mobile Robot 186 8.5 Mobile Robots Propulsion 188 8.5.1 Wheeled Mobile Robots Propulsion 189 8.5.2 Propulsion of Mobile Robots with Caterpillar Drive 190 8.6 Energetic Model of Mechanical Energies Sources 192 8.6.1 Internal Combustion Engines 193 8.6.2 Lithium Electric Batteries 194 8.7 Summary 195 References 195 9 Multi-Robot Systems and Swarming 199Eugene Kagan, Nir Shvalb, Shlomi Hacohen, and Alexander Novoselsky 9.1 Multi-Agent Systems and Swarm Robotics 199 9.1.1 Principles of Multi-Agent Systems 200 9.1.2 Basic Flocking and Methods of Aggregation and Collision Avoidance 208 9.2 Control of the Agents and Positioning of Swarms 218 9.2.1 Agent-Based Models 219 9.2.2 Probabilistic Models of Swarm Dynamics 234 9.3 Summary 236 References 238 10 Collective Motion with Shared Environment Map 243Eugene Kagan and Irad Ben-Gal 10.1 Collective Motion with Shared Information 243 10.1.1 Motion in Common Potential Field 244 10.1.2 Motion in the Terrain with Sharing Information About Local Environment 250 10.2 Swarm Dynamics in a Heterogeneous Environment 253 10.2.1 Basic Flocking in Heterogeneous Environment and External Potential Field 253 10.2.2 Swarm Search with Common Probability Map 259 10.3 Examples of Swarm Dynamics with Shared Environment Map 261 10.3.1 Probabilistic Search with Multiple Searchers 261 10.3.2 Obstacle and Collision Avoidance Using Attraction/Repulsion Potentials 264 10.4 Summary 270 References 270 11 Collective Motion with Direct and Indirect Communication 273Eugene Kagan and Irad Ben-Gal 11.1 Communication Between Mobile Robots in Groups 273 11.2 Simple Communication Protocols and Examples of Collective Behavior 277 11.2.1 Examples of Communication Protocols for the Group of Mobile Robots 278 11.2.1.1 Simple Protocol for Emulating One-to-One Communication in the Lego NXT Robots 278 11.2.1.2 Flocking and Preserving Collective Motion of the Robot’s Group 284 11.2.2 Implementation of the Protocols and Examples of Collective Behavior of Mobile Robots 287 11.2.2.1 One-to-One Communication and Centralized Control in the Lego NXT Robots 287 11.2.2.2 Collective Motion of Lego NXT Robots Preserving the Group Activity 291 11.3 Examples of Indirect and Combined Communication 293 11.3.1 Models of Ant Motion and Simulations of Pheromone Robotic System 293 11.3.2 Biosignaling and Destructive Search by the Group of Mobile Agents 297 11.4 Summary 300 References 301 12 Brownian Motion and Swarm Dynamics 305Eugene Khmelnitsky 12.1 Langevin and Fokker-Plank Formalism 305 12.2 Examples 307 12.3 Summary 316 References 316 13 Conclusions 317Nir Shvalb, Eugene Kagan, and Irad Ben-Gal Index 319

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents an overview on the different aspects of the energy value chain and discusses the issues that future energy is facing This book covers energy and the energy policy choices which face society. The book presents easy-to-grasp information and analysis, and includes statistical data for energy production, consumption and simple formulas. Among the aspects considered are: science, technology, economics and the impact on health and the environment. In this new edition two new chapters have been added: The first new chapter deals with unconventional fossil fuels, a resource which has become very important from the economical point of view, especially in the United States. The second new chapter presents the applications of nanotechnology in the energy domain. Provides a global vision of available and potential energy sources Discusses advantages and drawbacks to help prepare current and future generations to use energy differently IncludTable of ContentsPreface to the Second Edition xiii Preface to the First Edition xv 1. We Need Energy 1 1.1. Generalities 1 1.1.1. Primary and Secondary Energy 1 1.1.2. Energy Units 3 1.1.3. Power 5 1.1.4. Energy and First Law of Thermodynamics 5 1.1.5. Entropy and Second Law of Thermodynamics 6 1.1.6. Exergy 7 1.1.7. Going Back to the Past 7 1.1.8. Humans and Energy 8 1.2. Always More! 9 1.2.1. Why do we Need More Energy? 10 1.2.2. Energy Sources we Use 13 1.2.3. Security of Supply 18 1.2.4. Environmental Concerns 24 2. Oil and Natural Gas 26 2.1. Genesis of Oil and Natural Gas 27 2.2. Recovering Oil and Gas 30 2.3. Peak Oil 32 2.4. Reserves 34 2.4.1. Crude Oil Reserves 35 2.4.2. Natural Gas Reserves 36 2.5. Properties of Hydrocarbons 38 2.6. Oil Fields 40 2.7. Prices 41 2.8. Consumption 44 2.9. Electricity Generation 46 2.10. Impact on Environment 49 2.11. Conclusion 52 3. Unconventional Oil and Gas Resources 53 3.1. Hydrocarbon Formation 53 3.2. Offshore Hydrocarbons 55 3.3. Unconventional Hydrocarbons 58 3.4. Unconventional Oils 59 3.4.1. Unconventional Oils Contained in Reservoirs 59 3.4.2. Unconventional Oils Contained in Source Rock 60 3.5. Unconventional Gases 61 3.5.1. Unconventional Gases Contained in Reservoirs 61 3.5.2. Unconventional Gases Contained in Source Rocks 62 3.6. Methane Hydrates 69 3.7. Conclusion 70 4. Coal: Fossil Fuel of the Future 71 4.1. Genesis of Coal 72 4.2. Rank of Coals 73 4.3. Classification of Coals 73 4.4. Peat 76 4.5. Use of Coal 78 4.6. Coal Reserves 78 4.7. Production and Consumption 82 4.8. Electricity Production 86 4.9. Coal Combustion for Power Generation 87 4.9.1. Advanced Pulverized Coal Combustion 88 4.9.2. Fluidized‐Bed Combustion at Atmospheric Pressure 88 4.9.3. Pressurized Fluidized‐Bed Combustion 88 4.10. Combined Heat and Power Generation 88 4.11. Integrated Gasification Combined–Cycle Power Plants 89 4.12. Coal‐to‐Liquid Technologies 90 4.13. Direct Coal Liquefaction 90 4.14. Indirect Coal Liquefaction 91 4.15. Direct or Indirect CTL Technology? 92 4.16. Carbon Capture and Sequestration 93 4.16.1. Capture 93 4.16.2. Transport 97 4.16.3. Sequestration 97 4.16.4. Cost 100 4.17. Coal Pit Accidents 100 4.18. Environmental Impacts 101 4.19. Conclusion 102 5. Fossil Fuels and Greenhouse Effect 103 5.1. Greenhouse Effect 104 5.2. Greenhouse Gases 107 5.3. Weather and Climate 111 5.4. Natural Change of Climate 112 5.5. Anthropogenic Emissions 112 5.6. Water and Aerosols 115 5.7. Global Warming Potentials 116 5.8. Increase of Average Temperature 117 5.9. Model Predictions 118 5.10. Energy and Greenhouse Gas Emissions 119 5.11. Consequences 126 5.12. Other Impacts on Ocean 126 5.13. Factor 4 128 5.14. Kyoto Protocol 129 5.15. Conclusion 131 6. Energy from Water 133 6.1. Hydropower 133 6.1.1. Hydropower: Important Source of Electricity 134 6.1.2. Dams and Diversions 137 6.1.3. Head and Flow 139 6.1.4. Turbines 140 6.1.5. Small‐Scale Hydropower 142 6.1.6. Environmental Concerns 144 6.1.7. Costs 144 6.2. Energy from the Ocean 145 6.2.1. Offshore Wind Energy 147 6.2.2. Wave Energy 147 6.2.3. Tidal Energy 151 6.2.4. Marine Current Energy 153 6.2.5. Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion 154 6.2.6. Osmotic Energy 155 7. Biomass 157 7.1. Producing Biomass 159 7.2. An Old Energy Resource 161 7.3. Electricity Production 162 7.4. Technologies 164 7.4.1. Direct Combustion Technologies 164 7.4.2. Cofiring Technologies 165 7.4.3. Biomass Gasification 165 7.4.4. Anaerobic Digestion 166 7.4.5. Pyrolysis 166 7.5. Heat Production 167 7.6. Biomass for Cooking 168 7.7. Environmental Impact 169 7.8. Market Share 170 7.9. Biofuels 172 7.9.1. First‐Generation Biofuels 174 7.9.2. Second‐Generation Biofuels 181 7.9.3. Third‐Generation Biofuels 182 7.10. From Well to Wheels 182 7.11. Conclusion 183 8. Solar Energy 184 8.1. Solar Energy: A Huge Potential 185 8.2. Thermal Solar Energy 186 8.2.1. Producing Hot Water for Domestic Purposes 186 8.2.2. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilation Using Solar Energy 189 8.2.3. The Solar Cooker 190 8.3. Concentrated Solar Power Plants 191 8.3.1. Parabolic Troughs 191 8.3.2. Power Towers 193 8.3.3. Parabolic Dish Collectors 194 8.4. Solar Chimneys or Towers 194 8.5. Photovoltaic Systems 196 8.5.1. Market Dominated by Silicon 197 8.5.2. Other Photovoltaic Technologies 198 8.5.3. Applications 199 8.6. Electricity Storage 204 8.7. Economy and Environment 205 8.8. Conclusion 205 9. Geothermal Energy 207 9.1. Available in Many Places 210 9.2. Different Uses 212 9.3. Technologies 212 9.4. Geothermal Energy in the World 216 9.5. Conclusion 219 10. Wind Energy 220 10.1. Already A Long History 220 10.2. From Theory to Practice 222 10.3. Development of Wind Power 224 10.4. Offshore Wind Turbines 232 10.5. Conclusion 233 11. Nuclear Energy 234 11.1. Basics of Nuclear Energy 234 11.1.1. Atoms and Nuclei 235 11.1.2. Radioactivity 236 11.1.3. Energy and Mass 238 11.1.4. Fission 240 11.1.5. Fissile and Fertile 241 11.1.6. Chain Reaction 242 11.1.7. Critical Mass 244 11.1.8. Nuclear Reactors 245 11.1.9. Natural Nuclear Reactors: Oklo 246 11.1.10. Conclusion 247 11.2. Uses of Nuclear Energy 247 11.2.1. Different Technologies 248 11.2.2. Selection Process 251 11.2.3. Why Nuclear Energy? 253 11.2.4. Uranium Resources 254 11.2.5. Fuel Cycles 257 11.2.6. Safety 260 11.2.7. Nuclear Waste 263 11.2.8. Conclusion 265 11.3. Thermonuclear Fusion 266 11.3.1. Nuclei: Concentrated Sources of Energy 266 11.3.2. The Sun 267 11.3.3. Fusion of Light Nuclei 268 11.3.4. Difficulties 268 11.3.5. A Bit of History 269 11.3.6. Thermonuclear Fusion in Tokamaks 269 11.3.7. ITER: New Step Toward Mastering Fusion 270 11.3.8. About Fuel Reserves 271 11.3.9. Longer Term Possibilities 271 11.3.10. Safety and Waste Issues 272 11.3.11. Conclusion 272 Appendix 273 12. Electricity: Smart Use of Energy 274 12.1. Rapid Development 275 12.2. Energy Sources for Electricity Production 279 12.3. No Unique Solution 281 12.4. From Mechanical Energy to Consumer 286 12.5. Impact on Environment 288 12.6. Cost 289 12.7. Conclusion 290 13. Weak Point of Energy Supply Chain 292 13.1. Electricity Storage 294 13.1.1. Characteristics of Electricity Storage 296 13.1.2. Large‐Quantity Storage Technologies 297 13.1.3. Electrochemical Batteries 303 13.1.4. Supercapacitors 315 13.1.5. Flywheels 317 13.2. Thermal Energy Storage 318 13.2.1. Basic Heat Storage 320 13.2.2. Sensible Heat Storage 320 13.2.3. Phase Change Materials 320 13.2.4. Thermochemical and Thermophysical Energy Storage 322 13.2.5. Applications of Thermal Energy Storage 323 13.2.6. Underground Energy Storage 324 13.2.7. Conclusion 326 14. Transportation 327 14.1. Short History of Transportation 327 14.2. Energy and Transportation 329 14.3. Road Transportation 331 14.4. Ship Transportation 336 14.5. Air Transport 337 14.6. Car Dynamics 339 14.7. Fuels for Road Transportation 340 14.8. Co2 Emissions 343 14.9. Hybrid Vehicles 354 14.10. Electric Vehicles 356 14.11. Conclusion 358 15. Housing 359 15.1. Importance of Housing 359 15.2. Toward More Efficient Housing 363 15.3. Different Regions, Different Solutions 367 15.4. Bioclimatic Architecture 369 15.5. Insulation 370 15.6. Glazing 374 15.7. Lighting 376 15.8. Ventilation 379 15.9. Water 380 15.10. Energy Use in a Household 382 15.11. Heat Pumps 384 15.12. Impact on Environment 387 15.13. Conclusion 390 16. Smart Energy Consumption 391 16.1. Housing 392 16.2. Improving the Way we Consume Energy 393 16.3. Cogeneration 394 16.4. Standby Consumption 396 16.5. Lighting 401 16.6. Transportation 402 16.6.1. Technology 404 16.6.2. Individuals 405 16.7. Conclusion 407 17. Hydrogen 409 17.1. From Production To Distribution 409 17.1.1. Properties 409 17.1.2. Production 411 17.1.3. Storage 420 17.1.4. Hydrogen Transport and Distribution 425 17.1.5. Conclusion 428 17.2. Hydrogen: Energetic Applications 428 17.2.1. Fundamentals of Fuel Cells 428 17.2.2. Different Types of Fuel Cells 431 17.2.3. Transportation 439 17.2.4. Direct Use of Hydrogen 446 17.2.5. Direct Combined Heat and Power 447 17.2.6. Hydrogen and Portable Devices 448 17.2.7. Hydrogen Safety 449 17.2.8. Conclusion 450 18. Nanotechnology and Energy 452 18.1. What is New at the Nanoscale? 452 18.1.1. Surface Effects Prevail 453 18.1.2. Quantum Effects 453 18.2. Nanotechnology and Energy Production 456 18.2.1. Fossil Fuels 457 18.2.2. Syngas 458 18.3. New Energy Technologies 459 18.3.1. Solar Energy 460 18.3.2. Wind Energy 462 18.3.3. Hydrogen 462 18.3.4. Fuel Cells 462 18.3.5. Batteries 463 18.3.6. Thermoelectricity 464 18.3.7. Electrical Distribution 464 18.4. Nanotechnology and Housing 464 18.4.1. Construction Engineering 464 18.4.2. Insulation 465 18.4.3. Lighting 466 18.4.4. Heating, Ventilating, and Air‐Conditioning 468 18.4.5. Surface Materials 468 18.5. Nanotechnology and Transportation 468 18.5.1. Bodywork 469 18.5.2. Interior of the Car 470 18.5.3. Tires 470 18.5.4. Powertrain 471 18.5.5. Electronics 471 18.5.6. Outlook in the Automotive Sector 471 18.6. Conclusion 472 19. Conclusion 474 Exercises 480 Solutions 490 Bibliography 500 Index 505

Read more less

Book SynopsisIntroduction to SYSTEM SCIENCE with MATLAB Explores the mathematical basis for developing and evaluating continuous and discrete systems In this revised Second Edition of Introduction to System Science with MATLAB, the authors Gary Sandquist and Zakary Wilde provide a comprehensive exploration of essential concepts, mathematical framework, analytical resources, and productive skills required to address any rational system confidently and adequately for quantitative evaluation. This Second Edition is supplemented with new updates to the mathematical and technical materials from the first edition. A new chapter to assist readers to generalize and execute algorithms for systems development and analysis, as well as an expansion of the chapter covering specific system science applications, is included. The book provides the mathematical basis for developing and evaluating single and multiple input/output systems that are contiTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 System Science 1 1.1.1 Definition of System Science 2 1.2 Principle of Causality 3 1.2.1 Definition 3 1.2.2 Common Examples 4 1.2.3 Relationship to System Science 6 1.3 Overview of System Science 7 1.3.1 Historical Background 7 1.3.2 Major System Science Achievements in the Twentieth Century 9 1.3.3 Measurable Systems and Quantitative Modeling 9 1.3.4 Application of Computers to System Science 13 1.3.5 Utilization of Computer Software in System Science 14 1.3.6 General Applications of System Science 16 1.4 Outline and Utilization of Text 17 1.4.1 Outline of Text 17 1.4.2 Study Schedules by Discipline for this Text 18 1.5 Summary 18 Bibliography 20 Problems 21 2 Fundamental System Concepts 25 2.1 Definitions of System Concepts and Terms 25 2.1.1 Concept and Definition of a System 25 2.1.2 System Causes 26 2.1.3 System Effects 26 2.1.4 Measurability of System Causes and Effects 26 2.1.5 Isolation of a System from Its External Environment 27 2.1.6 Intrinsic and Extrinsic System Feedback 28 2.2 Discussion of System Concepts 28 2.2.1 Concept of a System 28 2.2.2 Isolation of a System from the Environment 29 2.2.3 Identifying and Distinguishing Between Causes and Effects 31 2.3 Classification of Systems by Type 32 2.3.1 Irrational and Immeasurable Systems 33 2.3.2 Continuous and Discrete Systems 35 2.3.3 Deterministic and Stochastic Systems 36 2.3.4 Feedback Systems 37 2.3.5 Controllable Systems 40 2.4 System Analysis and Evaluation Using a Computer 41 2.4.1 Computer Applications to System Analysis 41 2.4.2 Symbolic Computer Applications to System Analysis 41 2.5 Summary 44 Bibliography 45 Problems 46 3 Basic System Equations 49 3.1 Functional Dependence of System Causes and Effects 49 3.1.1 Proportionality Relationship Between Cause and Effect 50 3.1.2 The System Kernel 51 3.2 Classification of System Equations 54 3.2.1 Single-Input, Single-Output Systems 55 3.2.2 Single-Input, Multiple-Output Systems 57 3.2.3 Multiple-Input, Single-Output Systems 61 3.2.4 Multiple-Input, Multiple-Output Systems 63 3.3 Summary 66 Bibliography 67 Problems 67 4 Single-Input Systems 75 4.1 Definition and Significance of a Single-Input System 75 4.2 Single-Input, Single-Output Systems 76 4.2.1 Discrete Systems 77 4.2.2 Continuous Systems 79 4.2.3 Constant System Kernels 81 4.2.4 Linear System Kernels 81 4.2.5 Exact System Kernels 84 4.2.6 Separable System Kernels 87 4.2.7 Homogeneous System Kernels 88 4.2.8 Bernoulli-Type System Kernels 90 4.2.9 Ricatti-Type System Kernels 91 4.2.10 Other Special System Kernel Types 93 4.3 Single-Input, Multiple-Output Systems 97 4.3.1 Discrete System Kernels 98 4.3.2 Continuous System Kernels 100 4.3.3 Constant System Kernels 103 4.3.4 Linear System Kernels with Constant Coefficients 104 4.3.5 Linear System Kernels with Variable Coefficients 107 4.3.6 Exact System Kernels 111 4.3.7 Separable System Kernels 112 4.3.8 Homogeneous System Kernels 114 4.3.9 Autonomous System Kernels 116 4.3.10 System Kernels Associated with Classical Second-Order Ordinary Differential Equations (ODEs) 118 4.3.11 Equivalence of Single-Input System Equations with Ordinary Differential and Difference Equations of Any Order 124 4.4 Treatment of Single-Input Systems Using MATLAB Symbolic Toolbox 128 4.5 Summary 131 Bibliography 131 Problems 132 5 Multiple-Input Systems 141 5.1 Definition and Mathematical Significance 141 5.2 Multiple-Input, Single-Output Systems 142 5.2.1 Discrete Systems 143 5.2.2 Continuous Systems 146 5.2.3 Constant System Kernels 147 5.2.4 Exact System Kernels 148 5.2.5 Linear System Kernels 151 5.2.6 Separable System Kernels 153 5.2.7 Homogeneous System Kernels 154 5.2.8 Inversion of the System Kernel 155 5.2.9 Equivalence of Multiple-Input, Single-Output System Equations and First-Order Partial Differential Equations 157 5.3 Multiple-Input, Multiple-Output Systems 161 5.3.1 Discrete Systems 162 5.3.2 Continuous System Kernels 164 5.3.3 Constant System Kernels 166 5.3.4 Exact System Kernels 166 5.3.5 Linear System Kernels 167 5.3.6 Separable System Kernels 171 5.3.7 Equivalence of Multiple-Input, Multiple-Output Systems and Partial Differential Equations 172 5.3.8 Reduction of Multiple-Input, Multiple-Output Systems Equations 173 5.3.9 Integral Equation Form of the System Equation 175 5.3.10 Elimination of Individual Output Solutions to Reduce the System Equation 176 5.4 Summary 177 Bibliography 178 Problems 178 6 System Modeling 183 6.1 Graphical Representation of Systems 183 6.1.1 Block Diagramming 184 6.1.2 Signal-Flow Graphs 189 6.1.3 Organization Diagrams 194 6.2 Modeling System Inputs, Outputs, and Kernels 199 6.2.1 Single-Input, Single-Output System 204 6.2.2 Physical Systems 206 6.2.3 Nonphysical Systems 209 6.2.4 Experimental Modeling 212 6.2.5 Stochastic Modeling 223 6.2.6 Heuristic Modeling 226 6.3 Paradigm for System Modeling, Analysis, and Evaluation 228 6.4 Summary 229 Bibliography 229 Problems 230 7 Analysis Methods for Systems with Linear Kernels 245 7.1 Background and Justification 245 7.2 Linearization Methods 247 7.2.1 Taylor Series Expansion 248 7.2.2 Perturbation Methods 251 7.2.3 Variable Coefficient Elimination 252 7.3 Single-Input Linear Systems 254 7.3.1 Single-Input, Single-Output Systems 254 7.3.2 Single-Input, Multiple-Output Linear Systems 258 7.4 Multiple-Input Linear Systems 265 7.4.1 Multiple-Input, Single-Output 266 7.4.2 Multiple-Input, Multiple-Output Continuous System Equations 270 7.5 Summary 272 Bibliography 273 Problems 274 8 Generalized System Analysis Methods 279 8.1 Simplification and Reduction of System Kernels 279 8.1.1 Conversion of Variable System Kernels to Constant Kernels 280 8.1.2 Reduction of System Kernels 282 8.2 System Normalization and Parameter Reduction 288 8.2.1 System Variable Normalization 288 8.2.2 Parameter Reduction and Minimization 292 8.2.3 Sensitivity Analysis of System Parameters 297 8.3 Systems with Feedback 300 8.3.1 System Kernel Feedback Gain 301 8.3.2 Effect of Feedback on Linear Kernels 304 8.3.3 Single-Input, Single-Output Systems with Feedback 306 8.3.4 Inversion of System Kernels with Feedback 308 8.4 Computer-Aided Analysis of Systems 310 8.5 Summary 313 Bibliography 313 Problems 314 9 System Science Applications 321 9.1 Classification of System Science by Topics 321 9.2 System Science Applications to Space, Time, Matter, and Energy in Physical Science 328 9.2.1 First Law of Thermodynamics 328 9.2.2 Particle Diffusion Model 331 9.2.3 Relativistic Mechanics Model 333 9.2.4 System Problems for Matter, Energy, Space, and Time 339 9.3 Earth Science Applications of System Science 352 9.3.1 Atmospheric Model 353 9.3.2 Geothermal Model 355 9.3.3 Terrestrial Water Balance Model 357 9.3.4 Topical System Applications in the Earth Sciences 360 9.4 Life Systems Applications of System Science 366 9.4.1 Continuous and Discrete Growth Models 366 9.4.2 The Mammalian Lung Model 367 9.4.3 Topical System Problems in Life Science 369 9.5 Applications of System Science to Human Life 381 9.5.1 Hemodynamic Circulatory System 381 9.5.2 Model for Medical Diagnosis Using Radioactive Nuclides 386 9.5.3 Quantitative Model for Stress 388 9.5.4 Topical System Problems Associated with Human Life 390 9.6 Applications of System Science to Human Society 401 9.6.1 World Cultural and Economic Regions 401 9.6.2 Solow Model for Economic Growth 403 9.6.3 Model for Cost of Crime to Society 406 9.6.4 Energy Consumption and GNP 413 9.6.5 Topical System Problems in Human Society 414 9.7 Applications of System Science to the Arts 423 9.7.1 Quantitative Assessment of Language 424 9.7.2 Art Awareness Model 427 9.7.3 Topical System Problems in the Arts 427 9.8 Applications of System Science to Technology 430 9.8.1 Nuclear Reactor Stability with Xenon-135 Dependence 431 9.8.2 Fluid Flow with Friction 441 9.8.3 Models for Forecasting Electrical Power Demand 443 9.8.4 Topical System Problems in Technology 445 9.9 Applications of System Science to Religion 450 9.9.1 Quality of Life and Belief in God Model 450 9.9.2 Models for the Great Religions 455 9.9.3 Topical System Problems in Religion 456 9.10 Applications of System Science to History 462 9.10.1 Expansion Model for Aggressive Societies 462 9.10.2 Historical Growth in Weapons Trade 465 9.10.3 Additional Modeling Problems 466 General System Science Bibliography 468 10 System Modeling Paradigms 475 10.1 Background 475 10.2 Modeling Paradigm 476 10.3 Essential System Modeling Paradigm Steps 477 10.3.1 Step-1 Explore and Document 477 10.3.2 Step-2 Define and Contain 481 10.3.3 Step-3 Select and Develop 481 10.3.4 Step-4 Construct and Quantify 482 10.3.5 Step-5 Analyze and Evaluate 482 10.3.6 Step-6 Assess and Re-Evaluate 482 10.3.7 Step-7 Finalize and Confirm 483 10.3.8 Step-8 Resolve and Accept 483 10.3.9 Step-9 Publish and Disseminate 483 10.4 Example of Analysis Process after System Identification using MATLAB 483 10.5 Final Words 486 Index 489

Read more less

Book SynopsisIdentifying, assessing, and mitigating electric power grid vulnerabilities is a growing focus in short-term operational planning of power systems. Through illustrated application, this important guide surveys state-of-the-art methodologies for the assessment and enhancement of power system security in short term operational planning and real-time operation. The methodologies employ advanced methods from probabilistic theory, data mining, artificial intelligence, and optimization, to provide knowledge-based support for monitoring, control (preventive and corrective), and decision making tasks. Key features: Introduces behavioural recognition in wide-area monitoring and security constrained optimal power flow for intelligent control and protection and optimal grid management. Provides in-depth understanding of risk-based reliability and security assessment, dynamic vulnerability assessment methods, supported by the underpinning mathematics. DeveloTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv Foreword xix Preface xxi 1 Introduction: The Role of Wide Area Monitoring Systems in Dynamic Vulnerability Assessment 1 Jaime C. Cepeda and José Luis Rueda-Torres 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Power System Vulnerability 2 1.2.1 Vulnerability Assessment 2 1.2.2 Timescale of Power System Actions and Operations 4 1.3 Power System Vulnerability Symptoms 5 1.3.1 Rotor Angle Stability 6 1.3.2 Short-Term Voltage Stability 7 1.3.3 Short-Term Frequency Stability 7 1.3.4 Post-Contingency Overloads 7 1.4 Synchronized Phasor Measurement Technology 8 1.4.1 Phasor Representation of Sinusoids 8 1.4.2 Synchronized Phasors 9 1.4.3 Phasor Measurement Units (PMUs) 9 1.4.4 Discrete Fourier Transform and Phasor Calculation 10 1.4.5 Wide Area Monitoring Systems 10 1.4.6 WAMPAC Communication Time Delay 12 1.5 The Fundamental Role of WAMS in Dynamic Vulnerability Assessment 13 1.6 Concluding Remarks 16 2 Steady-state Security 21 Evelyn Heylen, Steven De Boeck, Marten Ovaere, Hakan Ergun, and Dirk Van Hertem 2.1 Power System Reliability Management: A Combination of Reliability Assessment and Reliability Control 22 2.1.1 Reliability Assessment 23 2.1.2 Reliability Control 24 2.2 Reliability Under Various Timeframes 31 2.3 Reliability Criteria 33 2.4 Reliability and Its Cost as a Function of Uncertainty 34 2.4.1 Reliability Costs 34 2.4.2 Interruption Costs 35 2.4.3 Minimizing the Sum of Reliability and Interruption Costs 36 3 Probabilistic Indicators for the Assessment of Reliability and Security of Future Power Systems 41 Bart W. Tuinema, Nikoleta Kandalepa, and José Luis Rueda-Torres 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Time Horizons in the Planning and Operation of Power Systems 42 3.2.1 Time Horizons 42 3.2.2 Overlapping and Interaction 42 3.2.3 Remedial Actions 42 3.3 Reliability Indicators 45 3.3.1 Security-of-Supply Related Indicators 45 3.3.2 Additional Indicators 47 3.4 Reliability Analysis 49 3.4.1 Input Information 49 3.4.2 Pre-calculations 50 3.4.3 Reliability Analysis 50 3.4.4 Output: Reliability Indicators 53 3.5 Application Example: EHV Underground Cables 53 3.5.1 Input Parameters 54 3.5.2 Results of Analysis 56 4 An Enhanced WAMS-based Power System Oscillation Analysis Approach 63 Qing Liu, Hassan Bevrani, and Yasunori Mitani 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 HHT Method 65 4.2.1 EMD 65 4.2.2 Hilbert Transform 65 4.2.3 Hilbert Spectrum and Hilbert Marginal Spectrum 66 4.2.4 HHT Issues 67 4.3 The Enhanced HHT Method 71 4.3.1 Data Pre-treatment Processing 71 4.3.2 Inhibiting the Boundary End Effect 75 4.3.3 Parameter Identification 80 4.4 Enhanced HHT Method Evaluation 81 4.4.1 Case I 81 4.4.2 Case II 84 4.4.3 Case III 85 4.5 Application to RealWide Area Measurements 88 5 Pattern Recognition-Based Approach for Dynamic Vulnerability Status Prediction 95 Jaime C. Cepeda, José Luis Rueda-Torres, Delia G. Colomé, and István Erlich 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Post-contingency Dynamic Vulnerability Regions 96 5.3 Recognition of Post-contingency DVRs 97 5.3.1 N-1 Contingency Monte Carlo Simulation 98 5.3.2 Post-contingency Pattern Recognition Method 100 5.3.3 Definition of Data-TimeWindows 103 5.3.4 Identification of Post-contingency DVRs—Case Study 104 5.4 Real-Time Vulnerability Status Prediction 109 5.4.1 Support Vector Classifier (SVC) Training 112 5.4.2 SVC Real-Time Implementation 113 5.5 Concluding Remarks 115 6 Performance Indicator-Based Real-Time Vulnerability Assessment 119 Jaime C. Cepeda, José Luis Rueda-Torres, Delia G. Colomé, and István Erlich 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 Overview of the Proposed Vulnerability Assessment Methodology 120 6.3 Real-Time Area Coherency Identification 122 6.3.1 Associated PMU Coherent Areas 122 6.4 TVFS Vulnerability Performance Indicators 125 6.4.1 Transient Stability Index (TSI) 125 6.4.2 Voltage Deviation Index (VDI) 128 6.4.3 Frequency Deviation Index (FDI) 131 6.4.4 Assessment of TVFS Security Level for the Illustrative Examples 131 6.4.5 Complete TVFS Real-Time Vulnerability Assessment 133 6.5 Slower Phenomena Vulnerability Performance Indicators 137 6.5.1 Oscillatory Index (OSI) 137 6.5.2 Overload Index (OVI) 141 6.6 Concluding Remarks 145 7 Challenges Ahead Risk-Based AC Optimal Power Flow Under Uncertainty for Smart Sustainable Power Systems 149 Florin Capitanescu 7.1 Chapter Overview 149 7.2 Conventional (Deterministic) AC Optimal Power Flow (OPF) 150 7.2.1 Introduction 150 7.2.2 Abstract Mathematical Formulation of the OPF Problem 150 7.2.3 OPF Solution via Interior-Point Method 151 7.2.4 Illustrative Example 154 7.3 Risk-Based OPF 158 7.3.1 Motivation and Principle 158 7.3.2 Risk-Based OPF Problem Formulation 159 7.3.3 Illustrative Example 160 7.4 OPF Under Uncertainty 162 7.4.1 Motivation and Potential Approaches 162 7.4.2 Robust Optimization Framework 162 7.4.3 Methodology for Solving the R-OPF Problem 163 7.4.4 Illustrative Example 164 7.5 Advanced Issues and Outlook 169 7.5.1 Conventional OPF 169 7.5.2 Beyond the Scope of Conventional OPF: Risk, Uncertainty, Smarter Sustainable Grid 172 8 Modeling Preventive and Corrective Actions Using Linear Formulation 177 Tom Van Acker and Dirk Van Hertem 8.1 Introduction 177 8.2 Security Constrained OPF 178 8.3 Available Control Actions in AC Power Systems 178 8.3.1 Generator Redispatch 179 8.3.2 Load Shedding and Demand Side Management 179 8.3.3 Phase Shifting Transformer 179 8.3.4 Switching Actions 180 8.3.5 Reactive Power Management 180 8.3.6 Special Protection Schemes 180 8.4 Linear Implementation of Control Actions in a SCOPF Environment 180 8.4.1 Generator Redispatch 181 8.4.2 Load Shedding and Demand Side Management 182 8.4.3 Phase Shifting Transformer 183 8.4.4 Switching 184 8.5 Case Study of Preventive and Corrective Actions 185 8.5.1 Case Study 1: Generator Redispatch and Load Shedding (CS1) 186 8.5.2 Case Study 2: Generator Redispatch, Load Shedding and PST (CS2) 187 8.5.3 Case Study 3: Generator Redispatch, Load Shedding and Switching (CS3) 190 9 Model-based Predictive Control for Damping Electromechanical Oscillations in Power Systems 193 DaWang 9.1 Introduction 193 9.2 MPC BasicTheory & Damping Controller Models 194 9.2.1 What is MPC? 194 9.2.2 Damping Controller Models 196 9.3 MPC for Damping Oscillations 198 9.3.1 Outline of Idea 198 9.3.2 Mathematical Formulation 199 9.3.3 Proposed Control Schemes 200 9.4 Test System & Simulation Setting 204 9.5 Performance Analysis of MPC Schemes 204 9.5.1 Centralized MPC 204 9.5.2 Distributed MPC 209 9.5.3 Hierarchical MPC 209 9.6 Conclusions and Discussions 213 10 Voltage Stability Enhancement by Computational Intelligence Methods 217 Worawat Nakawiro 10.1 Introduction 217 10.2 Theoretical Background 218 10.2.1 Voltage Stability Assessment 218 10.2.2 Sensitivity Analysis 219 10.2.3 Optimal Power Flow 220 10.2.4 Artificial Neural Network 220 10.2.5 Ant Colony Optimisation 221 10.3 Test Power System 223 10.4 Example 1: Preventive Measure 224 10.4.1 Problem Statement 224 10.4.2 Simulation Results 225 10.5 Example 2: Corrective Measure 226 10.5.1 Problem Statement 226 10.5.2 Simulation Results 227 11 Knowledge-Based Primary and Optimization-Based Secondary Control of Multi-terminal HVDCGrids 233 Adedotun J. Agbemuko, Mario Ndreko, Marjan Popov, José Luis Rueda-Torres, and Mart A.M.M van der Meijden 11.1 Introduction 234 11.2 Conventional Control Schemes in HV-MTDC Grids 234 11.3 Principles of Fuzzy-Based Control 236 11.4 Implementation of the Knowledge-Based Power-Voltage Droop Control Strategy 236 11.4.1 Control Scheme for Primary and Secondary Power-Voltage Control 237 11.4.2 Input/Output Variables 238 11.4.3 Knowledge Base and Inference Engine 241 11.4.4 Defuzzification and Output 241 11.5 Optimization-Based Secondary Control Strategy 242 11.5.1 Fitness Function 242 11.5.2 Constraints 244 11.6 Simulation Results 245 11.6.1 Set Point Change 245 11.6.2 Constantly Changing Reference Set Points 246 11.6.3 Sudden Disconnection ofWind Farm for Undefined Period 246 11.6.4 Permanent Outage of VSC 3 247 12 Model Based Voltage/Reactive Control in Sustainable Distribution Systems 251 Hoan Van Pham and Sultan Nasiruddin Ahmed 12.1 Introduction 251 12.2 BackgroundTheory 252 12.2.1 Voltage Control 252 12.2.2 Model Predictive Control 253 12.2.3 Model Analysis 255 12.2.4 Implementation 257 12.3 MPC Based Voltage/Reactive Controller – an Example 258 12.3.1 Control Scheme 258 12.3.2 Overall Objective Function of the MPC Based Controller 259 12.3.3 Implementation of the MPC Based Controller 261 12.4 Test Results 262 12.4.1 Test System and Measurement Deployment 262 12.4.2 Parameter Setup and Algorithm Selection for the Controller 263 12.4.3 Results and Discussion 263 12.5 Conclusions 266 13 Multi-Agent based Approach for Intelligent Control of Reactive Power Injection in Transmission Systems 269 Hoan Van Pham and Sultan Nasiruddin Ahmed 13.1 Introduction 269 13.2 System Model and Problem Formulation 270 13.3 Multi-Agent Based Approach 275 13.3.1 Augmented Lagrange Formulation 275 13.3.2 Implementation Algorithm 275 13.4 Case Studies and Simulation Results 277 13.4.1 Case Studies 277 13.4.2 Simulation Results 277 14 Operation of Distribution SystemsWithin Secure Limits Using Real-Time Model Predictive Control 283 Hamid Soleimani Bidgoli, Gustavo Valverde, Petros Aristidou, Mevludin Glavic, and Thierry Van Cutsem 14.1 Introduction 283 14.2 Basic MPC Principles 285 14.3 Control Problem Formulation 285 14.4 Voltage CorrectionWith Minimum Control Effort 288 14.4.1 Inclusion of LTC Actions as Known Disturbances 289 14.4.2 Problem Formulation 290 14.5 Correction of Voltages and Congestion Management with Minimum Deviation from References 291 14.5.4 Problem Formulation 295 14.6 Test System 296 14.7 Simulation Results: Voltage Correction with Minimal Control Effort 298 14.8 Simulation Results: Voltage and/or Congestion Corrections with Minimum Deviation from Reference 302 15 Enhancement of Transmission System Voltage Stability through Local Control of Distribution Networks 311 Gustavo Valverde, Petros Aristidou, and Thierry Van Cutsem 15.1 Introduction 311 15.2 Long-Term Voltage Stability 313 15.2.1 Countermeasures 314 15.3 Impact of Volt-VAR Control on Long-Term Voltage Stability 316 15.3.1 Countermeasures 318 15.4 Test System Description 319 15.4.1 Test System 319 15.4.2 VVC Algorithm 321 15.4.3 Emergency Detection 322 15.5 Case Studies and Simulation Results 323 15.5.1 Results in Stable Scenarios 323 15.5.2 Results in Unstable Scenarios 326 15.5.3 Results with Emergency Support From Distribution 328 16 Electric Power Network Splitting Considering Frequency Dynamics and Transmission Overloading Constraints 337 Nelson Granda and Delia G. Colomé 16.1 Introduction 337 16.1.1 Stage One: Vulnerability Assessment 337 16.1.2 Stage Two: Islanding Process 338 16.2 Network Splitting Mechanism 340 16.2.1 Graph Modeling, Update, and Reduction 341 16.2.2 Graph Partitioning Procedure 342 16.2.3 Load Shedding/Generation Tripping Schemes 343 16.2.4 Tie-Lines Determination 344 16.3 Power Imbalance Constraint Limits 344 16.3.1 Reduced Frequency ResponseModel 345 16.3.2 Power Imbalance Constraint Limits Determination 347 16.4 Overload Assessment and Control 348 16.5 Test Results 349 16.5.1 Power System Collapse 349 16.5.2 Application of Proposed Methodology 351 16.5.3 Performance of Proposed ACIS 354 16.6 Conclusions and Recommendations 356 17 High-Speed Transmission Line Protection Based on Empirical Orthogonal Functions 361 Rommel P. Aguilar and Fabián E. Pérez-Yauli 17.1 Introduction 361 17.2 Empirical Orthogonal Functions 363 17.2.1 Formulation 363 17.3 Applications of EOFs for Transmission Line Protection 365 17.3.1 Fault Direction 366 17.3.2 Fault Classification 367 17.3.3 Fault Location 369 17.4 Study Case 369 17.4.1 Transmission Line Model and Simulation 369 17.4.2 The Power System and Transmission Line 370 17.4.3 Training Data 370 17.4.4 Training Data Matrix 370 17.4.5 Signal Conditioning 373 17.4.6 Energy Patterns 373 17.4.7 EOF Analysis 376 17.4.8 Evaluation of the Protection Scheme 379 17.4.9 Fault Classification 380 17.4.10 Fault Location 382 17.5 Conclusions 383 Study Cases:WECC 9-bus, ATPDrawModels and Parameters 384 18 Implementation of a Real Phasor Based Vulnerability Assessment and Control Scheme: The Ecuadorian WAMPAC System 389 Pablo X. Verdugo, Jaime C. Cepeda, Aharon B. De La Torre, and Diego E. Echeverría 18.1 Introduction 389 18.2 PMU Location in the Ecuadorian SNI 390 18.3 Steady-State Angle Stability 391 18.4 Steady-State Voltage Stability 395 18.5 Oscillatory Stability 398 18.5.1 Power System Stabilizer Tuning 402 18.6 Ecuadorian Special Protection Scheme (SPS) 407 18.6.1 SPS Operation Analysis 409 18.7 Concluding Remarks 410 Index 413

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents a comprehensive overview and analysis of the recent developments in signal processing for Chipless Radio Frequency Identification Systems This book presents the recent research results on Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) and provides smart signal processing methods for detection, signal integrity, multiple-access and localization, tracking, and collision avoidance in Chipless RFID systems. The book is divided into two sections: The first section discusses techniques for detection and denoising in Chipless RFID systems. These techniques include signal space representation, detection of frequency signatures using UWB impulse radio interrogation, time domain analysis, singularity expansion method for data extraction, and noise reduction and filtering techniques. The second section covers collision and error correction protocols, multi-tag identification through time-frequency analysis, FMCW radar based collision detection and multi-access for Chipless RFID tags as we as locaTable of ContentsPREFACE xi 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Chipless RFID 1 1.2 Chipless RFID Tag Reader 7 1.3 Conclusion 12 References 13 2 Signal Space Representation of Chipless RFID Signatures 15 2.1 Wireless Communication Systems and Chipless RFID Systems 15 2.1.1 The Conventional Digital Wireless Communication System 15 2.1.2 Chipped RFID System 16 2.1.3 Chipless RFID System 17 2.2 The Geometric Representation of Signals in a Signal Space 18 2.2.1 Representing Transmit Signals Using Orthonormal Basis Functions 18 2.2.2 Receiving Signals and Decoding Information 20 2.3 Novel Model for the Representation of Chipless RFID Signatures 22 2.3.1 Signal Space Representation of Frequency Signatures 24 2.3.2 Application of New Model 27 2.4 Performance Analysis 32 2.5 Experimental Results Using the Complete Tag 34 2.6 Conclusion 36 References 38 3 Time-Domain Analysis of Frequency Signature-Based Chipless RFID 39 3.1 Limitations of Current Continuous-Wave Swept Frequency Interrogation and Reading Methods for Chipless RFID 39 3.2 UWB-IR Interrogation of Time-Domain Reflectometry-Based Chipless RFID 43 3.3 Time-Domain Analysis of Frequency Signature-Based Chipless RFID 47 3.4 Analysis of Backscatter from a Multiresonator Loaded Chipless Tag 47 3.4.1 System Description and Mathematical Model for Backscatter Analysis 49 3.4.2 Chipless RFID Tag Design 53 3.5 Simulation Results 55 3.6 Processing Results 56 3.7 Analysis of Backscatter from a Multipatch-Based Chipless Tag 59 3.7.1 System Model and Expressions for Backscatter 59 3.7.2 The Design and Operation of the Multipatch-Based Chipless RFID 61 3.8 Electromagnetic Simulation of System 62 3.8.1 Four-Patch Backscattering Chipless Tag 62 3.8.2 Investigation into Reading Distance and Orientation of Tag 66 3.8.3 Measurement Results 67 3.9 Conclusion 68 References 70 4 Singularity Expansion Method for Data Extraction for Chipless RFID 71 4.1 Introduction 71 4.2 The SEM 72 4.2.1 The Complex Frequency Domain 74 4.2.2 Extraction of Poles and Residues 77 4.2.3 Matrix Pencil Algorithm 77 4.2.4 Case Study 81 4.3 Application of SEM for Chipless RFID 84 4.4 Conclusion 89 References 91 5 Denoising and Filtering Techniques for Chipless RFID 93 5.1 Introduction 93 5.2 Matrix Pencil Algorithm]Based Filtering 95 5.3 Noise Suppression Through Signal Space Representation 99 5.4 SSI 103 5.5 Wavelet-Based Filtering of Noise 107 5.6 Conclusion 108 References 109 6 Collision and Error Correction Protoco ls in Chipless RFID 111 6.1 Introduction 111 6.2 RFID System and Collision 113 6.2.1 Reader–Reader Collision 114 6.2.2 Reader–Tag Collision 114 6.2.3 Tag–Tag Collision 115 6.3 Applications that Involve Multiple Tags 115 6.4 Anticollision Algorithm in Chipped RFID Tags 118 6.4.1 SDMA 119 6.4.2 FDMA 122 6.4.3 CDMA 123 6.4.4 Time Division Multiple Access: TDMA 125 6.5 Anticollision Algorithm for Chipless RFID 128 6.5.1 Linear Block Coding 129 6.5.2 Correlative Signal Processing-Based Approach 131 6.5.3 Walsh-Domain Matched Filtering 131 6.5.4 Spatial Focusing (SDMA) 132 6.5.5 Other Anticollision/Multi-Access Methods 134 6.6 Collision Detection and Multiple Access for Chipless RFID System 135 6.7 Introducing Block Coding in Chipless RFID 138 6.7.1 Coding 139 6.7.2 Block Coding for Collision Detection 141 6.7.3 Block Coding for Improving Data Integrity 144 6.7.4 Advantages and Challenges of Block Coding 146 6.8 Conclusion 148 References 148 7 Multi-Tag Identification Through Time–Frequency Analysis 153 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 t–f Analysis and Chipless RFID Systems 154 7.3 FrFT: Background Theory 157 7.3.1 Linear Frequency Modulated Signal 157 7.3.2 FrFT 161 7.4 System Description 167 7.4.1 ADS Simulation Environment 170 7.4.2 Postprocessing in MATLAB 171 7.5 Results and Discussion 174 7.6 Conclusion 180 References 180 8 FMCW RADAR-Based Multi-Tag Identification 183 8.1 Introduction 183 8.2 Background Theory 186 8.2.1 Overview of FMCW RADAR 186 8.2.2 FMCW RADAR Technique for Chipless RFID Systems: Multi-Tag Identification 189 8.3 System Description 196 8.3.1 ADS Simulation Environment 196 8.3.2 Postprocessing in MATLAB 199 8.4 Results and Discussion 201 8.4.1 Collision Detection and Range Extraction 202 8.4.2 Tag Identification 206 8.5 Conclusion 212 References 213 9 Chipless Tag Localization 215 9.1 Introduction 215 9.2 Significance of Localization 216 9.3 Tag localization: Chipless Versus Conventional RFID 217 9.4 Conventional RFID Tag Localization Techniques 218 9.4.1 RTOF Estimation 218 9.4.2 RSS-Based Localization 220 9.4.3 Phase Evaluation Method 220 9.5 Chipless RFID Tag Localization 221 9.6 Benefits of Chipless Tag Localization 222 9.7 Proposed Localization for Chipless RFID Tags 223 9.7.1 Backscattered Signal from Chipless Tag 223 9.7.2 Maximum Detection Range 225 9.7.3 Localization of Tag 228 9.7.4 Ranging of Tag 230 9.7.5 Positioning of Tag 231 9.8 Results and Discussion 233 9.8.1 Simulation Environment 233 9.8.2 Experimental Setup 234 9.8.3 Results and Discussion 236 9.8.4 Unknown Tag Localization 240 9.9 Conclusion 241 References 242 10 State-of-the-Art Chipless RFID Reader 247 10.1 Introduction 247 10.2 Challenges in Mass Deployment 249 10.3 Smart RFID Reader 252 10.3.1 Physical Layer (Front End) 253 10.3.2 IT Layer (Back End) 255 10.4 Various Smart Readers 261 10.5 Conclusion 263 References 264 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisExamines new cooperative control methodologies tailored to real-world applications in various domains such as in communication systems, physics systems, and multi-robotic systems Provides the fundamental mechanism for solving collective behaviors in naturally-occurring systems as well as cooperative behaviors in man-made systems Discusses cooperative control methodologies using real-world applications, including semi-conductor laser arrays, mobile sensor networks, and multi-robotic systems Includes results from the research group at the Stevens Institute of Technology to show how advanced control technologies can impact challenging issues, such as high energy systems and oil spill monitoring Table of ContentsPreface xii About the Companion Website xiv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Motivation and Challenges 1 1.1.1 From Collective Behaviors to Cooperative Control 1 1.1.2 Challenges 2 1.2 Background and Related Work 4 1.2.1 Networked Communication Systems 4 1.2.2 Cooperating Autonomous Mobile Robots 5 1.2.3 Nanoscale Systems and Laser Synchronization 7 1.3 Overview of the Book 9 References 12 2 Distributed Consensus and Consensus Filters 19 2.1 Introduction and Literature Review 19 2.2 Preliminaries on Graph Theory 22 2.3 Distributed Consensus 26 2.3.1 The Continuous-Time Consensus Protocol 26 2.3.2 The Discrete-Time Consensus Protocol 28 2.4 Distributed Consensus Filter 29 2.4.1 PI Average Consensus Filter: Continuous-Time 30 2.4.2 PI Average Consensus Filter: Discrete-Time 30 References 31 Part I Distributed Consensus for Networked Communication Systems 37 3 Average Consensus for Quantized Communication 39 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Problem Formulation 41 3.2.1 Average Consensus Protocol with Quantization 41 3.2.2 Problem Statement 42 3.3 Weighting Matrix Design for Average Consensus with Quantization 42 3.3.1 State Transformation 43 3.3.2 Design for Fixed and Directed Graphs 44 3.3.3 Design for Switching and Directed Graphs 52 3.4 Simulations and Performance Evaluation 54 3.4.1 Fixed and Directed Graphs 54 3.4.2 Switching and Directed Graphs 55 3.4.3 Fixed and Directed Graphs 56 3.4.4 Performance Comparison 57 3.5 Conclusion 61 Notes 61 References 62 4 Weighted Average Consensus for Cooperative Spectrum Sensing 64 4.1 Introduction 64 4.2 Problem Statement 67 4.3 Cooperative Spectrum Sensing Using Weighted Average Consensus 71 4.3.1 Weighted Average Consensus Algorithm 71 4.3.2 Fusion Convergence Performance in Terms of Detection Probability 72 4.3.3 Optimal Weight Design under AWGN Measurement Channels 73 4.3.4 Heuristic Weight Design under Rayleigh Fading Channels 75 4.4 Convergence Analysis 76 4.4.1 Fixed Communication Channels 76 4.4.2 Dynamic Communication Channels 79 4.4.3 Convergence Rate with Random Link Failures 83 4.5 Simulations and Performance Evaluation 87 4.5.1 SU Network Setup 87 4.5.2 Convergence of Weighted Average Consensus 88 4.5.3 Metrics and Methodologies 90 4.5.4 Performance Evaluation 91 4.6 Conclusion 97 Notes 97 References 97 5 Distributed Consensus Filter for Radio Environment Mapping 101 5.1 Introduction 101 5.2 Problem Formulation 103 5.2.1 System Configuration and Distributed Sensor Placement 103 5.2.2 The Model and Problem Statement 105 5.3 Distributed REM Tracking 106 5.3.1 System Matrix Estimation 107 5.3.2 Kalman–EM Filter 108 5.3.3 PI Consensus Filter for Distributed Estimation and Tracking 109 5.4 Communication and Computation Complexity 110 5.4.1 Communication Complexity 112 5.4.2 Computation Complexity 112 5.5 Simulations and Performance Evaluation 113 5.5.1 Dynamic Radio Transmitter 113 5.5.2 Stationary Radio Transmitter 116 5.5.3 Comparison with Existing Centralized Methods 116 5.6 Conclusion 118 Notes 119 References 119 Part II Distributed Cooperative Control for Multirobotic Systems 123 6 Distributed Source Seeking by Cooperative Robots 125 6.1 Introduction 125 6.2 Problem Formulation 126 6.3 Source Seeking with All-to-All Communications 127 6.3.1 Cooperative Estimation of Gradients 127 6.3.2 Control Law Design 128 6.4 Distributed Source Seeking with Limited Communications 133 6.5 Simulations 135 6.6 Experimental Validation 138 6.6.1 The Robot 138 6.6.2 The Experiment Setup 140 6.6.3 Experimental Results 141 6.7 Conclusion 144 Notes 144 References 144 7 Distributed Plume Front Tracking by Cooperative Robots 146 7.1 Introduction 146 7.2 Problem Statement 148 7.3 Plume Front Estimation and Tracking by Single Robot 150 7.3.1 State Equation of the Plume Front Dynamics 151 7.3.2 Measurement Equation and Observer Design 152 7.3.3 Estimation-Based Tracking Control 153 7.3.4 Convergence Analysis 155 7.4 Multirobot Cooperative Tracking of Plume Front 156 7.4.1 Boundary Robots 157 7.4.2 Follower Robots 157 7.4.3 Convergence Analysis 158 7.5 Simulations 160 7.5.1 Simulation Environment 160 7.5.2 Single-Robot Plume Front Tracking 161 7.5.3 Multirobot Cooperative Plume Front Tracking 161 7.6 Conclusion 164 Notes 165 References 165 Part III Distributed Cooperative Control for Multiagent Physics Systems 167 8 Friction Control of Nano-particle Array 169 8.1 Introduction 169 8.2 The Frenkel–Kontorova Model 170 8.3 Open-Loop Stability Analysis 172 8.3.1 Linear Particle Interactions 172 8.3.2 Nonlinear Particle Interactions 176 8.4 Control Problem Formulation 177 8.5 Tracking Control Design 178 8.5.1 Tracking Control of the Average System 178 8.5.2 Stability of Single Particles in the Closed-Loop System 181 8.6 Simulation Results 186 8.7 Conclusion 191 Notes 194 References 195 9 Synchronizing Coupled Semiconductor Lasers 197 9.1 Introduction 197 9.2 The Model of Coupled Semiconductor Lasers 198 9.3 Stability Properties of Decoupled Semiconductor Laser 200 9.4 Synchronization of Coupled Semiconductor Lasers 203 9.5 Simulation Examples 207 9.6 Conclusion 209 Notes 209 References 210 Appendix A Notation and Symbols 212 Appendix B Kronecker Product and Properties 213 Appendix C Quantization Schemes 214 Appendix D Finite L2 Gain 215 Appendix E Radio Signal Propagation Model 216 Index 218

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides the foundations and principles needed for addressing the various challenges of developing smart cities Smart cities are emerging as a priority for research and development across the world. They open up significant opportunities in several areas, such as economic growth, health, wellness, energy efficiency, and transportation, to promote the sustainable development of cities. This book provides the basics of smart cities, and it examines the possible future trends of this technology. Smart Cities: Foundations, Principles, and Applications provides a systems science perspective in presenting the foundations and principles that span multiple disciplines for the development of smart cities. Divided into three partsfoundations, principles, and applicationsSmart Cities addresses the various challenges and opportunities of creating smart cities and all that they have to offer. It also covers smart city theory modeling and simulation, and examineTable of ContentsEditors Biographies xxiii List of Contributors xxvii Foreword xxxiii Preface xxxv Acknowledgments xxxvii 1 Cyber–Physical Systems in Smart Cities – Mastering Technological, Economic, and Social Challenges 1Martina Fromhold-Eisebith2 Big Data Analytics Processes and Platforms Facilitating Smart Cities 23Pethuru Raj and Sathish A. P. Kumar 3 Multi-Scale Computing for a Sustainable Built Environment 53Massimiliano Manfren 4 Autonomous Radios and Open Spectrum in Smart Cities 99Corey D. Cooke and Adam L. Anderson 5 Mobile Crowd-Sensing for Smart Cities 125Chandreyee Chowdhury and Sarbani Roy 6 Wide-Area Monitoring and Control of Smart Energy Cyber-Physical Systems (CPS) 155Nilanjan R. Chaudhuri 7 Smart Technologies and Vehicle-to-X (V2X) Infrastructures for Smart Mobility Cities 181Bernard Fong, Lixin Situ, and Alvis C.M. Fong 8 Smart Ecology of Cities: Integrating Development Impacts on Ecosystem Services for Land Parcels 209Marc Morrison, Ravi S. Srinivasan, and Cynnamon Dobbs 9 Data-Driven Modeling, Control, and Tools for Smart Cities 243Madhur Behl and Rahul Mangharam 10 Bringing Named Data Networks into Smart Cities 275Syed Hassan Ahmed, Safdar Hussain Bouk, Dongkyun Kim, and Mahasweta Sarkar 11 Human Context Sensing in Smart Cities 311Juhi Ranjan, Erin Griffiths, and Kamin Whitehouse 12 Smart Cities and the Symbiotic Relationship between Smart Governance and Citizen Engagement 343Tori Okner and Russell Preston 13 Smart Economic Development 373Madhavi Venkatesan 14 Managing the Cyber Security Life-Cycle of Smart Cities 391Mridul S. Barik, Anirban Sengupta, and Chandan Mazumdar 15 Mobility as a Service 409Christopher Expósito-Izquierdo, AiramExpósito-Márquez, and Julio Brito-Santana 16 Clustering and Fuzzy Reasoning as Data Mining Methods for the Development of Retrofit Strategies for Building Stocks 437Philipp Geyer and Arno Schlueter 17 A Framework to Achieve Large Scale Energy Savings for Building Stocks through Targeted Occupancy Interventions 473Aslihan Karatas, Allisandra Stoiko, and Carol C. Menassa 18 Sustainability in Smart Cities: Balancing Social, Economic, Environmental, and Institutional Aspects of Urban Life 503Ali Komeily and Ravi Srinivasan 19 Toward Resilience of the Electric Grid 535JiankangWang 20 Smart Energy and Grid: Novel Approaches for the Efficient Generation, Storage, and Usage of Energy in the Smart Home and the SmartGrid Linkup 575Julian Praß, JohannesWeber, Sebastian Staub, Johannes Bürner, Ralf Böhm, Thomas Braun, Moritz Hein, MarkusMichl,Michael Beck, and Jörg Franke 21 Building Cyber-Physical Systems – A Smart Building Use Case 605Jupiter Bakakeu, Franziska Schäfer, Jochen Bauer, MarkusMichl, and Jörg Franke 22 Climate Resilience and the Design of Smart Buildings 641Saranya Gunasingh, NoraWang, Doug Ahl, and Scott Schuetter 23 Smart Audio Sensing-Based HVAC Monitoring 669Shahriar Nirjon, Ravi Srinivasan, and Tamim Sookoor 24 Smart Lighting 697Jie Lian 25 Large Scale Air-Quality Monitoring in Smart and Sustainable Cities 725Xiaofan Jiang 26 The Smart City Production System 755Gary Graham, Jag Srai, Patrick Hennelly, and RoyMeriton 27 Smart Health Monitoring Using Smart Systems 773Carl Chalmers 28 Significance of Automated Driving in Japan 793Sadayuki Tsugawa 29 Environmental-Assisted Vehicular Data in Smart Cities 819Wei Chang, Huanyang Zheng, JieWu, Chiu C. Tan, and Haibin Ling Index 845

Read more less

Book SynopsisIntroduces advanced high-capacity data encoding and throughput improvement techniques for fully printable multi-bit Chipless RFID tags and reader systems The book proposes new approaches to chipless RFID tag encoding and tag detection that supersede their predecessors in signal processing, tag design, and reader architectures. The text is divided into two main sections: the first section introduces the fundamentals of electromagnetic (EM) imaging at mm-wave band to enhance the content capacity of Chipless RFID systems. The EM Imaging through Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR) technique is used for data extraction. The second section presents a few smart tag detection techniques for existing chipless RFID systems. A Multiple-Input and Multiple-Output (MIMO) based tag detection technique improves the spectral efficiency and increases data bit capacity. The book concludes with a discussion of how the MIMO approach can be combined with the image based technique to introduce a Table of ContentsPreface xiAcknowledgment xvPART I EM IMAGE-BASED CHIPLESS RFID SYSTEM 11 Introduction 31.1 Barcodes as Identification Technology 41.2 RFID Systems 61.3 Barcodes Versus RFID 71.4 Chipless RFID Tag for Low-Cost Item Tagging 71.5 Chipless RFID Systems 101.6 Spatial-Based Chipless RFID System 161.7 Book Outline 17References 202 EM Imaging 252.1 EM-Imaging Fundamentals 252.2 Range Resolution 272.3 Cross-Range or Azimuth Resolution 292.4 Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR) Necessity 312.5 EM Imaging for Content Coding 342.6 Conclusions 35References 363 Tiny Polarizers Secret of the New Technique 373.1 Introduction 373.2 Sweetness of Diffraction 393.3 Strip-Line Polarizer 433.4 Meander-Line Polarizer 453.5 Multiple Polarizers 473.6 Polarizer Fabrication 503.7 Conclusions 52References 534 Attributes of EM Polarizers 554.1 Introduction 554.2 Suggested Structures as Effective EM Polarizers 564.3 Cross-Polar Working Basis 594.4 Effect of Highly Reflective Items 644.5 Secure Identification 684.6 Bending Effect on Tag Performance 714.7 Conclusion 74References 765 System Technical Aspects 775.1 Introduction 775.2 The mm-Band of 60 GHz 775.3 Reader Antenna 815.4 Conclusions 106References 1076 SAR-Based Signal Processing 1116.1 Introduction 1116.2 SAR Modes of Operation 1126.3 SAR Block Diagram 1136.4 SAR-Based Signal Processing 1136.5 Tag Imaging Results 1166.6 System Downsides 1256.7 Conclusions 128References 1297 Fast Imaging Through MIMO-SAR 1317.1 Introduction 1317.2 Conventional Phased Array Antenna 1327.3 MIMO-SAR Systems 1337.4 Optimization 1437.5 MIMO-SAR Results 1557.6 Conclusion 158References 159PART II ADVANCED TAG DETECTION TECHNIQUES FOR CHIPLESS RFID SYSTEMS 1618 Introduction 1638.1 RFID Systems 1638.2 Review of Chipless RFID Tag Detection Techniques 1678.3 Maximum Likelihood Detection Techniques 1688.4 Conclusions 170References 1709 Chipless RFID Tag Design 1779.1 Introduction 1779.2 SISO Tag Design 1779.3 MIMO Tag Design 1799.4 Conclusions 188References 18810 ML Detection Techniques for SISO Chipless RFID Tags 18910.1 Introduction 18910.2 System Models–Time Domain 19010.3 System Models–Frequency Domain 20010.4 Simulations 20510.5 Experimental Setup 20710.6 Results 20810.7 Conclusion 230References 23011 Computationally Feasible Tag Detection Techniques 23311.1 Introduction 23311.2 Bit-By-Bit Detection Method 23411.3 Trellis-Tree-Based Viterbi Decoding 23711.4 Simulation Setup 24211.5 Results 24411.6 Conclusions 246References 24612 Signal Processing for MIMO-Based Chipless RFID Systems 24712.1 Introduction 24712.2 MIMO Decomposing Techniques 24912.3 Tag Detection in MIMO 25112.4 Experimental Setup 25312.5 Simulations 25412.6 Results 25812.7 Conclusion 268Reference 26813 Conclusion for Part II 26913.1 Summary of The Proposed Techniques in Part II 26913.2 Limitations of The Proposed System 27113.3 Potential Applications 27213.4 Future Work and Open Issues 273Reference 274Index 275

Read more less